Specifications | Canon 7428B007 Camcorder User Manual

Table of Contents
Introduction
Instrument Cluster
4
12
Warning lights and chimes
Gauges
Message center
12
18
22
Entertainment Systems
40
AM/FM stereo
AM/FM stereo with CD/MP3
Auxiliary input jack (Line in)
USB port
Satellite radio information
Navigation system
SYNC威
Climate Controls
Manual heating and air conditioning
Dual electronic automatic temperature control
Navigation system based climate control
Rear window defroster
Lights
Headlamps
Turn signal control
Bulb replacement
Driver Controls
Windshield wiper/washer control
Steering wheel adjustment
Power windows
Mirrors
Speed control
Tailgate
40
42
50
52
55
58
58
59
59
62
67
71
72
72
76
78
84
84
85
91
93
98
113
1
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Table of Contents
Locks and Security
126
Keys
Locks
Anti-theft system
126
126
138
Seating and Safety Restraints
Seating
Safety restraints
Airbags
Child restraints
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Tire information
Tire inflation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Vehicle loading
Trailer towing
Trailer brake controller-integrated
Recreational towing
Driving
Starting
Brakes
AdvanceTrac威
Transmission operation
Reverse sensing system
Rear-view camera system
Snowplowing
Roadside Emergencies
Getting roadside assistance
Hazard flasher control
Fuel pump shut-off
Fuses and relays
Changing tires
Wheel lug nut torque
Jump starting
Wrecker towing
2
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
147
147
166
185
199
223
225
228
241
249
256
263
269
271
271
277
279
291
297
299
315
319
319
320
321
321
330
337
338
344
Table of Contents
Customer Assistance
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only)
Reporting safety defects (Canada only)
346
352
352
Cleaning
353
Maintenance and Specifications
363
Engine compartment
Engine oil
Battery
Engine coolant
Fuel information
Air filter(s)
Part numbers
Maintenance product specifications and capacities
Engine data
365
368
371
373
379
396
399
400
404
Accessories
408
Ford Extended Service Plan
410
Index
413
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical
including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written
authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Copyright © 2009 Ford Motor Company
3
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Introduction
CONGRATULATIONS
Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford Motor Company product.
Please take the time to get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading
this handbook. The more you know and understand about your vehicle,
the greater the safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it.
For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the
following website:
• In the United States: www.ford.com
• In Canada: www.ford.ca
• In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx
• In Australia: www.ford.com.au
Additional owner information is given in separate publications.
This vehicle’s Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant
available and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe
options before they are generally available.
Remember to pass on this vehicle’s Owner’s Guide when reselling the
vehicle. It is an integral part of the vehicle.
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION
Warning symbols in this guide
How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others? In
this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments
highlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should be
read and observed.
Warning symbols on your vehicle
When you see this symbol, it is
imperative that you consult the
relevant section of this guide before
touching or attempting adjustment
of any kind.
4
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Introduction
Protecting the environment
We must all play our part in
protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized
disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this
guide with the tree symbol.
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE MATERIAL
Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules, seat belt
pretensioners, and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material
– Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive
continuously at the same speed for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
new vehicle operation. Vary your speed frequently in order to give the
moving parts a chance to break in.
Drive your new vehicle at least 1,000 miles (1,600 km) before towing a
trailer. For more detailed information about towing a trailer, refer to
Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils since
these additives may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil
usage.
5
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Introduction
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by
your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the Warranty
Guide/Customer Information Guide that is provided to you along with
your Owner’s Guide.
Special instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
WARNING: Please read the section Airbag Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats
should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.
Using your vehicle with a snowplow
For more information and guidelines for using your vehicle with a
snowplow, refer to the Driving chapter.
Using your vehicle as an ambulance
Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance.
Your vehicle is not equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation
Package.
Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles.
Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Guide carefully.
Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death.
6
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Introduction
NOTICE TO OWNERS OF THE F150
Note: Your vehicle is equipped with high performance tires. When first
driving the vehicle after it has been parked for a period of time, you may
experience a temporary ride disturbance. This is a characteristic of the
tires and should be no reason for concern. The condition should correct
itself within 5-15 miles (8-25 km) of driving. If the disturbance persists,
have the tires serviced by an authorized dealer.
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received
through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing
your vehicle. For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose to use the SYNC威
Vehicle Health Report, you consent that certain diagnostic information
may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford
authorized service facilities, and that the diagnostic information may be
used for any purpose. See your SYNC威 supplement for more information.
Event Data Recording
Other modules in your vehicle — event data recorders — are
capable of collecting and storing data during a crash or near
crash event. The recorded information may assist in the
investigation of such an event. The modules may record
information about both the vehicle and the occupants, potentially
including information such as:
• how various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were
buckled;
• how far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or the brake pedal;
• how fast the vehicle was traveling;
• where the driver was positioning the steering wheel; and
• longitude and latitude of vehicle at last location, using GPS
technology and advanced vehicle sensors.
7
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Introduction
To access this information, special equipment must be directly
connected to the recording modules. Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information
without obtaining consent, unless pursuant to court order or
where required by law enforcement, other government authorities
or other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties
may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada. To the extent that any law
pertaining to Event Data Recording applies to SYNC威 or its
features, please note the following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped)
is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist may, through any paired and
connected cell phone, disclose to emergency services that the
vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag
or, in certain vehicles, the activation of the fuel pump shut-off.
Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of
electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators the vehicle
location, and/or other details about the vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency
services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not
activate the feature. See your SYNC威 supplement for more
information. Additionally, when you connect to Traffic, Directions
and Information (if equipped, U.S. only), the service uses GPS
technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s
current location, travel direction, and speed (“vehicle travel
information”) only to help provide you with the directions, traffic
reports, or business searches you request. If you do not want
Ford or its vendors to receive this information, do not activate
the service. Ford Motor Company and the vendors it uses to
provide you with this information do not store your vehicle travel
information. For more information, see Traffic, Directions and
Information, Terms and Conditions. See your SYNC威 supplement
for more information.
CELL PHONE USE
The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,
drivers must not compromise their own or others’ safety when using
such equipment. Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety
and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, in-vehicle communications
systems, telematics devices and portable two-way radios.
8
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Introduction
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
EXPORT UNIQUE (NON–UNITED STATES/CANADA) VEHICLE
SPECIFIC INFORMATION
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the features and options that
are described in this Owner’s Guide. A market unique supplement may
be supplied that complements this book. By referring to the market
unique supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This
Owner’s Guide is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets.
Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built
for Export. Refer to this Owner’s Guide for all other required
information and warnings.
9
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Introduction
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Safety Alert
See Owner’s Guide
Fasten Safety Belt
Airbag - Front
Airbag - Side
Child Seat Lower
Anchor
Child Seat Tether
Anchor
Brake System
Anti-Lock Brake System
Parking Brake System
Brake Fluid Non-Petroleum Based
Parking Aid System
Stability Control System
Speed Control
Master Lighting Switch
Hazard Warning Flasher
Fog Lamps-Front
Fuse Compartment
Fuel Pump Reset
Windshield Wash/Wipe
Windshield
Defrost/Demist
Rear Window
Defrost/Demist
10
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Introduction
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Power Windows
Front/Rear
Power Window Lockout
Child Safety Door
Lock/Unlock
Interior Luggage
Compartment Release
Panic Alarm
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Do Not Open When Hot
Battery
Avoid Smoking, Flames,
or Sparks
Battery Acid
Explosive Gas
Fan Warning
Power Steering Fluid
Maintain Correct Fluid
Level
Service Engine Soon
Engine Air Filter
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
Jack
Check Fuel Cap
Low Tire Pressure
Warning
MAX
MIN
11
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES
Standard instrument cluster
Platinum instrument cluster
12
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Harley Davidson instrument cluster
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light may
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the
bulb works. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning light for additional information.
Note: Some warning lights are
reconfigurable telltale (RTT)
indicator lights and will illuminate in
the message center. These lights
function the same as the other
warning lights.
Service engine soon: The service
engine soon indicator light
illuminates when the ignition is first
turned to the on position to check
the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing. Normally, the service engine soon
light will stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no
malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds the service engine
soon light blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for
I/M testing. See the Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
testing in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
13
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board
Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to On
board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could
damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced
immediately by your authorized dealer.
WARNING: Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust
temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel
system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly
causing a fire.
Electronic throttle control
(RTT) (if equipped): Displays
when the engine has defaulted to a
“limp-home” operation. Report the
fault to a dealer at the earliest opportunity.
The message center will also display ENGINE FAILSAFE MODE. Refer to
Message center in this chapter.
Check 4X4 (RTT) (if equipped):
Displays with the message CHECK
4X4 when a four-wheel drive fault is
present.
Refer to Message center in this chapter.
Brake system warning light: To
!
P
confirm the brake system warning
light is functional, it will
BRAKE
momentarily illuminate when the
ignition is turned to the on position
when the engine is not running, or in a position between on and start, or
by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the on
position.
If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this time, seek
service immediately from your authorized dealer. Illumination after
releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level and the brake
system should be inspected immediately by your authorized dealer.
14
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
WARNING: Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning
light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle.
Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer. Driving extended
distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and
the risk of personal injury.
Anti-lock brake system: If the
ABS light stays illuminated or
ABS
continues to flash, a malfunction has
been detected, have the system
serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer. Normal braking is still functional unless the brake
warning light also is illuminated.
Airbag readiness: If this light fails
to illuminate when the ignition is
turned to on, continues to flash or
remains on, have the system
serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer. A chime will sound if there is a malfunction in the
indicator light.
Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten
your safety belt. A Belt-Minder威
chime will also sound to remind you
to fasten your safety belt. Refer to
the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter to activate/deactivate the Belt-Minder威 chime feature.
Charging system (RTT):
Illuminates when the battery is not
charging properly. If it stays on
while the engine is running, there
may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
Engine oil pressure (RTT):
Displays when the oil pressure falls
below the normal range. Refer to
Engine oil in the Maintenance
and Specifications chapter.
15
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Door ajar (RTT): Displays when
the ignition is in the on position and
any door is open.
Engine coolant temperature
(RTT): Illuminates when the engine
coolant temperature is high. Stop
the vehicle as soon as possible, switch off the engine and let cool. Refer
to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
Low tire pressure warning:
Illuminates when your tire pressure
is low. If the light remains on at
start up or while driving, the tire
pressure should be checked. Refer
to Inflating your tires in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. When
the ignition is first turned to on, the light will illuminate for three
seconds to ensure the bulb is working. If the light does not turn on, have
the system inspected by your authorized dealer. For more information on
this system, refer to Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) in the
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
Overdrive off (if equipped):
O/D
Illuminates when the overdrive
OFF
function of the transmission has
been turned off; refer to the
Driving chapter. If the light does not illuminate, have the transmission
serviced soon, or damage may occur.
Transmission Tow/Haul Feature
(six speed transmission only):
Displays when the Tow/Haul feature
has been activated. Refer to the
Driving chapter for transmission function and operation. If the light
flashes steadily, have the system serviced immediately, damage to the
transmission could occur.
16
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
AdvanceTrac威/Traction control
(RTT) (if equipped): Displays
when the AdvanceTrac威/Traction
control is active. If the light remains
on, have the system serviced
immediately, refer to the Driving chapter for more information.
4X2 (RTT) (if equipped):
Displays momentarily when
4x2
two-wheel drive high is selected. If
the light fails to display when the
ignition is turned on, or remains on,
have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer.
Four wheel drive low (RTT)
4x4
(if equipped): Displays when
LOW
four-wheel drive low is engaged. If
the light fails to display when the
ignition is turned on, or remains on, have the system serviced
immediately by your authorized dealer.
Four wheel drive high (RTT)
4x4
(if equipped): Displays when
HIGH
four-wheel drive high is engaged. If
the light fails to display when the
ignition is turned on, or remains on, have the system serviced
immediately by your authorized dealer.
All-wheel drive (RTT)
(if equipped): Displays when using
AWD
the AWD system.
Electronic locking differential
(RTT) (if equipped): Displays
when using the electronic locking
differential.
Speed control: Illuminates when
the speed control is activated. Turns
off when the speed control system
is deactivated.
17
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Anti-theft system: Flashes when
the SecuriLock威 Passive Anti-theft
System has been activated.
Turn signal: Illuminates when the
left or right turn signal or the
hazard lights are turned on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.
High beams: Illuminates when the
high beam headlamps are turned on.
Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the
ignition in the off or accessory position and the driver’s door is opened.
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the
driver’s door is opened.
GAUGES
Standard instrument cluster
18
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Platinum instrument cluster
Harley Davidson instrument cluster
19
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Speedometer: Indicates the
current vehicle speed.
Engine coolant temperature
gauge: Indicates engine coolant
temperature. At normal operating
temperature, the needle will be in
the normal range (between “H” and
“C”). If it enters the red section, the
engine is overheating. Stop the
vehicle as soon as safely possible,
switch off the engine and let the engine cool.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
Odometer: Registers the total miles
(kilometers) of the vehicle.
Refer to Message center in the this
chapter on how to switch the
display from Metric to English.
Trip odometer: Registers the miles (kilometers) of individual journeys.
• With standard message center
Press the SELECT/RESET stem
once to switch from the odometer to
the trip odometer. Press the stem
again to select Trip A and Trip B
features. To reset the trip, press and
hold the stem until it resets.
• With optional message center: see TRIP A/B under Message center in
this chapter.
20
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Tachometer (if equipped):
Indicates the engine speed in
revolutions per minute. Driving with
your tachometer pointer
continuously at the top of the scale
may damage the engine.
Engine oil pressure gauge:
Indicates engine oil pressure. The
needle should stay in the normal
operating range (between “L” and
“H”). If the needle falls below the
normal range, stop the vehicle, turn
off the engine and check the engine
oil level. Add oil if needed. If the oil
level is correct, have your vehicle checked by your authorized dealer.
Fuel gauge: Indicates
approximately how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank (when the ignition
is in the on position). The fuel
gauge may vary slightly when the
vehicle is in motion or on a grade.
The arrow next to the fuel pump
icon indicates which side of the
vehicle the fuel filler inlet is located.
For more information, refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter.
Transmission fluid temperature gauge: If the gauge is in the:
Normal area (normal) - the
transmission fluid is within the
normal operating temperature
(between “H” and “C”).
21
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Yellow area (warning) — the
transmission fluid is higher than
normal operating temperature. This
can be caused by special operation
conditions (i.e. snowplowing, towing
or off road use). Refer to Special
Operating Conditions in the
scheduled maintenance
information for instructions. Operating the transmission for extended
periods of time with the gauge in the yellow area may cause internal
transmission damage.
Altering the severity of the driving conditions is recommended to lower
the transmission temperature into the normal range.
Red area (over temperature) —
the transmission fluid is overheating.
Stop the vehicle to allow the
temperature to return to normal
range.
If the gauge is operating in the Yellow or Red area, stop the vehicle and
verify the airflow is not restricted such as snow or debris blocking airflow
through the grill. If the gauge continues to show high temperatures, see
your authorized dealer.
STANDARD MESSAGE CENTER (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle’s message center is capable of monitoring many vehicle
systems and will alert you to potential vehicle problems and various
conditions with an informational message followed by a long indicator
chime.
The message center display is located in the instrument cluster.
Selectable features (information menu)
Press and release the SELECT/RESET stem, located in the speedometer,
to cycle through the following features:
TRIP A/B
Registers the distance of individual journeys. Press and release INFO
button until the A or B trip appears in the display (this represents the
trip mode). Press and hold the SELECT/RESET stem to reset.
Refer to UNITS later in this section to switch the display from Metric to
English.
22
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
MYKEY MILES (km) (if programmed)
For more information, refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security
chapter.
MILES (km) TO E
This displays an estimate of approximately how far you can drive with
the fuel remaining in your tank under normal driving conditions.
Remember to turn the ignition off when refueling to allow this feature to
correctly detect the added fuel.
LOW FUEL LEVEL will display when you have approximately 50 miles
(80 km), to empty. Press RESET to clear this warning message. It will
return at approximately 25 miles (40 km), 10 miles (16 km) and 0 miles
(0 km) miles to empty.
Distance to empty is calculated using a running average fuel economy,
which is based on your recent driving history of 500 miles (800 km).
This value is not the same as the average fuel economy display. The
running average fuel economy is re-initialized to a factory default value if
the battery is disconnected.
AVG MPG (L/100km)
Average fuel economy displays your average fuel economy in miles/gallon
or liters/100 km.
If you calculate your average fuel economy by dividing distance traveled
by gallons of fuel used (liters of fuel used by 100 kilometers traveled),
your figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons:
• Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up
• Differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at
service stations
• Variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another
• Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 gallon (liter)
To determine your average highway fuel economy, do the following:
1. Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles (8 km) with the speed control
system engaged to display a stabilized average.
2. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.
It is important to press the SELECT/RESET stem (press and hold for
two seconds in order to reset the function) after setting the speed
control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings.
For more information refer to Essentials of good fuel economy in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
23
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
HOLD RESET FOR SETUP MENU
Press and hold the SELECT/RESET stem when this message is displayed
to get into the SETUP menu. The following setup items are available:
OIL LIFE
This displays the remaining oil life.
An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center and
according to the recommended maintenance schedule. USE ONLY
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS.
To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change
(approximately 7,500 miles [12,000 km] or 12 months) perform the
following:
1. Press and release the SELECT/RESET stem to display “OIL LIFE
XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW”.
2. Press and hold the SELECT/RESET stem for two seconds and release
to reset the oil life to 100%.
Note: To change oil life 100% miles value from 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
or 12 months to another value, proceed to Step 3.
3. Once “OIL LIFE SET TO XXX%” is displayed, release and press the
SELECT/RESET stem to change the Oil Life Start Value. Each release
and press will reduce the value by 10%.
UNITS
Displays the current units English or Metric.
Press the SELECT/RESET stem to change from English to Metric.
AUTOLAMP (SEC)
This feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the
ignition is switched off.
Press the SELECT/RESET stem to select the new autolamp delay values
of 0, 10, 20, 30, 60, 90, 120 or 180 seconds.
AUTOLOCK
This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the vehicle is
shifted into any gear, putting the vehicle in motion.
Press the SELECT/RESET stem to turn autolock on or off.
AUTOUNLOCK
This feature automatically unlocks all vehicle doors when the driver’s
door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being turned off.
24
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Press the SELECT/RESET stem to turn autounlock on or off.
EASY ENTRY (if equipped)
This feature automatically moves the driver’s seat backwards for easy
exit/entry from the vehicle.
Press the SELECT/RESET stem to turn the easy entry/exit seat on or
off.
REAR PARK AID (if equipped)
This feature sounds a warning tone to warn the driver of obstacles near
the rear bumper, and functions only when R (Reverse) gear is selected.
Press the SELECT/RESET stem to turn the rear park assist on or off.
TRAILER SWAY (if equipped)
This feature uses the electronic stability control to mitigate trailer sway,
Press the SELECT/RESET stem to turn trailer sway on or off.
CREATE MYKEY / MYKEY SETUP CLEAR MYKEY
MyKey™ allows you to program a restricted driving mode on one
standard key supplied with the vehicle or any programmed spare key. To
create MyKey, refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter.
LANGUAGE = ENGLISH / SPANISH / FRENCH
Note: When returning to the setup menu and a non-English language
has been selected, HOLD RESET FOR ENGLISH will be displayed to
change back to English. Press and hold the SELECT/RESET stem to
change back to English.
Allows you to choose which language the message center will display in.
Selectable languages are English, Spanish, or French.
Waiting four seconds or pressing the SELECT/RESET stem cycles the
message center through each of the language choices.
Press and hold the SELECT/RESET stem for two seconds to set the
language choice.
HOLD RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK
Press and hold the SELECT/RESET stem when this message is displayed
to get into to start the system check:
The message center will cycle through each of the systems being
monitored. For each of the monitored systems, the message center will
indicate either an OK message or a warning message for two seconds.
Note: Some systems show a message only if a condition is present.
25
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
1. XXX% OIL LIFE
2. CHARGING SYSTEM
3. DOOR STATUS
4. BRAKE SYSTEM
5. XX MILES TO E FUEL LEVEL XXX
6. TBC GAIN = XX.X
NO TRAILER (if equipped and no trailer connected)
7. TBC GAIN = XX.X
OUTPUT = ////// (if equipped and trailer connected)
8. MYKEY DISTANCE (if programmed)
9. MYKEY PROGRAMMED
10. ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED
System warnings
System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your
vehicle’s operating systems.
In the event of a multiple warning situation, the message center will
cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for four
seconds.
The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no
more warning messages.
Types of messages and warnings:
• Some messages will appear briefly to inform you of something you
may need to take action on or be informed of.
• Some messages will appear once and then again when the vehicle is
restarted.
• Some messages will reappear after clearing or being reset if a problem
or condition is still present and needs your attention.
• Some messages can be acknowledged and reset by pressing the
SELECT/RESET stem. This allows you to use the full message center
functionality by clearing the message.
If the message will not reset or clear when pressing the SELECT/RESET
stem, you must address the problem in order to clear the message.
DRIVER DOOR AJAR— Displayed when the driver door is not
completely closed.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR— Displayed when the passenger door is
not completely closed.
26
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR— Displayed when the rear left door is not
completely closed.
REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR— Displayed when the rear right door is
not completely closed.
XXX MILES TO E FUEL LEVEL LOW— Displayed as an early
reminder of a low fuel condition.
CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM— Displayed when the electrical system
is not maintaining proper voltage. If you are operating electrical
accessories when the engine is idling at a low speed, turn off as many of
the electrical loads as soon as possible. If the warning stays on or comes
on when the engine is operating at normal speeds, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT— Displayed when a tire pressure
sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. For more
information on how the system operates under these conditions, refer to
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
LOW TIRE PRESSURE— Displayed when one or more tires on your
vehicle have low tire pressure. Refer to Inflating Your Tires in the
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
CHECK FUEL FILL INLET — Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may
not be properly closed. Refer to Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel system in
the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
CHECK 4X4 (if equipped)—Displayed when a 4X4 system fault is
present. For more information, refer to Four-wheel drive (4WD)
operation in the Driving chapter.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT— Displayed when the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL LOW— Indicates the brake fluid level is low
and the brake system should be inspected immediately. Refer to Brake
fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
TRAILER BRAKE MODULE FAULT (if equipped)— Displayed and
accompanied by a single chime, in response to faults sensed by the TBC.
Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for
more information.
27
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
OIL CHANGE REQUIRED— Displayed when an oil change is required.
XX%OIL LIFE CHANGE SOON—Displayed when an oil change will
soon be required and shows the percentage of oil life left.
WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER (if equipped)— Displayed if there are
certain faults in the vehicle wiring and trailer wiring/brake system. Refer
to Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for more
information.
CHECK REAR PARK AID (if equipped)— Displayed when the
transmission is in R (Reverse). Refer to Reverse sensing system in the
Driving chapter.
PARK BRAKE ENGAGED — Displayed when the parking brake is set,
the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph
(5 km/h). If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
TRAILER DISCONNECTED (if equipped)— Displayed when a trailer
connection becomes disconnected, either intentionally or unintentionally,
and has been sensed during a given ignition cycle. Refer to Trailer
towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for more information.
CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM — Displayed when a fault has been detected
by the ABS module.
TRAILER SWAY REDUCE SPEED (if equipped)— Displayed when
the trailer sway control has detected trailer sway. For more information,
refer to the Driving chapter for more information.
4X4 SHIFT IN PROGRESS — Displayed on 4x4 vehicles only when
4x4 Low, 4x4 High or 4x4 auto is selected. For further information, refer
to Four-wheel drive (4WD) operation in the Driving chapter.
FOR 4X4 LOW SLOW TO 3 MPH (if equipped)— Displayed when
4X4 LOW is selected while the vehicle is moving. For more information,
refer to Four-wheel drive (4WD) operation in the Driving chapter.
FOR 4X4 LOW SHIFT TO N (if equipped)— Displayed when 4X4
LOW is selected and the vehicle is stopped. For more information, refer
to Four-wheel drive (4WD) operation in the Driving chapter.
TO EXIT 4X4 LOW SLOW TO 3 MPH (if equipped)— Displayed
when 2WD is selected while the vehicle is operating in 4X4 LOW. For
more information, refer to Four-wheel drive (4WD) operation in the
Driving chapter.
TO EXIT 4X4 LOW SHIFT TO N (if equipped)— Displayed when
2WD is selected while the vehicle has been stopped in 4X4 LOW. For
more information, refer to Four-wheel drive (4WD) operation in the
Driving chapter.
28
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
SHIFT DELAYED PULL FORWARD (if equipped)— May display
when shifting to or from 4X4 LOW. For more information, refer to
Four-wheel drive (4WD) operation in the Driving chapter.
TRAILER CONNECTED (if equipped)— Displayed when a correct
trailer connection (a trailer with electric trailer brakes) is sensed during
a given ignition cycle. Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter for more information.
TRAIN LEFT FRONT TIRE (if equipped)— Displayed when training
the TPMS system. Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires, Wheels
and Loading chapter for more information.
TRAIN RIGHT FRONT TIRE (if equipped)— Displayed when
training the TPMS system. Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires,
Wheels and Loading chapter for more information.
TRAIN RIGHT REAR TIRE (if equipped)— Displayed when training
the TPMS system. Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires, Wheels
and Loading chapter for more information.
TRAIN LEFT REAR TIRE (if equipped)— Displayed when training
the TPMS system. Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires, Wheels
and Loading chapter for more information.
TIRES NOT TRAINED – REPEAT (if equipped)— Displayed when
an error occurs while training the TPMS system. Refer to TPMS reset
procedure in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for more
information.
TRAINING COMPLETE (if equipped)— Displayed when training of
the TPMS system is complete. Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for more information.
MY KEY ACTIVE DRIVE SAFELY — Displayed at startup when
MyKey™ is in use. Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter
for more information.
KEY COULD NOT PROGRAM — Displayed when an attempt is made
to program a spare key using two existing MyKeys. Refer to MyKey™ in
the Locks and Security chapter for more information.
VEHICLE SPEED 80 MPH MAX — Displayed when a MyKey™ is in
use and the Admin has enabled the MyKey speed limit and the vehicle
speed is 80 mph (130 km/h). Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and
Security chapter for more information.
SPEED LIMITED TO 80 MPH — Displayed when starting the vehicle
and MyKey™ is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on. Refer to
MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter for more information.
29
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
CHECK SPEED DRIVE SAFELY — Displayed when a MyKey™ is in
use and the optional setting is on and the vehicle exceeds a preselected
speed. Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter for more
information.
VEHICLE NEAR TOP SPEED — Displayed when a MyKey™ is in use
and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is approaching
80 mph (130 km/h). Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security
chapter for more information.
TOP SPEED MY KEY SETTING — Displayed when a MyKey™ is in
use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is 80 mph
(130 km/h). Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter for
more information.
BUCKLE UP TO UNMUTE AUDIO — Displayed when a MyKey™ is in
use and Belt-Minder威 is activated. Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and
Security chapter for more information.
ADVTRAC ON MYKEY SETTING — Displayed when a MyKey™ is in
use when trying to disable the AdvanceTrac威 system and the optional
setting is on. Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter for
more information.
SERVICE ADVANCETRAC — Displayed when the AdvanceTrac威
system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
OPTIONAL MESSAGE CENTER (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle’s message center is capable of monitoring many vehicle
systems and will alert you to potential vehicle problems and various
conditions with an informational message followed by a long indicator
chime.
The message center display is located in the instrument cluster.
Info
Press the INFO button repeatedly to
cycle through the following features:
TRIP A/B
Registers the distance of individual journeys. Press and release INFO
button until the A or B trip appears in the display (this represents the
trip mode). Press and hold the RESET button to reset.
30
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Refer to UNITS later in this section to switch the display from Metric to
English.
MYKEY MILES (km) (If programmed)
For more information, refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security
chapter.
MILES (km) TO E
This displays an estimate of approximately how far you can drive with
the fuel remaining in your tank under normal driving conditions.
Remember to turn the ignition off when refueling to allow this feature to
correctly detect the added fuel.
LOW FUEL LEVEL will display when you have approximately 50 miles
(80 km), to empty. Press RESET to clear this warning message. It will
return at approximately 25 miles (40 km), 10 miles (16 km) and 0 miles
(0 km) miles to empty.
Distance to empty is calculated using a running average fuel economy,
which is based on your recent driving history of 500 miles (800 km).
This value is not the same as the average fuel economy display. The
running average fuel economy is re-initialized to a factory default value if
the battery is disconnected.
AVG MPG (L/100km)
Average fuel economy displays your average fuel economy in miles/gallon
or liters/100 km.
If you calculate your average fuel economy by dividing distance traveled
by gallons of fuel used (liters of fuel used by 100 kilometers traveled),
your figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons:
• Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up
• Differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at
service stations
• Variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another
• Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 gallon (liter)
To determine your average highway fuel economy, do the following:
1. Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles (8 km) with the speed control
system engaged to display a stabilized average.
2. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.
It is important to press the RESET button (press and hold RESET for
two seconds in order to reset the function) after setting the speed
control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings.
31
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
For more information refer to Essentials of good fuel economy in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
MPG (L/km)
This displays instantaneous fuel economy as a bar graph ranging from ↓
poor economy to ↑ excellent economy.
Your vehicle must be moving to calculate instantaneous fuel economy.
When your vehicle is not moving, this function shows ↓, one or no bars
illuminated. Instantaneous fuel economy cannot be reset.
TIMER
Timer displays the trip elapsed drive time.
To operate, do the following:
1. Press and release RESET in order to start the timer.
2. Press and release RESET to pause the timer.
3. Press and hold RESET until the timer resets.
System check and vehicle feature customization
Press the SETUP button repeatedly
to cycle the message center through
the following features:
RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK
When this message appears, press the RESET button and the message
center will begin to cycle through the following systems and provide a
status of the item if needed.
Note: Some systems show a message only if a condition is present.
1. XXX% OIL LIFE
2. CHARGING SYSTEM
3. DOOR STATUS
4. BRAKE SYSTEM
5. XX MILES TO E FUEL LEVEL XXX
6. TBC GAIN = XX.X
NO TRAILER (if equipped and no trailer connected)
7. TBC GAIN = XX.X
OUTPUT = ////// (if equipped and trailer connected)
8. MYKEY DISTANCE (if programmed)
32
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
9. MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED
10. ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED
OIL LIFE
This displays the remaining oil life.
An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center and
according to the recommended maintenance schedule. USE ONLY
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS.
To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change
(approximately 7,500 miles [12,000 km] or 12 months) perform the
following:
1. Press and release the SETUP button to display “OIL LIFE XXX%
HOLD RESET = NEW”.
2. Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds and release to reset
the oil life to 100%.
Note: To change oil life 100% miles value from 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
or 12 months to another value, proceed to Step 3.
3. Once “OIL LIFE SET TO XXX%” is displayed, release and press the
RESET button to change the Oil Life Start Value. Each release and press
will reduce the value by 10%.
Note: Oil life start value of 100% equals 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or
12 months. For example, setting oil life start value to 60% sets the oil
life start value to 4,500 miles (7,200 km) and 219 days.
UNITS
Displays the current units in English or Metric.
Press the RESET button to change from English to Metric.
AUTOLAMP (SEC)
This feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the
ignition is switched off.
Press the RESET button to select the new autolamp delay values of 0,
10, 20, 30, 60, 90, 120 or 180 seconds.
AUTOLOCK
This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the vehicle is
shifted into any gear, putting the vehicle in motion.
Press the RESET button to turn autolock on or off.
33
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
AUTOUNLOCK
This feature automatically unlocks all vehicle doors when the driver’s
door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being turned off.
Press the RESET button to turn autounlock on or off.
RUNNING BOARDS (if equipped)
This feature automatically deploys the side running boards for easy
entry/exit from the vehicle or for cleaning.
1. To disable/enable the power running board feature with the vehicle in
P (Park), select this function from the SETUP button for the current
display mode.
2. Press the RESET button to select the running boards setting as
follows:
• AUTO: the running boards will automatically deploy when a door is
opened and automatically retract when the door is closed,
• OUT: the running boards will remain deployed regardless of the doors
being open/closed. This setting can be used when washing the vehicle, or
accessing the roof rack. The running boards will stow and enter AUTO
mode when the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h),
• OFF: the running boards will remain IN regardless of the doors being
open/closed.
EASY ENTRY
This feature automatically moves the driver’s seat backwards for easy
exit/entry from the vehicle.
Press the RESET button to turn the easy entry/exit seat on or off.
REAR PARK AID (if equipped)
This feature sounds a warning tone to warn the driver of obstacles near
the rear bumper, and functions only when R (Reverse) gear is selected.
Press the RESET button to turn the rear park assist on or off.
TRAILER SWAY (if equipped)
This feature uses the electronic stability control to mitigate trailer sway,
Press the RESET button to turn trailer sway on or off.
CREATE MYKEY / MYKEY SETUP / CLEAR MYKEY
For more information refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security
chapter.
LANGUAGE = ENGLISH / SPANISH / FRENCH
Allows you to choose which language the message center will display in.
Selectable languages are English, Spanish, or French.
34
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Waiting four seconds or pressing the RESET button cycles the message
center through each of the language choices.
Press the RESET button to set the language choice.
System warnings
System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your
vehicle’s operating systems.
In the event of a multiple warning situation, the message center will
cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for four
seconds.
The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no
more warning messages.
Types of messages and warnings:
• Some messages will appear briefly to inform you of something you
may need to take action on or be informed of.
• Some messages will appear once and then again when the vehicle is
restarted.
• Some messages will reappear after clearing or being reset if a problem
or condition is still present and needs your attention.
• Some messages can be acknowledged and reset by pressing RESET.
This allows you to use the full message center functionality by clearing
the message.
DRIVER DOOR AJAR— Displayed when the driver door is not
completely closed.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR— Displayed when the passenger door is
not completely closed.
REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR— Displayed when the rear left door is not
completely closed.
REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR— Displayed when the rear right door is
not completely closed.
XXX MILES TO E FUEL LEVEL LOW— Displayed as an early
reminder of a low fuel condition.
PARK BRAKE ENGAGED — Displayed when the parking brake is set,
the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph
(5 km/h). If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM — Displayed when a fault has been detected
by the ABS module.
35
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM— Displayed when the electrical system
is not maintaining proper voltage. If you are operating electrical
accessories when the engine is idling at a low speed, turn off as many of
the electrical loads as soon as possible. If the warning stays on or comes
on when the engine is operating at normal speeds, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT— Displayed when a tire pressure
sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. For more
information on how the system operates under these conditions, refer to
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
LOW TIRE PRESSURE— Displayed when one or more tires on your
vehicle have low tire pressure. Refer to Inflating Your Tires in the
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
CHECK FUEL FILL INLET — Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may
not be properly closed. Refer to Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel system in
the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
SERVICE ADVANCETRAC — Displayed when the AdvanceTrac威
system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
CHECK 4X4 (if equipped)— Displayed when a 4X4 system fault is
present. For more information, refer to Four-wheel drive (4WD)
operation in the Driving chapter.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT — Displayed when the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL LOW— Indicates the brake fluid level is low
and the brake system should be inspected immediately. Refer to Brake
fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
OIL CHANGE REQUIRED— Displayed when an oil change is required.
XX%OIL LIFE CHANGE SOON —Displayed when an oil change will
soon be required and shows the percentage of oil life left.
TRAILER BRAKE MODULE FAULT (if equipped)— Displayed and
accompanied by a single chime, in response to faults sensed by the TBC.
Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for
more information.
36
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER (if equipped)— Displayed if there are
certain faults in the vehicle wiring and trailer wiring/brake system. Refer
to Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for more
information.
CHECK PARK AID (if equipped)— Displayed when the transmission
is in R (Reverse) and the reverse sensing system (park aid) is disabled.
TRAILER DISCONNECTED (if equipped)— Displayed when a trailer
connection becomes disconnected, either intentionally or unintentionally,
and has been sensed during a given ignition cycle. Refer to Trailer
towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for more information.
TRAILER SWAY REDUCE SPEED (if equipped)— Displayed when
the trailer sway control has detected trailer sway. For more information,
refer to the Driving chapter for more information.
4X4 SHIFT IN PROGRESS — Displayed when the 4X4 system is
making a shift. For further information, refer to Four-wheel drive
(4WD) operation in the Driving chapter.
FOR 4X4 LOW SLOW TO 3 MPH (if equipped)— Displayed when
4X4 LOW is selected while the vehicle is moving. For more information,
refer to Four-wheel drive (4WD) operation in the Driving chapter.
FOR 4X4 LOW SHIFT TO N (if equipped)— Displayed when 4X4
LOW is selected and the vehicle is stopped. For more information, refer
to Four-wheel drive (4WD) operation in the Driving chapter.
TO EXIT 4X4 LOW SLOW TO 3 MPH (if equipped)— Displayed
when 2WD is selected while the vehicle is operating in 4X4 LOW. For
more information, refer to Four-wheel drive (4WD) operation in the
Driving chapter.
TO EXIT 4X4 LOW SHIFT TO N (if equipped)— Displayed when
2WD is selected while the vehicle has been stopped in 4X4 LOW. For
more information, refer to Four-wheel drive (4WD) operation in the
Driving chapter.
SHIFT DELAYED PULL FORWARD (if equipped)— May display
when shifting to or from 4X4 LOW. For more information, refer to
Four-wheel drive (4WD) operation in the Driving chapter.
TRAILER CONNECTED (if equipped)— Displayed when a correct
trailer connection (a trailer with electric trailer brakes) is sensed during
a given ignition cycle. Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter for more information.
TRAIN LEFT FRONT TIRE (if equipped)— Displayed when training
the TPMS system. Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires, Wheels
and Loading chapter for more information.
37
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
TRAIN RIGHT FRONT TIRE (if equipped)— Displayed when
training the TPMS system. Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires,
Wheels and Loading chapter for more information.
TRAIN RIGHT REAR TIRE (if equipped)— Displayed when training
the TPMS system. Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires, Wheels
and Loading chapter for more information.
TRAIN LEFT REAR TIRE (if equipped)— Displayed when training
the TPMS system. Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires, Wheels
and Loading chapter for more information.
TIRES NOT TRAINED – REPEAT (if equipped)— Displayed when
an error occurs while training the TPMS system. Refer to TPMS reset
procedure in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for more
information.
TRAINING COMPLETE (if equipped)— Displayed when training of
the TPMS system is complete. Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for more information.
MY KEY ACTIVE DRIVE SAFELY — Displayed at startup when
MyKey™ is in use. Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter
for more information.
KEY COULD NOT PROGRAM — Displayed when an attempt is made
to program a spare key using two existing MyKeys. Refer to MyKey™ in
the Locks and Security chapter for more information.
VEHICLE SPEED 80 MPH MAX — Displayed when a MyKey™ is in
use and the Admin has enabled the MyKey speed limit and the vehicle
speed is 80 mph (130 km/h). Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and
Security chapter for more information.
SPEED LIMITED TO 80 MPH — Displayed when starting the vehicle
and MyKey™ is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on. Refer to
MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter for more information.
CHECK SPEED DRIVE SAFELY — Displayed when a MyKey™ is in
use and the optional setting is on and the vehicle exceeds a preselected
speed. Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter for more
information.
VEHICLE NEAR TOP SPEED — Displayed when a MyKey™ is in use
and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is approaching
80 mph (130 km/h). Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security
chapter for more information.
TOP SPEED MY KEY SETTING — Displayed when a MyKey™ is in
use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is 80 mph
(130 km/h). Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter for
more information.
38
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
BUCKLE UP TO UNMUTE AUDIO — Displayed when a MyKey™ is in
use and Belt-Minder威 is activated. Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and
Security chapter for more information.
ADVTRAC ON MYKEY SETTING — Displayed when a MyKey™ is in
use when trying to disable the AdvanceTrac威 system and the optional
setting is on. Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter for
more information.
HILL DESCENT CONTROL FAULT (if equipped)— Displayed when
a hill descent system fault is present.
HILL CNTRL OFF SYSTEM COOLING (if equipped)— Displayed
when a hill descent system fault is present.
FOR OFF ROAD SLOW TO 5 MPH (if equipped)— Displayed when
the vehicle speed requirement for off road mode entry has not been met.
OFF ROAD MODE ENABLED (if equipped)— Displayed when off
road mode becomes active.
EXITING OFF ROAD MODE (if equipped)— Displayed when off
road mode becomes inactive.
HILL DESCENT CONTROL ACTIVE (if equipped)— Displayed
when hill descent control mode becomes active.
HILL DESCENT CONTROL OFF (if equipped)— Displayed when hill
descent control mode becomes inactive.
FOR HILL CNTRL 20 MPH OR LESS (if equipped) — Displayed
when the vehicle speed requirement for hill control mode entry has not
been met.
DRIVER RESUME CONTROL (if equipped)— Displayed when the
hill control and off road mode require the driver to resume control.
FOR HILL CNTRL SELECT GEAR (if equipped)— Displayed when
the driver is requested to select a transmission gear to enable operation
of the hill mode and off road mode.
COAST DOWN MODE (if equipped)— Displayed when vehicle enters
coast down mode.
39
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
AUDIO SYSTEMS
Note: If your volume is muted and MYKEY VOLUME LIMITED is
displayed, refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter for more
information.
AM/FM stereo system (if equipped)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Accessory delay: Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay which
allows you to operate the radio and other electrical accessories for up to
ten minutes after the ignition has been turned off or until either front
door is opened.
40
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
1.
/
: Press
/
to
manually go up or down the radio
frequency. Press and hold for a fast
advance through radio frequencies.
Also use in AUDIO mode to gain access to various settings.
2. AUDIO: Press AUDIO repeatedly
to gain access to the following
settings:
BAL (Balance): Press AUDIO to reach the balance setting.
/
/
SEEK
to adjust the audio between the left (L) and
Use
right (R) speakers.
/
/
FAD (Fade): Press AUDIO to reach the fade feature. Use
SEEK
to adjust the audio between the front (F) and back (B)
speakers.
/
TREB (Treble): Press to adjust the treble setting. Use
SEEK
to adjust.
BASS (Bass): Press to adjust the bass setting. Use
SEEK
to adjust.
/
/
/
SEEK
to
3. SEEK: Press
access the previous/next strong
station.
4. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band
AM/FM1/FM2; tune to a station,
press and hold a preset button until sound returns. You can save up to
18 stations, six in AM, six in FM1 and FM2.
5. AM/FM: Press AM/FM to select
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
41
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
6. ON/OFF/Volume: Press
VOL-PUSH to turn ON/OFF. Turn
VOL-PUSH to increase/decrease
volume.
7. CLK (Clock): Press CLK to
toggle between displaying the radio
frequency and the clock setting.
Setting the clock: Press and hold
/
/
SEEK
to
CLK until the hours begin to flash. Press
manually increase/decrease the hours.
/
/
SEEK
to
Press CLK again to set the minutes using
manually increase/decrease the minutes. Allow 10 seconds to pass to
confirm that the time has been set.
AM/FM in-dash CD/MP3 satellite compatible sound system
1
3
2
5
4
6
8
7
9
0
LOAD
• DIRECT
TEXT
SCAN
CAT/FOLD
VOL
42
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CLOCK #
MENU
SEEK
SOUND
AM/FM
CD
SIRIUS
AUX
TUNE
OK
Entertainment Systems
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Accessory delay: Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay. With
this feature, the radio and other electrical accessories may be used for
up to ten minutes after the ignition is turned off or until either front
door is opened.
Note: Your vehicle is equipped with
a unique audio system. If your
display shows six small circles in the
display, your audio system is a CD6
system (six disc changer). If not,
your system is a single CD system.
Setting the clock
To set the time, press CLOCK. The display will read SET TIME. Use the
memory preset numbers (0–9) to enter in the desired time–hours and
minutes. The clock will then begin from that time.
AM/FM Radio
/ VOL (Power/Volume): Press
to turn the radio on/off. Turn the
knob to increase/decrease volume.
If the volume is set above a certain
level and the ignition is turned off,
the volume will come back on at a
nominal listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on.
AM/FM: Press repeatedly to select AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
TUNE: Turn the knob to go
up/down the frequency band in
individual increments.
DIRECT: Press DIRECT and then manually enter the desired radio
station (i.e. 93.9) using the memory preset numbers (0–9).
43
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
SEEK: Press
SEEK
to access the previous/next strong radio
station.
SCAN: Press for a brief sampling of all strong radio stations.
0–9 (MEMORY PRESETS): When
tuned to any station, press and hold
a preset button until sound returns
and PRESET # SAVED appears in the display. You can save up to 30
stations, 10 in AM, 10 in FM1 and FM2.
Saving presets automatically: Autoset allows you to set the strongest
local radio stations without losing your original manually set preset
stations for AM/FM1/FM2.
To activate the autoset feature: Press MENU repeatedly until AUTO
PRESET ON/OFF appears in the display. Use
SEEK
to toggle
AUTO PRESET to ON, and either wait five seconds for the search to
initiate or press OK to immediately initiate the search. If you press
another control within those five seconds, the search will not initiate.
The 10 strongest stations will be filled and the station stored in preset 1
will begin playing.
If there are fewer than 10 strong stations, the system will store the last
one in the remaining presets.
RDBS Radio
Available only in FM mode. This feature allows you to search
RDBS-equipped stations for a certain category of music format:
CLASSIC, COUNTRY, JAZZ/RB, ROCK, etc.
To activate: Press MENU repeatedly until RDBS (ON/OFF) appears in
the display. Use
SEEK
to toggle RDBS ON/OFF. When RDBS is
off, you will not be able to search for RDBS equipped stations or view
the station name or type.
CAT/FOLD (Category/Folder): This feature allows you to select from
various music categories.
To change RDBS categories: Press MENU repeatedly until RDBS
ON/OFF appears in the display. Use
SEEK
to toggle RDBS
between ON/OFF. Press CAT. PRESS UP OR DOWN TO CHANGE RDBS
CATEGORY will appear in the display.
to scroll through all possible categories. When the desired
Press
SEEK
to find the next
category appears in the display, press
station playing that selection or press SCAN for a brief sampling of all
stations playing that category of music.
44
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
CD/MP3 Player
CD: Press to enter CD/MP3 mode. If a disc is already loaded into the
system, CD/MP3 play will begin where it ended last. If no CD is loaded,
NO DISC will appear in the display.
LOAD:
For a single CD system– This control is not operational. To load a CD,
simply insert the disc, label side up, into the CD slot.
For a CD6 system– Press LOAD. When the display reads SELECT
SLOT, choose the desired slot number using memory presets 1–6. When
the display reads LOAD CD #, load the desired disc, label side up. If you
do not choose a slot within five seconds, the system will choose for you.
Once loaded, the first track will begin to play.
To auto load up to six discs– Press and hold LOAD until the display
reads AUTOLOAD #. Load the desired disc, label side up. The system
will prompt you to load discs for the remaining available slots. Insert the
discs, one at a time, label side up, when prompted. Once loaded, the disc
in preset #1 will begin to play.
Press the number preset buttons (1–6) to choose the disc you want to
play.
/
Play/Pause: Press to
play/pause a track when playing a
CD.
(Eject):
For a single CD system– press
to eject the CD.
and select the desired CD slot by pressing
For a CD6 system– press
the corresponding memory preset number. The display will read
EJECTING #. When the system has ejected the CD, the display will read
REMOVE CD #. Remove the CD. If you do not remove the CD, the
system will reload the disc.
. The system will eject
To auto eject all loaded discs– Press and hold
all discs and prompt you when to remove them.
SEEK: Press
SEEK
to access the previous/next track.
CAT (Category) / FOLD (Folder):
In MP3 mode only– Press CAT/FOLD and then press
access the previous/next folder.
SEEK
to
45
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
SCAN: Press for a brief sampling of all tracks on the current disc or
MP3 folder.
DIRECT:
In CD mode– Press DIRECT. The display will read DIRECT TRACK
MODE SELECT TRACK. Enter the desired track number using the
memory preset buttons (0–9). The system will then begin playing that
track.
In MP3 folder mode– Press DIRECT and the memory preset buttons
(0–9) of the desired folder. The system will advance to that specific
track in the folder selected.
TEXT:
In MP3 mode only– Press TEXT repeatedly to view Album (AL), Folder
(FL), Song (SO) and Artist (AR) in the display, if available.
In TEXT MODE: Sometimes the display requires additional text to be
displayed. When the
indicator is active, press TEXT and then
SEEK
to view the additional display text.
press
COMPRESSION: Press MENU repeatedly until COMPRESSION ON/OFF
SEEK
to toggle between ON/OFF.
appears in the display. Use
When COMPRESSION is ON, the system will bring the soft and loud CD
passages together for a more consistent listening level.
SHUFFLE: Press MENU repeatedly until SHUFFLE ON/OFF appears in
SEEK
to toggle between ON/OFF. If you wish to
the display. Use
SEEK
to begin random
engage shuffle mode right away, press
play. Otherwise, random play will begin when the current track is
finished playing. The system will only shuffle the disc currently playing.
Satellite Radio (if equipped)
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
SIRIUS: Press repeatedly to access satellite radio mode, if equipped.
Press repeatedly to cycle through SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3 modes.
TUNE: Turn to go to the next / previous available SIRIUS satellite
station.
DIRECT: Press DIRECT then enter the desired channel (i.e. 002) using
the memory preset buttons (0–9). If you only enter one digit, press OK
and the system will go to that satellite channel. If you enter three digits,
the system will automatically go to that channel, if available. You may
46
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
cancel your entry by pressing DIRECT. If an invalid station number is
entered, INVALID CHANNEL will appear in the display and the system
will continue playing the current station.
SEEK: Press
SEEK
to seek to the previous/next channel. If a
specific category is selected, (Jazz, Rock, News, etc.),
press
SEEK
to seek to the previous/next channel in the selected
category. Press and hold
SEEK
to fast seek through the
previous/next channels.
SCAN: Press SCAN for a brief sampling of all available SIRIUS satellite
channels. If a specific category is selected, (Jazz, Rock, News, etc.) press
SCAN for a brief sampling of all available SIRIUS satellite channels within
the selected category.
MEMORY PRESETS (0–9): There
are 30 available presets, 10 each for
SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3. To save
satellite channels in your memory presets, tune to the desired channel
then press and hold a memory preset number (0–9) until sound returns.
TEXT: Press and release to display the artist and song title. While in
TEXT MODE, press again to scroll through the Artist (AR), Song (SO),
Channel (CH) and Category (CA).
In TEXT MODE: Sometimes the display requires additional text to be
displayed. When the
indicator is active, press TEXT and then
SEEK
to view the additional display text.
press
CAT (Category) / FOLD (Folder): Press to toggle between turning
the most recently selected satellite radio category on or off. The category
icon (CAT) will illuminate in the display when a specific category is
selected (the icon will not illuminate during CATEGORY ALL). If no
category has ever been selected, NO CATEGORY SELECTED will display.
Note: Separate categories can be set for SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3.
Refer to Satellite radio menu for further information on selecting a
satellite radio category.
SATELLITE RADIO MENU: Press MENU when satellite radio mode is
active to access. Press OK to enter into the satellite radio menu.
to cycle through the following options:
Press
to scroll
• CATEGORY- Press OK to enter category mode. Press
through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories (Pop, Rock,
News, etc.) Press OK when the desired category appears in the
47
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
display. After a category is selected, press
SEEK
to search for
that specific category of channels only (i.e. ROCK). You may also
select CATEGORY ALL to seek all available SIRIUS categories and
channels. Press OK to close and return to the main menu.
• SONG SEEK MENU- Press OK to enter song seek menu.
to scroll through the following options:
Press
a. SAVE THIS SONG: Press OK to save the currently playing song’s
title in the system’s memory. (If you try to save something other than
a song, CANT SAVE will appear in the display.) When the chosen song
is playing on any satellite radio channel, the system will alert you with
an audible prompt. Press OK while SONG ALERT is in the display and
the system will take you to the channel playing the desired song. You
can save up to 20 song titles. If you attempt to save more than 20
titles, the display will read REPLACE SONG? Press OK to access the
to cycle through the saved titles. When
saved titles and press
the song title appears in the display that you would like to replace,
press OK. SONG REPLACED will appear in the display.
b. DELETE A SONG: Press OK to delete a song from the system’s
to cycle through the saved songs. When the
memory. Press
song appears in the display that you would like to delete, press OK.
The song will appear in the display for confirmation. Press OK again
and the display will read SONG DELETED. If you do not want to
to select either
delete the currently listed song, press
RETURN or CANCEL.
c. DELETE ALL SONGS: Press OK to delete all song’s from the
system’s memory. The display will read ARE YOU SURE ? Press OK to
confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will read ALL
DELETED.
d. DISABLE ALERTS/ENABLE ALERTS: Press OK to
enable/disable the satellite alert status which alerts you when your
selected songs are playing on a satellite radio channel. (The system
default is disabled.) SONG ALERTS ENABLED/DISABLED will appear
in the display. The menu listing will display the opposite state. For
example, if you have chosen to enable the song alerts, the menu
listing will read DISABLE as the alerts are currently on, so your other
option is to turn them off.
48
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
• CHANNEL LOCKOUT MENU- Press OK to enter the Channel
to scroll through the following
Lockout menu. Press the
options:
a. LOCK/UNLOCK THIS CHANNEL: Press OK when
LOCK/UNLOCK THIS CHANNEL is displayed and the display will read
ENTER PIN. Enter your four-digit PIN number (initial PIN is 1234)
and the system will lock/unlock the channel and CHANNEL LOCKED
or UNLOCKED will be displayed.
Note: you must be tuned to the specific channel you want to
lock/unlock when using this feature.
b. CHANGE PIN: Press OK when CHANGE PIN is displayed. The
display will read ENTER OLD PIN. Enter your current (old) PIN
number and when the system accepts your entry it will display
ENTER NEW PIN. Enter your new four-digit PIN and the system will
save the new PIN and PIN SAVED will display.
c. UNLOCK ALL CHANNELS: Press OK when UNLOCK ALL
CHANNELS is displayed and the display will read ENTER PIN. Enter
your four-digit PIN and the system will unlock all channels and the
display will read CHANNEL UNLOCKED.
d. RESET PIN: Press OK when RESET PIN is displayed. The display
will read ARE YOUR SURE. Press OK again to automatically reset the
PIN number to its initial password setting (1234). PIN RESET TO
DEFAULT PIN will be displayed.
e. RETURN: Press OK when RETURN is displayed and the system
will exit back to the satellite radio menu.
Sound Adjustments
Press SOUND repeatedly to cycle through the following features:
BASS: Press
TREBLE: Press
SEEK
to adjust the level of bass.
SEEK
to adjust the level of treble.
SEEK
BALANCE: Press
(L) and right (R) speakers.
to adjust the audio between the left
SEEK
to adjust the audio between the back (B)
FADE: Press
and front (F) speakers.
SPEED COMPENSATED VOLUME: With this feature on, radio volume
automatically gets louder with increasing vehicle speed to compensate
for road and wind noise.
The default setting is off.
49
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Use
SEEK
to adjust between SPEED OFF and levels 1–7:
Increasing the level from 1 (lowest setting) to 7 (highest setting) allows
the radio volume to automatically change slightly with vehicle speed to
compensate for road and wind noise.
Recommended level is 1–3; SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7
is the maximum setting.
Extra Features
AUX: Press repeatedly to cycle through LINE IN (auxiliary audio mode),
and SYNC威 (if equipped).
For location and further information on auxiliary audio mode, refer to
Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter.
If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC威, please refer to supplemental
information on SYNC威.
OK: Your vehicle may be equipped
with special phone and media
features which will require you to
confirm commands by pressing OK.
For further information, refer to
supplemental information on
SYNC威.
(Phone): If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC威, press to access
SYNC PHONE features. For further information, please refer to
supplemental information on SYNC威.
If your vehicle is not equipped with SYNC威, the display may read NO
PHONE.
Audio system–Navigation system based (if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the navigation system, it will have an
integrated navigation/audio system. See the Navigation system
supplement for operating instructions on using this audio system.
Auxiliary input jack (Line in — if equipped)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
50
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
The Auxiliary Input Jack provides a
way to connect your portable music
player to the in-vehicle audio
system. This allows the audio from a
portable music player to be played
through the vehicle speakers with
high fidelity. To achieve optimal performance, please observe the
following instructions when attaching your portable music device to the
audio system.
If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, refer to Auxiliary
input jack section in the Audio features chapter of your Navigation
system supplement.
Required equipment:
1. Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones
2. An audio extension cable with stereo male 1/8 in. (3.5 mm)
connectors at each end
To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack:
1. Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off.
2. Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully
charged and that the device is turned off.
3. Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output
of your player and the other end of the audio extension cable to the AIJ
in your vehicle.
4. Turn the radio on, using either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded into
the system. Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level.
5. Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1/2 the
volume.
6. Press AUX on the vehicle radio repeatedly until LINE, LINE IN or
SYNC LINE IN appears in the display.
You should hear audio from your portable music player although it may
be low.
7. Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the
level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the
AUX and FM or CD controls.
Troubleshooting:
1. Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output. Line level
outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not
compatible with the AIJ. The AIJ will only work correctly with devices
that have a headphone output with a volume control.
51
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
2. Do not set the portable music player’s volume level higher than is
necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio in your audio
system as this will cause distortion and will reduce sound quality. Many
portable music players have different output levels, so not all players
should be set at the same levels. Some players will sound best at full
volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume.
3. If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels, turn the
portable music player volume down. If the problems persists, replace or
recharge the batteries in the portable music player.
4. The portable music player must be controlled in the same manner
when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control
(play, pause, etc.) over the attached portable music player.
5. For safety reasons, connecting or adjusting the settings on your
portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is
moving. Also, the portable music player should be stored in a secure
location, such as the center console or the glove box, when the vehicle is
in motion. The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the
portable music player to be safely stored while the vehicle is in motion.
USB port (if equipped)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
USB port located on the instrument
panel. This feature allows you to
plug in media playing devices,
memory sticks, and also to charge
devices if they support this feature.
For further information on this feature, refer to Accessing and using
your USB port in the SYNC威 supplement or Navigation System
supplement.
52
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION
Radio frequencies:
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM: 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM: 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio reception factors:
There are three factors that can affect radio reception:
• Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency
is displayed.
CD/CD player care
Do:
• Handle discs by their edges only.
(Never touch the playing
surface).
• Inspect discs before playing.
• Clean only with an approved CD
cleaner.
• Wipe discs from the center out.
Don’t:
• Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods
of time.
• Clean using a circular motion.
53
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in
(12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical
incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact
discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players.
Do not use any irregular shaped
CDs or discs with a scratch
protection film attached.
CDs with homemade paper
(adhesive) labels should not be
inserted into the CD player as
the label may peel and cause the
CD to become jammed. It is
recommended that homemade
CDs be identified with
permanent felt tip marker rather
than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please
contact your authorized dealer for further information.
Audio system warranty and service
Refer to the Warranty Guide/Customer Information Guide for audio
system warranty information. If service is necessary, see your dealer or
qualified technician.
MP3 track and folder structure
Your MP3 system recognizes MP3 individual tracks and folder structure
as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback: MP3 track mode
(system default) and MP3 folder mode. For more information on track
and folder mode, refer to Sample MP3 structure in the following
section.
• MP3 track mode allows the CD to play all tracks in all folders.
• MP3 folder mode limits the playable tracks to the current folder.
• Creating discs with only one level of folders will help with navigation
through the disc files.
54
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Sample MP3 structure
If you are burning your own MP3
discs, it is important to understand
how the system will read the
structures you create. While various
files may be present, (files with
extensions other than mp3), only
files with the .mp3 extension will be
played. Other files will be ignored
by the system. This enables you to
use the same MP3 disc for a variety
of tasks on your work computer,
home computer and your in vehicle
system.
1
.mp3 1
.mp3 2
2
3
.mp3 3
.mp3 4
.mp3 5
4
.mp3 6
.mp3 7
.doc
.ppt
.xls
In track mode, the system will display and play the structure as if it were
only one level deep (all .mp3 files will be played, regardless of being in a
specific folder). In folder mode, the system will only play the .mp3 files
in the current folder.
Satellite radio information (if equipped)
Satellite radio channels: SIRIUS broadcasts a variety of music, news,
sports, weather, traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels. For
more information and a complete list of SIRIUS威 satellite radio channels,
visit www.sirius.com in the United States, www.sirius-canada.ca in
Canada, or call SIRIUS威 at 1–888–539–7474.
Satellite radio reception factors: To receive the satellite signal, your
vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the best location for an
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio
system. Like AM/FM, there are several factors that can affect satellite
radio reception performance:
• Antenna obstructions: For optimal reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
55
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an
audio mute.
Unlike AM/FM audible static, you will hear an audio mute when there is
a satellite radio signal interference. Your radio display may display NO
SIGNAL to indicate the interference.
SIRIUS威 satellite radio service: SIRIUS威 Satellite Radio is a
subscription based satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports,
news and entertainment programming. A service fee is required in order
to receive SIRIUS威 service. Vehicles that are equipped with a factory
installed SIRIUS威 Satellite Radio system include:
• Hardware and limited subscription term, which begins on the date of
sale or lease of the vehicle.
• Use of online media player providing access to all SIRIUS威 music
channels over the internet using any computer connected to the
internet (U.S. customers only).
For information on extended subscription terms, contact SIRIUS威 at
1–888–539–7474.
Note: SIRIUS威 reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add
or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford
Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming
changes.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN): This 12–digit
Satellite Serial Number is needed to activate, modify or track your
satellite radio account. You will need this number when communicating
with SIRIUS威 . While in Satellite Radio mode, you can view this number
on the radio display by pressing AUX and Preset 1 control
simultaneously.
56
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Radio Display
ACQUIRING
SAT FAULT
INVALID CHNL
UNSUBSCRIBED
NO TEXT
NO TEXT
Condition
Action Required
Radio requires more No action required. This
than two seconds to message should disappear
produce audio for
shortly.
the selected
channel.
Internal module or
If this message does not
system failure
clear within a short period
present.
of time, or with an ignition
key cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See your
authorized dealer for
service.
Channel no longer
This previously available
available.
channel is no longer
available. Tune to another
channel. If the channel
was one of your presets,
you may choose another
channel for that preset
button.
Subscription not
Contact SIRIUS威 at
available for this
1–888–539–7474 to
channel.
subscribe to the channel
or tune to another
channel.
Artist information
Artist information not
not available.
available at this time on
this channel. The system is
working properly.
Song title
Song title information not
information not
available at this time on
available.
this channel. The system is
working properly.
57
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Radio Display
NO TEXT
Condition
Category
information not
available.
NO SIGNAL
Loss of signal from
the SIRIUS威 satellite
or SIRIUS威 tower to
the vehicle antenna.
UPDATING
Update of channel
programming in
progress.
Satellite service has
been deactivated by
SIRIUS威 Satellite
Radio.
CALL SIRIUS威
1–888–539–7474
Action Required
Category information not
available at this time on
this channel. The system is
working properly.
You are in a location that
is blocking the SIRIUS威
signal (i.e., tunnel, under
an overpass, dense foliage,
etc). The system is
working properly. When
you move into an open
area, the signal should
return.
No action required. The
process may take up to
three minutes.
Call SIRIUS威 at
1–888–539–7474 to
re-activate or resolve
subscription issues.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a navigation system. Refer to the
Navigation System supplement for further information.
SYNC姞 (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with SYNC威, a hands-free communications
and entertainment system with special phone and media features. For
more information, please refer to the SYNC威 supplement or to the
SYNC威 section in the Navigation System supplement (if equipped).
58
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
SINGLE ZONE CLIMATE CONTROL
Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster
1.
vents and de-mister vents. Can be used to clear the windshield of fog
and thin ice. The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce
window fogging. Press this button again to return to the previous air flow
selection.
2. A. R Rear defroster (if equipped): Press to activate/deactivate the
rear window defroster. Refer to Rear window defroster later in this
chapter for more information. If your vehicle is equipped with both rear
defroster and heated mirrors, the same button will activate both.
Heated mirrors (if equipped): Press to activate/deactivate.
2. B.
This feature will remove ice and snow from the side view mirrors.
Multifunction control: Press repeatedly to toggle through the
3.
settings to choose:
•
•
•
•
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, de-mister
vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents. The system will
automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, floor vents,
rear seat floor vents and de-mister vents.
: Distributes air through the floor vents and rear seat floor vents.
59
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
4. A/C: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. A/C
engages automatically in MAX A/C,
(defrost) and
(floor/defrost).
5.
Recirculated air: Press to activate/deactivate air recirculation in
the vehicle. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to
cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired
odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle. Recirculated air engages
automatically when MAX A/C is selected or can be engaged manually in
(defrost). When the ignition switch is
any airflow mode except
turned off and back on, the climate system will return to the recirculated
air mode only if the A/C button LED is illuminated and the air
(panel) or
(panel/floor).
distribution selection is either
6. MAX A/C: Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel
vents to cool the vehicle. This re-cooling of the interior air is more
economical and efficient. Recirculated air may also help reduce
undesirable odors from entering the vehicle. Press the MAX A/C button
again for normal A/C operation.
7. Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the airflow in the
vehicle.
Fan speed adjustment: Controls the volume of air circulated in
8.
the vehicle.
Power: Press to activate/deactivate the climate control system.
9.
When the system is off, outside air is prevented from entering the
vehicle.
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
(defrost) or
(floor/defrost)
the air flow selector in the
position. Temperature and/or fan speed can also be increased to
improve clearing.
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle: do not drive with the
system off or with recirculated air engaged.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
60
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2-3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been “aired out.”
• If you are driving during extreme high ambient temperatures and
idling for extended periods of time in gear, it is recommended to run
the A/C in the MAX A/C position, adjust the blower fan speed to the
lowest setting and put the vehicle’s transmission into the P (Park)
position to continue to receive cool air from your A/C system.
• For maximum cooling performance (Max A/C):
Max A/C mode:
• Move the temperature control to the coolest setting.
• Set the fan to the highest speed initially, then adjust to maintain
comfort.
Panel (
) and panel/floor (
) modes:
• Move the temperature control to the coolest setting.
• Select A/C and recirculated air (
to provide colder airflow.
). Use recirculated air with A/C
• Set the fan to the highest speed initially, then adjust to maintain
comfort.
• To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select
.
2. Select A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
61
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
DUAL ZONE AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL WITH
HEATED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
Temperature conversion: To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius,
refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
1.
+ Fan speed control: Press to increase the fan speed.
Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster
2.
vents and de-mister vents. Can be used to clear the windshield of fog
and thin ice. The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce
window fogging. Press this button again to return to the previous air flow
selection.
Manual override control: Allows you to manually select where
3.
airflow is directed. To return to full automatic control, press AUTO.
When choosing to control airflow manually, press repeatedly to toggle
through the settings to choose:
•
•
•
•
62
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, de-mister
vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents. The system will
automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, floor vents,
rear seat floor vents and de-mister vents.
: Distributes air through the floor vents and rear seat floor vents.
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
4. A/C: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. A/C
engages automatically in MAX A/C,
(defrost) and
(floor/defrost).
5. AUTO: Press to engage automatic temperature control. Select the
desired temperature using the temperature control. The system will
automatically determine fan speed, airflow location, A/C on or off, and
outside or recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle to reach the
desired temperature.
6. MAX A/C: Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel
vents to cool the vehicle. This re-cooling of the interior air is more
economical and efficient. Recirculated air may also help reduce
undesirable odors from entering the vehicle. Press the MAX A/C button
again for normal A/C operation.
7. PASS TEMP: Press to activate separate passenger temperature
control and turn the dial to increase/decrease the airflow temperature for
the passenger in the front of the vehicle.
8.
Recirculated air: Press to activate/deactivate air recirculation in
the vehicle. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to
cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired
odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle. Recirculated air engages
automatically when MAX A/C is selected or can be engaged manually in
any airflow mode except
(defrost). When the ignition switch is
turned off and back on, the climate system will return to the recirculated
air mode only if the A/C button LED is illuminated and the air
distribution selection is either
(panel) or
(panel/floor).
9.
Passenger heated seat control: Press to control the passenger
heated seat. Refer to Heated seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter for more information.
Driver heated seat control: Press to control the driver heated
10.
seat. Refer to Heated seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter for more information.
Power/Driver temperature: Press to activate/deactivate the
11.
climate control system. When the system is off, outside air is prevented
from entering the vehicle. Turn to increase/decrease the air temperature
on the driver side of the vehicle. The control also adjusts the passenger
side temperature when PASS TEMP is disengaged. The recommended
initial setting is between 72°F (22°C) and 75°F (24°C), then adjust for
comfort. The driver side temperature setting will appear in the upper left
corner of the display.
63
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
12.
– Front fan speed control: Press to decrease the fan speed.
Rear defroster (if equipped): Press to activate/deactivate
13. A.
the rear window defroster. Refer to Rear window defroster later in this
chapter for more information. If your vehicle is equipped with both rear
defroster and heated mirrors, the same button will activate both.
R
Heated mirrors (if equipped): Press to activate/deactivate.
13. B.
This feature will remove ice and snow from the side view mirrors.
DUAL ZONE AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL WITH
HEATED AND COOLED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
Temperature conversion: To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius,
refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
1.
+ Fan speed control: Press to increase the fan speed.
Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster
2.
vents and de-mister vents. Can be used to clear the windshield of fog
and thin ice. The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce
window fogging. Press this button again to return to the previous air flow
selection.
64
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
3.
Manual override control: Allows you to manually select where
airflow is directed. To return to full automatic control, press AUTO.
When choosing to control airflow manually, press repeatedly to toggle
through the settings to choose:
•
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, de-mister
vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents. The system will
automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging.
•
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
•
•
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, floor vents,
rear seat floor vents and de-mister vents.
: Distributes air through the floor vents and rear seat floor vents.
4. A/C: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. A/C
(defrost) and
engages automatically in MAX A/C,
(floor/defrost).
5. AUTO: Press to engage automatic temperature control. Select the
desired temperature using the temperature control. The system will
automatically determine fan speed, airflow location, A/C on or off, and
outside or recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle to reach the
desired temperature.
6. MAX A/C: Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel
vents to cool the vehicle. This re-cooling of the interior air is more
economical and efficient. Recirculated air may also help reduce
undesirable odors from entering the vehicle. Press the MAX A/C button
again for normal A/C operation.
Recirculated air: Press to activate/deactivate air recirculation in
7.
the vehicle. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to
cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired
odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle. Recirculated air engages
automatically when MAX A/C is selected or can be engaged manually in
(defrost). When the ignition switch is
any airflow mode except
turned off and back on, the climate system will return to the recirculated
air mode only if the A/C button LED is illuminated and the air
(panel) or
(panel/floor).
distribution selection is either
Passenger heated seat: Press to control the passenger heated
8.
seat. Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and Safety
Restraints chapter for more information.
65
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
9. PASS TEMP: Press to engage/disengage separate passenger side
temperature control. Turn to increase/decrease the air temperature on
the passenger side of the vehicle. The recommended initial setting is
between 72°F (22°C) and 75°F (24°C), then adjust for comfort. The
passenger side temperature setting will appear in the upper right corner
of the display.
Passenger cooled seat: Press to control the passenger cooled
10.
seat. Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and Safety
Restraints chapter for more information.
Driver heated seat: Press to control the driver heated seat.
11.
Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter for more information.
Driver cooled seat: Press to control the driver cooled seat.
12.
Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter for more information.
Power/Driver temperature: Press to activate/deactivate the
13.
climate control system. When the system is off, outside air is prevented
from entering the vehicle. Turn to increase/decrease the air temperature
on the driver side of the vehicle. The control also adjusts the passenger
side temperature when PASS TEMP is disengaged. The recommended
initial setting is between 72°F (22°C) and 75°F (24°C), then adjust for
comfort. The driver side temperature setting will appear in the upper left
corner of the display.
14.
– Fan speed control: Press to decrease the fan speed.
15. A. R Rear defroster (if equipped): Press to activate/deactivate
the rear window defroster. Refer to Rear window defroster later in this
chapter for more information. If your vehicle is equipped with both rear
defroster and heated mirrors, the same button will activate both.
Heated mirrors (if equipped): Press to activate/deactivate.
15. B.
This feature will remove ice and snow from the side view mirrors.
66
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
DUAL ZONE AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL WITH
HEATED AND COOLED SEATS
(NAVIGATION BASED–IF EQUIPPED)
Temperature conversion: To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius,
refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
1. CLIMATE: Press to control the climate control system through the
touch display screen. See Touchscreen functions later in this section.
2. A. R Rear defroster (if equipped): Press to activate/deactivate the
rear window defroster. Refer to Rear window defroster later in this
chapter for more information. If your vehicle is equipped with both rear
defroster and heated mirrors, the same button will activate both.
Heated mirrors (if equipped): Press to activate/deactivate.
B.
This feature will remove ice and snow from the side view mirrors.
3. A/C: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. A/C
(defrost) and
engages automatically in MAX A/C,
(floor/defrost).
67
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
4. Passenger temperature: Press to activate separate passenger
temperature control to increase/decrease the air temperature on the
passenger side of the vehicle.
5.
Passenger heated seat (if equipped): Press to control the
passenger heated seat. Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating
and Safety Restraints chapter for more information.
6.
Passenger cooled seat (if equipped): Press to control the
passenger cooled seat. Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating
and Safety Restraints chapter for more information.
7.
Recirculated air: Press to activate/deactivate air recirculation in
the vehicle. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to
cool down the interior of the vehicle when used with A/C and may also
help reduce undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle.
Recirculated air engages automatically when MAX A/C is selected or can
(defrost).
be engaged manually in any airflow mode except
Recirculation may turn off automatically in all airflow selections except
MAX A/C.
8. –
+ Fan speed control: Press to decrease/increase the fan speed.
9. AUTO: Press to engage full automatic operation. Select the desired
temperature using the temperature control. The system will
automatically determine fan speed, airflow location, A/C on or off, and
outside or recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle to reach the
desired temperature.
10. Driver temperature: Press to increase/decrease the air temperature
for the driver side of the vehicle. This control also adjusts the passenger
side temperature when dual zone operation is disengaged.
Driver cooled seat (if equipped): Press to control the driver
11.
cooled seat. Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and
Safety Restraints chapter for more information.
Driver heated seat (if equipped): Press to control the driver
12.
heated seat. Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and
Safety Restraints chapter for more information.
Power: Press to activate/deactivate the climate control system.
13.
When the system is off, outside air is prevented from entering the
vehicle. The climate status in the touchscreen will also be turned off.
Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield
14.
defroster vents and de-mister vents. Can be used to clear the windshield
68
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
of fog and thin ice. The system will automatically provide outside air to
reduce window fogging. Press this button again to return to the previous
air flow selection.
TOUCHSCREEN FUNCTIONS
Temperature conversion: To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius,
refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Temperature: Press the up and down arrows on the left side of the
screen to increase/decrease the airflow temperature for the driver side of
the vehicle. This control also adjusts the passenger side temperature
when dual zone operation is disengaged. Press the up and down arrows
on the right side of the screen to increase/decrease the airflow
temperature for the passenger side of the vehicle.
•
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
•
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, floor vents,
rear seat floor vents and de-mister vents.
•
: Distributes air through the floor vents, rear seat floor vents.
•
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, de-mister
vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents. The system will
automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging.
To return to full automatic control, press AUTO on the main bezel.
Fan Speed: Press to decrease/increase the fan speed.
Dual: Press to activate/deactivate separate driver and passenger
temperature controls.
Max A/C: Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel
vents to cool the vehicle. This re-cooling of the interior air is more
economical and efficient. Recirculated air may also help reduce
undesirable odors from entering the vehicle. Press MAX A/C again for
normal operation.
69
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
VOICE COMMANDS IN CLIMATE MODE
Please refer to the Voice commands in climate mode section of the
Navigation supplement for more information on using voice commands
with the climate control system.
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather,
(defrost). Temperature and/or fan speed can also be
select
increased to improve clearing.
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle: do not drive with the
(recirculated air) engaged.
system off or with
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2-3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been “aired out.”
• If you are driving during extreme high ambient temperatures and
idling for extended periods of time in gear, it is recommended to run
the A/C in the MAX A/C mode, adjust the blower fan speed to the
lowest setting and put the vehicle’s transmission in P (Park) to
continue to receive cool air from your A/C system.
For maximum cooling performance MAX A/C in AUTO:
1. Press AUTO control.
2. Set to desired temperature.
For maximum cooling performance MAX A/C in manual override
control
1. Choose
(panel), A/C, and MAX A/C controls.
2. Set the temperature to 60°F (16°C).
3. Set the fan to the highest blower setting.
70
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select
.
2. Select A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER (IF EQUIPPED)
R
The rear defroster control is located on the climate control panel and
works to defrost your rear window from fog and thin ice. If equipped, it
also operates the heated mirror to remove snow and thin ice from the
side mirrors.
Ensure that the ignition on. Press to turn the defroster on/off. The
indicator light will illuminate when activated. For vehicles with a sliding
rear window– the defroster will be disabled when the window is opened.
Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside
of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the
rear window. This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and
will not be covered by your warranty.
71
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Lights
HEADLAMP CONTROL
Rotate the headlamp control
to
clockwise to the first position
turn on the parking lamps.
Rotate clockwise to the second
to also turn on the
position
headlamps.
Autolamp control (if equipped)
The autolamp system provides light
sensitive automatic on-off control of
the exterior lights normally
controlled by the headlamp control.
The autolamp system also keeps the
lights on for approximately
20 seconds or, on vehicles equipped
with a message center, you can
select a delay from 0–180 seconds,
after the ignition switch is turned to
off.
• To turn autolamps on, rotate the control to
.
• To turn autolamps off, rotate the control to
.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a message center, then the auto
lamps can be programmed manually by:
1. Start with the ignition in off and the autolamps
selected.
2. Turn off the autolamps by turning the headlamp switch to
3. Turn the ignition to on.
4. Turn the ignition to off.
5. Select the autolamps by turning the headlamp switch to
.
.
Steps 2 through 5 must be performed within a 10 second period. At
this point, the headlamps and park lamps will turn on.
6. Deselect the autolamps after the desired autolamp delay time
(maximum of three minutes).
72
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Lights
At this point, the headlamps and park lamps will turn off.
Fog lamp control (if equipped)
The headlamp control also operates
the fog lamps. The fog lamps can be
turned on only when the headlamp
,
or
control is in the
position and the high beams are not
turned on.
Pull headlamp control towards you
to turn fog lamps on. The fog lamp
will illuminate.
indicator light
High beams
Push the lever toward the
instrument panel to activate. Pull
the lever toward you to deactivate.
OFF
Flash to pass
Pull toward you slightly to activate
and release to deactivate.
73
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Lights
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)
Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output.
In order for the DRLs to function:
• the ignition must be in the on position and
• the headlamp control is in the
, parking lamp or autolamp position.
WARNING: Always remember to turn on your headlamps at
dusk or during inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp
(DRL) system does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not
provide adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate
your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL
Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel when exterior
lights are on.
• Rotate the thumbwheel from left
to right to brighten the
instrument panel.
• Rotate the thumbwheel from right
to left to dim the instrument
panel.
• Rotate fully to the right (past detent) to turn on interior lamps.
• Rotate to the left position (past detent) to turn off the interior lamps
and to disable the illuminated entry feature. When the control is in the
far left position, it acts as a dome lamp defeat/override.
Note: If the battery is disconnected, discharged, or a new battery is
installed, the dimmer switch requires re-calibration. Rotate the dimmer
switch from the full dim position to the full dome/on position to reset.
This will ensure that your displays are visible under all lighting
conditions.
AIMING THE HEADLAMPS
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.
If your vehicle has been in an accident, the alignment of your headlamps
should be checked by your authorized dealer.
74
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Lights
Vertical aim adjustment
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
• (1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
• (2) Center height of lamp to
ground
• (3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
• (4) Horizontal reference line
2. Measure the height from the
center of your headlamp (indicated
by a 3.0 mm circle on the lens) to
the ground and mark an 8 foot
(2.4 meter) horizontal reference line
on the vertical wall or screen at this height (a piece of masking tape
works well).
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and
open the hood. Cover one of the headlamps so no light hits the wall.
4. On the wall or screen you will
observe a light pattern with a
distinct horizontal edge towards the
right. If this edge is not at the
horizontal reference line, the beam will need to be adjusted so the edge
is at the same height as the horizontal reference line.
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on
each headlamp, then use a P2
Philips screwdriver to turn the
adjuster either counterclockwise (to
adjust down) or clockwise (to adjust
up) aligning the upper edge of the
light pattern up to the horizontal
line.
6. HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT
REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE
AND IS NON-ADJUSTABLE.
7. Repeat Steps 3–5 for the other headlamp.
8. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
75
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Lights
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
• Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
• Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
Push and hold up or down to the first detent to signal a lane change.
INTERIOR LAMPS
Front row map lamps (if equipped)
To turn on the map lamps, press the
outer edge of the clear lens. The
front row map lamp lights when:
• any door is opened.
• the instrument panel dimmer
switch is rotated until the
courtesy lamps come on.
• the remote entry controls are
pressed and the ignition is off.
Rear dome lamp (if equipped)
• ON or D : The dome light will
stay on.
• DOOR or middle position: The
dome light will only come on if a
door is opened.
: The lamp will not
• OFF or
come on at all.
The rear dome lamp can be turned on or off by sliding the control.
76
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Lights
Rear dome/courtesy lamps (if equipped)
The dome lamp lights when:
• any door is opened.
• the instrument panel dimmer
switch is rotated up until the
courtesy lamps come on.
• any of the remote entry controls
are pressed and the ignition is
off.
The reading portion, the two outer lights, can only be turned on and off
at the lamp.
Rear courtesy/reading/cargo lamps (if equipped)
The rear lamps can be turned on
when the panel dimmer control is
rotated until the lamps come on or
when any door is opened.
The lamps can be turned on or off by sliding the control.
• When the control is in the middle position, the lamp will come on
when a door is opened or the unlock button is pressed on the remote
keyless entry.
• If the control is moved to the left position, the lamp will stay on.
• If the control is moved to the right position, the lamp will not come on
at all.
77
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Lights
Ambient lighting (if equipped)
Illuminates footwells and cupholders
with a choice of several colors. The
ambient lighting control is located
on the floor console. To activate,
press and release the left side of the
control to cycle through the color
choices plus the off state. Press the
right side of the control to adjust color intensity.
The lights come on whenever the ignition is in either the on or accessory
position.
Note: The ambient lights will stay on until the ignition is placed in the
off position and either of the front doors are opened or the accessory
delay timer expires.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Lamp assembly condensation
Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air
enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur when the temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the
lens. The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during
normal operation. Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry
weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip marks or droplets)
• Fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens
Examples of unacceptable moisture (usually caused by a lamp water
leak) are:
• Water puddle inside the lamp
• Large water droplets, drip marks or streaks present on the interior of
the lens
Take your vehicle to dealer for service if any of the above conditions of
unacceptable moisture are present.
78
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Lights
Using the right bulbs
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an
“E” for Europe to ensure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly
or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn
time.
Function
Headlamps
Front park/turn lamps
Number of
bulbs
2
2
Trade number
H13/9008
3157NA (natural
amber)
168
9140
921
3156
921
4057K
Front sidemarker
2
Fog lamps
2
Backup lamp (styleside)
2
Backup lamp (flareside)
2
Backup lamp (Harley)
2
Rear stop/turn/sidemarker/tail
4
lamp (styleside)
Rear stop/turn/sidemarker/tail
2
3057K
lamp (flareside)
High-mount brakelamp
1
912
Cargo lamp
2
912
License plate lamp
2
194
Exterior mounted mirror turn
2
See your dealer
signal indicator (if equipped)
Puddle lamp (if equipped)
2
See your dealer
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer
Replacing exterior bulbs
Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.
Replacing headlamp bulbs
1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the off position and open
the hood.
79
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Lights
2. Remove the pushpin that holds
the air deflector/protective cover
from the upper inboard corner of
the lamp.
3. Loosen the three retaining bolts
(two at top of lamp, one at lower
inboard corner).
4. Once the three retaining bolts have been removed, slide the headlamp
assembly forward, disconnecting the two snap attachments at the fender.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb by pulling rearward.
6. Remove the bulb and socket by
turning it counterclockwise, then
pull it straight out.
WARNING: Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep
out of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base
and do not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the
bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated.
80
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Lights
Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal/sidemarker bulbs
1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the off position and open
the hood.
2. Remove the pushpin that holds
the air deflector/protective cover
from the upper inboard corner of
the lamp.
3. Loosen the three retaining bolts
(two at top of lamp, one at lower
inboard corner).
4. Once the three retaining bolts
have been removed, slide the
headlamp assembly forward,
disconnecting the two snap attachments at the fender.
5. Remove the bulb and socket by
turning it counterclockwise, then
pull it straight out.
6. Pull the bulb straight out of the
socket.
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.
Replacing tail/brake/turn signal/backup lamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp control
is in the off position.
2. Open the tailgate to expose the
lamp assembly and remove the two
bolts from the tail lamp assembly.
81
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Lights
3. Carefully pull the lamp assembly
straight rearward from the tailgate
pillar to disengage two hidden
snap-in retainers. (Flare side tail
lamps are not equipped with snap-in
retainers.)
4. Remove bulb socket from the
lamp assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
5. Pull bulb straight out of socket
and press in the new bulb.
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.
Replacing high-mount brake and cargo lamp bulbs
Make sure the headlamp control is
in the off position.
1. Remove the two screws and move
the lamp assembly away from the
vehicle to expose the bulb sockets.
2. Remove the bulb socket by rotating counterclockwise and pulling it
out of the lamp assembly.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket and push in the new bulb.
Install the new bulbs in reverse order.
Replacing fog lamp bulbs (if equipped)
1. Make sure the headlamp control
is in the off position.
2. Remove the bulb socket from the
fog lamp by turning
counterclockwise.
3. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the fog lamp bulb.
Install the new bulb in reverse order.
82
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Lights
Replacing exterior mounted mirror turn signal indicator lamp bulbs
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs
The license plate bulbs are located
behind the rear bumper. To change
the license plate lamp bulbs:
1. Reach behind the rear bumper to
locate the bulb.
2. Twist the bulb socket
counterclockwise and carefully pull
to remove it from the lamp
assembly.
3. Pull out the old bulb from the
socket and push in the new bulb.
4. Install the bulb socket in lamp assembly by turning it clockwise.
83
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER
Windshield wiper: Rotate the end
of the control away from you to
increase the speed of the wipers;
rotate towards you to decrease the
speed of the wipers.
Rain sensing wipers (if equipped): The rain sensing wipers will
automatically activate when moisture is present on the windshield and
the multi-function switch is set to one of five auto/interval moisture
sensitivity settings. Rotate the end of the control toward the windshield
to increase the sensitivity. The speed of the rain sensitive wipers will
vary based on the amount of moisture detected on the windshield and
the auto/interval setting. There are no interval (intermittent wipe)
settings on vehicles with rain sensing wipers. The wipers will continue to
wipe as long as the presence of moisture is detected on the windshield.
More or less wiping may occur depending on humidity, mist or light rain,
or road spray.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean, especially the area around the
rear view mirror where the sensor is located or rain sensor performance
may be affected.
Note: During winter driving conditions with ice, snow or a salty road
mist, inconsistent or unexpected wiping or smearing may occur. In these
conditions, you can lower the sensitivity to reduce the amount of
smearing or override the feature by selecting low- or high-speed wiping
or turning the wiper system off.
Note: The rain sensing wiper feature must be turned off before entering
a car wash.
84
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Windshield washer: Press the end
of the stalk:
• briefly: causes a single swipe of
the wipers without washer fluid.
• a quick press and hold: the
wipers will swipe three times with
washer fluid.
• a long press and hold: the wipers
and washer fluid will be activated
for up to ten seconds.
Courtesy wipe feature: One extra wipe will occur a few seconds after
washing the front window to clear any excess washer fluid remaining on
the windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.
This may cause the washer pump to overheat. Check the washer fluid
level frequently. Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.
This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield,
always use the windshield washer. In freezing weather, be sure the wiper
blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers.
TILT STEERING WHEEL (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Pull and hold the steering wheel
release control toward you.
2. Move the steering up or down
until you find the desired location.
3. Release the steering wheel
release control. This will lock the
steering wheel in position.
WARNING: Never adjust the steering column when the vehicle
is moving.
85
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
POWER TILT STEERING (IF EQUIPPED)
The steering column can be
adjusted manually by moving the
two-way rocker adjustment control
located below the turn signal/wiper
control stalk. Hold the control to
adjust.
The tilt function is adjusted by
depressing the control up or down.
Easy entry/exit feature
When you remove the key from the ignition, the column will move to the
full up position if this feature is activated through the message center.
Refer to the Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter. When
the key is inserted into the ignition, the column will return to the
previous setting.
Note: The easy entry/exit feature will prevent the steering wheel from
returning to the memory position until the key is inserted into the
ignition.
Memory feature
The steering column positions are saved when doing a memory set
function and can be recalled along with the vehicle personality features
when a memory position is selected through the remote entry
transmitter, keyless entry keypad or memory switch on the side of the
driver’s seat (if equipped with memory feature). Refer to Seating in the
Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.
If the steering column adjustment control is pressed during memory
recall it will cancel the automatic operation and the column will respond
to manual adjustment of the control.
WARNING: Never adjust the steering column when the vehicle
is moving.
86
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
On vehicles with memory feature, to prevent damage to the steering
column, the steering column is designed to set a stopping position just
short of the end of the column position. If the steering column
encounters an object while moving up or down, a new stopping position
will be set. To reset the steering column to its normal stopping position:
• After encountering the new stopping position, press the steering
column control again to override.
• Continue pressing the control until it reaches the end of the column
position.
• A new soft stop will be automatically set. The next time the steering
column is tilted it will stop just short of the end of the column
position.
ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED)
Lift the mirror cover to turn on the
visor mirror lamp.
Slide on rod feature
The visor will slide back and forth
on the rod for increased sunlight
coverage. Rotate the visor towards
the side window and extend it
rearward for additional sunlight
coverage.
Note: To stow the visor back into
the headliner, visor must be
retracted before moving it back
towards the windshield.
87
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
CENTER CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)
The center console offers several useful storage features. These include:
1. Cupholders
2. Tissue holder in lid
3. Power point
4. Large utility compartment has
coin holder slots and a cardholder
located inside on the passenger side
and a pen holder on the lid.
WARNING: Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects
can injure you in a collision.
ELECTRONIC COMPASS (IF EQUIPPED)
The compass heading is displayed in the Center Integrated Display
(CID).
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic
or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also affect
compass accuracy.
Usually, when something affects the compass readings, the compass will
correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal
conditions. If the compass still appears to be inaccurate, a manual
calibration may be necessary. Refer to Compass calibration
adjustment.
Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that
varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. This variation is four
degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the
vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting will eliminate this
error. Refer to Compass zone adjustment.
88
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Compass zone adjustment
1. Determine which magnetic zone
you are in for your geographic
location by referring to the zone
map.
2. Turn ignition to the on position.
3 2
1
15
4
14
13
5
12
6
7 8 9 1011
3. Press and hold the 7 and 9 radio
preset buttons together for
approximately five seconds until
ZONE XX appears in the CID.
4. Press and release the 7 and 9
radio preset buttons together,
repeatedly until ZONE XX changes
to the correct zone (1–15) in the
CID.
5. The direction will display after
the buttons are released. The zone
is now updated.
Compass calibration adjustment
Perform compass calibration in an open area free from steel structures
and high voltage lines. For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical
accessories (heater/air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all
vehicle doors are shut.
1. Start the vehicle.
89
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
2. To calibrate, press and hold the 7
and 9 radio preset buttons together
for approximately 10 seconds until
CAL appears. Release the buttons.
3. Slowly drive the vehicle in a
circle (less than 3 mph [5 km/h])
until the CAL display changes to the
direction value (N, S, E, W, etc.). It
may take up to five circles to
complete calibration.
4. The compass is now calibrated.
AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12VDC)
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert
any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty.
Auxiliary power points can be found in the following locations:
• On the instrument panel
• Inside the center console storage area (if equipped)
• On the rear of the center console (if equipped) accessible from the
rear seat
Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.
Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element (if
equipped).
To prevent the fuse from being blown, do not use the power point(s)
over the vehicle capacity of 12 VDC/180W. If the power point or cigar
lighter socket is not working, a fuse may have blown. Refer to Fuses and
relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for information on
checking and replacing fuses.
To have full capacity usage of your power point, the engine is required to
be running to avoid unintentional discharge of the battery. To prevent
the battery from being discharged:
• do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is
not running,
90
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
• do not leave battery chargers, video game adapters, computers and
other devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is parked for
extended periods.
Cupholder/Ashtray (if equipped)
The cupholder/ashtray is located on
the instrument panel.
To open cupholder/ashtray, push in
on the door and release. The door
will spring out 1/4+ inches. Then
pull cupholder/ashtray assembly out
the remaining distance to utilize. To
close, push assembly in completely
and release.
Ashtray (if equipped)
The ashtray is located on the
instrument panel.
To open ashtray, push in on the
door and release. The ashtray
assembly will tip out. To close, push
assembly in completely and release.
Up-level ashtray shown; base
similar.
POWER WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and
do not let children play with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
WARNING: When closing the power windows, you should verify
they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or
pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.
91
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Press and pull the window switches
to open and close windows.
• Press down (to the first detent)
and hold the switch to open.
• Pull up (to the first detent) and
hold the switch to close.
Rear Window Buffeting: When one or both of the rear windows are
open, the vehicle may demonstrate a wind throb or buffeting noise. This
noise can be alleviated by lowering a front window approximately two to
three inches.
One-touch down
Allows the driver’s window to open
fully without holding the control
down. Press the switch completely
down to the second detent and
release quickly. The window will
open fully. Momentarily press the
switch to any position to stop the
window operation.
Window lock
The window lock feature allows only
the driver to operate the power
windows.
To lock out all the window controls
(except for the driver’s) press the
right side of the control. Press the
left side to restore the window
controls.
Note: The rear window switches will not illuminate when the window
control is in the locked position.
92
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Power sliding back window (if equipped)
the control
Press and hold the
to open the window all the way to
the full open position.
Pull and hold the
close the window.
control to
WARNING: When operating the power sliding back window you
must ensure all rear seat occupants and/or cargo are not in the
proximity of the back window.
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and
do not let children play with the power sliding back window.
They may seriously injure themselves.
Accessory delay (if equipped)
With accessory delay, the window switches may be used for up to
10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the off position or until
any door is opened.
INTERIOR MIRROR
The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support arm
which lets you adjust the mirror up or down and from side to side.
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in
motion.
Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with an interior rear view mirror that has
an auto-dimming function (optional on the driver’s side exterior mirror).
The electronic day/night mirror will change from the normal (high
reflective) state to the non-glare (darkened) state when bright lights
(glare) reach the interior mirror. When the interior mirror detects bright
light from behind the vehicle, the interior rear view mirror and the
driver’s side exterior mirror (if equipped) will automatically adjust
(darken) to minimize glare.
93
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
The mirrors will automatically return to the normal state whenever the
vehicle is placed in R (Reverse) to ensure a bright clear view when
backing up.
Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the interior
rear view mirror since this may impair proper mirror
performance.
Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
Note: If equipped with a rearview camera system, a video image will
display in the mirror or the Navigation system display (if equipped)
when the vehicle is put in R (Reverse). As you shift into any other gear
from R (Reverse), the image will remain for a few seconds and then turn
off. Refer to Rearview camera system in the Driving chapter.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power side view mirrors (if equipped)
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in
motion.
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Rotate the control clockwise to
adjust the right mirror and rotate
the control counterclockwise to
adjust the left mirror.
2. Move the control in the direction
you wish to tilt the mirror.
3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place.
Memory feature (if equipped)
The power side view mirror positions are saved when doing a memory
set function and can be recalled along with the vehicle personality
features when a memory position is selected through the remote entry
transmitter, keyless entry keypad or memory switch on the driver’s seat.
Refer to Memory seats and mirrors in the Seating and Safety
Restraints chapter.
Automatic dimming feature (if equipped)
The driver’s side view mirror has an auto-dimming function. For more
information, refer to Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror in
this chapter.
94
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Fold-away mirrors
Fold the side mirrors in carefully
before driving through a narrow
space, like an automatic car wash.
Powerfold mirrors (if equipped)
With powerfold mirrors, you can fold
the side mirrors using the power
mirror switch.
1. Rotate the switch to the
center/neutral position.
2. Momentarily pull the switch
rearward to auto fold in.
3. Momentarily pull the switch rearward again to fold back to design
position.
The powerfold mirrors may be moved inward/outward manually.
However, if a mirror is moved manually, it will need to be reset. A mirror
which has not been reset may appear to be loose. To reset: with the
switch in the center position, momentarily pull the switch rearward to
fold the mirrors in. An audible ⬙click⬙ will be heard indicating
re-synchronization. If the click is not heard, use the switch to fold the
mirrors out, then in, until the click is heard. After that, the mirrors will
operate normally until they are again moved manually.
Note: 10 or more switch activations within one minute, or repeated
folding/unfolding of the mirrors while holding the switch rearward during
full travel, may cause the system to disable the fold/unfold function to
protect motors from overheating. Should this occur, wait approximately
three minutes with the vehicle running and up to 10 minutes with the
vehicle off, for the system to reset and for function to return to normal.
Heated outside mirrors (if equipped)
Heated mirrors remove ice, mist and
fog. To activate the heated mirrors,
press the rear defrost button R
located on the climate control panel.
Refer to Rear window defroster in
the Climate Controls chapter for
more information.
95
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
On vehicles not equipped with rear defrost, press the heated mirror
control
located on the climate control panel. For more information
refer to the Climate Controls chapter.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with the Auto dimming feature, the
mirror glass is thicker and will take longer to defrost.
Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to
readjust the mirror glass if it is frozen in place. These actions
could cause damage to the glass and mirrors.
Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
Exterior mounted mirror turn signal indicator (if equipped)
When the vehicle turn signal is
activated, the lower portion of the
mirror housing will blink.
This feature provides an indicator to
the driver that the vehicle turn
signal is working properly.
Telescoping trailer tow mirrors (if equipped)
The telescoping feature allows the
mirror to extend approximately
3.5 inches (90 mm). This feature is
especially useful to the driver when
towing a trailer. Pull the mirrors
inward carefully when driving
through a narrow space.
POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS (IF EQUIPPED)
The accelerator and brake pedal should only be adjusted when the
vehicle is stopped and the gearshift lever is in the P (Park) position.
96
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Press and hold the rocker control to
adjust accelerator and brake pedal.
• Press the right side of the control
to adjust the pedals toward you.
• Press the left side of the control
to adjust the pedals away from
you.
WARNING: Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with
feet on the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
POWER DEPLOYABLE RUNNING BOARDS (IF EQUIPPED)
Deployable running boards (DRB) automatically move when the doors
are opened to assist entering and exiting the vehicle.
Automatic power deploy:
• The running boards will extend
down and out when the doors are
opened.
Automatic power stow:
• The running boards will return to
the stowed position when the
doors are closed. There will be a
two second delay before the
running boards move in to the
stowed position.
Manual power deploy:
To manually operate the running boards, refer to Message center in the
Instrument Cluster chapter.
• This feature can manually set the running boards in the deployed
(OUT) position for access to the roof.
• When running boards are manually set in the deployed position, the
boards will return to the stowed position and enter automatic mode
when the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h).
Enable/disable:
To enable/disable the power running board feature, refer to Message
center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
• When this feature is disabled (OFF), the running boards will move to
the stowed position regardless of the position of the doors.
97
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
• When this feature is enabled (AUTO), the running boards will move
back to the correct positions based off of the door positions.
Bounce-back:
• If an object is in the way of the moving running board, the running
board will automatically bounce back in the reverse direction and
move to the end of travel.
Note: The running boards may operate slower in cooler temperatures. In
adverse conditions, debris such as mud, dirt, and salt may become
trapped in the running board mechanism, possibly leading to unwanted
noise. If this occurs, manually set the running boards to the deployed
position and flush the system (in particular the front and rear hinge
arms) with a high-pressure car wash wand.
Note: Do not use the running boards, front and rear hinge assemblies,
running board motors, or the running board under body mounts to lift
the vehicle when jacking. Please utilize proper jacking points. Refer to
Changing the tires in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
WARNING: In extreme climates, excessive ice buildup may
occur, causing the running boards not to deploy. Be sure that the
running boards have deployed, and have finished moving before
attempting to step on them. Note: The running boards will resume
normal function once the blockage is cleared.
WARNING: Turn off the running boards before jacking or
placing any object under the vehicle. Never place your hand
between the extended running board and the vehicle. A moving
running board may cause injury.
SPEED CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
With speed control set, you can maintain a set speed without keeping
your foot on the accelerator pedal.
WARNING: Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, slippery or unpaved.
98
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Setting speed control
The controls for using your speed
control are located on the steering
wheel for your convenience.
1. Press the ON control and release
it.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET + or SET - control
and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
light on the
5. The indicator
instrument cluster will turn on.
Note:
• Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a
steep hill.
• If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you
may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.
• If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.
Disengaging speed control
To disengage the speed control:
• Depress the brake pedal.
Disengaging the speed control will not erase previous set speed.
99
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Resuming a set speed
Press the RESUME control and
release it. This will automatically
return the vehicle to the previously
set speed.
Increasing speed while using speed control
There are two ways to set a higher
speed:
• Press and hold the SET + control
until you get to the desired
speed, then release the control.
You can also use the SET +
control to operate the Tap-Up
function. Press and release this
control to increase the vehicle set
speed in small amounts by 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When the
vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET + control.
Reducing speed while using speed control
There are two ways to reduce a set
speed:
• Press and hold the SET - control
until you get to the desired
speed, then release the control.
You can also use the SET control to operate the Tap-Down
function. Press and release this
control to decrease the vehicle
set speed in small amounts by
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
• Depress the brake pedal until the desired vehicle speed is reached and
press the SET + control.
100
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Turning off speed control
There are two ways to turn off the speed control:
• Depress the brake pedal or the
clutch pedal (if equipped). This
will not erase your vehicle’s
previously set speed.
• Press the speed control OFF
control.
Note: When you turn off the speed
control or the ignition, your speed
control set speed memory is erased.
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)
Radio control features
Press MEDIA to select:
• AM, FM1, FM2, or CD
• SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3 (Satellite
Radio mode).
• LINE IN (auxiliary input jack)
In radio mode:
to access the
• Press
next/previous preset station.
In CD mode:
to listen to the
• Press
next track on the disc.
In satellite radio mode:
to advance
• Press
through preset channels.
101
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
In any mode:
• Press VOL + or VOL - to adjust
the volume.
SYNC威 system hands free
control features (if equipped)
briefly to use the voice
Press
command feature. You will hear a
tone and LISTENING will appear in
the radio display. Press and
to exit voice command.
hold
to activate phone mode or
Press
answer a phone call. Press VOL + or
− to adjust volume. Press and
to end a call or exit phone mode.
hold
to scroll through various menus and selections. Press
Press
OK to confirm your selection.
For further information on the SYNC威 system, refer to the SYNC威
supplement.
Navigation system/SYNC威 hands
free control features (if
equipped)
control briefly until the
Press
voice
icon appears on the
Navigation display to use the voice
command feature.
to activate phone mode or
Press
answer a phone call. Press VOL + or
− to adjust volume. Press and
to exit phone mode or end a call.
hold
102
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
For further information on the Navigation system/SYNC威 system, refer to
the Navigation and SYNC威 supplements.
MOON ROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
The moon roof control is located on the overhead console.
WARNING: Do not let children play with the moon roof or leave
children unattended in the vehicle. They may seriously hurt
themselves.
WARNING: When closing the moon roof, you should verify that
it is free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are
not in the proximity of the moon roof opening.
The moon roof is equipped with an automatic, one-touch, express
opening and closing feature. To stop motion at any time during the
one-touch operation, press the control a second time.
To open the moon roof: Press and
release the SLIDE control, the moon
roof will open automatically. Press
the switch again to stop the moon
roof.
To close the moon roof: Pull and
release the SLIDE control, the moon
roof will close automatically. Press
the switch again to stop the moon
roof.
Bounce-back: When an obstacle has been detected in the moon roof
opening as the moon roof is closing, the moon roof will automatically
open and stop at a prescribed position.
Bounce-back override: To override bounce-back function, pull and hold
the SLIDE switch within two seconds of a bounce-back event. The
closing force will begin to increase each time the moon roof is closed for
the first three closing cycles, with bounce-back active. For example:
Bounce-back can be used to overcome the resistance of ice on the moon
roof or seals
To vent the moon roof: Press and release the TILT control, the moon
roof will move to the vent position automatically from any moon roof
position. Press the switch again to stop the moon roof. Pull and hold the
TILT control to close the moon roof.
103
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
The moon roof has a built-in sliding shade that can be manually opened
or closed when the glass panel is shut. To close the shade, pull it toward
the front of the vehicle.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER (IF EQUIPPED)
The appearance of your vehicle’s universal garage door opener will vary
according to your option package. Before programing, make sure your
transmitter matches the graphic in the procedure.
HomeLink威
Car2U威 Home Automation
System
HomeLink姞 Wireless Control System (if equipped)
The HomeLink威 Wireless Control
System, located on the driver’s visor,
provides a convenient way to
replace up to three hand-held
transmitters with a single built-in
device. This feature will learn the
radio frequency codes of most
transmitters to operate garage
doors, entry gate operators, security systems, entry door locks, and
home or office lighting.
WARNING: When programming your HomeLink威 Wireless
Control System to a garage door or gate, be sure that people and
objects are out of the way to prevent potential injury or damage.
104
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Do not use the HomeLink威 Wireless Control System with any garage
door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by
U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door which cannot
detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet
current U.S. federal safety standards. For more information, contact
HomeLink威 at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
Retain the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for
future programming procedures (i.e. new HomeLink威 equipped vehicle
purchase). It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the
programmed Homelink威 buttons be erased for security purposes, refer to
Programming in this section.
Programming
Do not program HomeLink威 with the vehicle parked in the garage.
Note: Your vehicle may require the ignition switch to be turned to the
accessory position for programming and/or operation of the HomeLink威.
It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink威 for quicker
training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
1. Position the end of your
hand-held transmitter 1–3 inches
(2–8 cm) away from the HomeLink威
button you wish to program (located
on your visor) while keeping the
indicator light in view.
2. Simultaneously press and hold
both the chosen HomeLink威 and
hand-held transmitter buttons until the HomeLink威 indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light. Now you may release
both the HomeLink威 and hand-held transmitter buttons.
Note: Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to
replace Step 2 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator and
Canadian Programming in this section for Canadian residents.
3. Firmly press and hold for five seconds and release the
programmed HomeLink威 button up to two separate times to activate the
door. If the door does not activate, press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink威 button and observe the indicator light.
105
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate when the HomeLink威 button is pressed
and released.
• If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns
to a constant light continue with “Programming” Steps 4 through
6 to complete programming of a rolling code equipped device (most
commonly a garage door opener).
4. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage,
locate the “learn” or “smart” button (usually near where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the unit).
5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or “smart” button. (The name and
color of the button may vary by manufacturer.)
Note: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate Step 6.
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and
release the programmed HomeLink威 button. Repeat the
press/hold/release sequence again and, depending on the brand of the
garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this
sequence a third time to complete the programming.
HomeLink威 should now activate your rolling code equipped device. To
program additional HomeLink威 buttons begin with Step 1 in this section.
For questions or comments, please contact HomeLink威 at
www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
Gate Operator & Canadian Programming
During programming, your
hand-held transmitter may
automatically stop transmitting —
not allowing enough time for
HomeLink威 to accept the signal
from the hand-held transmitter.
After completing Step 1 outlined in
the Programming section, replace
Step 2 with the following:
Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is
advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent
overheating.
• Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button (note Step 2 in the
Programming section) while you press and release — every two
seconds (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the frequency
106
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
signal has been accepted by the HomeLink威. The indicator light will
flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink威 accepts the radio
frequency signal.
• Proceed with Step 3 in the Programming section.
Operating the HomeLink姞 Wireless Control System
To operate, simply press and release
the appropriate HomeLink威 button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained product (garage door, gate
operator, security system, entry
door lock, or home or office lighting
etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time. In the event that there are still
programming difficulties, contact HomeLink威 at www.homelink.com or
1–800–355–3515.
Erasing HomeLink姞 buttons
To erase the three programmed
buttons (individual buttons cannot
be erased):
• Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink威 buttons until the
indicator light begins to
flash-after 20 seconds. Release
both buttons. Do not hold for
longer that 30 seconds.
HomeLink威 is now in the train (or learning) mode and can be
programmed at any time beginning with Step 1 in the Programming
section.
Reprogramming a single HomeLink姞 button
To program a device to HomeLink威 using a HomeLink威 button previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button. Do NOT release the
button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without
releasing the HomeLink威 button, follow Step 1 in the Programming
section.
107
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink威 at www.homelink.com
or 1–800–355–3515.
Car2U姞 Home Automation System (if equipped)
The Car2U威 Home Automation
System is a universal transmitter
located in the driver’s visor that
includes two primary features – a
garage door opener and a platform
for remote activation of devices
within the home. The Car2U威
system’s garage door opener
function replaces the common
hand-held garage door opener with a three-button transmitter that is
integrated into the interior of your vehicle. After being programmed for
garage doors, the Car2U威 system transmitter can be programmed to
operate security devices and home lighting systems.
WARNING: Make sure that people and objects are clear of the
garage door or security device you are programming. Do not
program the Car2U威 system with the vehicle in the garage.
Do not use the Car2U威 system with any garage door opener that lacks
safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. Federal Safety
Standards (this includes any garage door opener manufactured before
April 1, 1982).
Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future Car2U威 system programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale or lease termination of the vehicle, the
programmed Car2U威 system buttons should be erased for security
reasons. Refer to Erasing the Car2U威 Home Automation System
buttons later in this section.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the
Car2U威 system. Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful to have
another person assist you in programming the transmitter.
Additional Car2U威 system information can be found on-line at
www.learcar2U.com or by calling the toll-free Car2U威 system help line at
1-866-572-2728.
108
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Types of garage door openers (rolling code and fixed code)
The Car2U威 Home Automation System may be programmed to operate
rolling code and fixed code garage door openers.
• Rolling code garage door openers were produced after 1996 and are
code protected. Rolling code means the coded signal is changed every
time your remote control garage door opener is used.
• Fixed code garage door openers were produced prior to 1996. Fixed
code uses the same coded signal every time. It is manually
programmed by setting DIP switches for a unique personal code.
If you do not know if your garage
door opener is a rolling code or
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
fixed code device, open your garage
CTS 206-12 T124
door opener’s remote control battery
cover. If a panel of DIP switches is
present your garage door opener is
a fixed code device. If not, your
garage door opener is a rolling code
device.
O
N
Rolling code programming
Note: Programming the rolling code garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions. Read the entire procedure prior to beginning so
you will know which actions are time-sensitive. If you do not follow the
time-sensitive actions, the device will time out and you will have to
repeat the procedure.
Note: Do not program the Car2U威 system with the vehicle in the garage.
Make sure that your key is on and engine off while programming the
transmitter.
1. Firmly press the two outer
Car2U威 system buttons for
1–2 seconds, then release.
109
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
2. Go to the garage to locate the
garage door opener motor and its
“learn” button. You may need a
ladder to reach the unit and you
may need to remove the unit’s cover
or light lens to locate the “learn”
button. Press the “learn” button,
after which you will have
10–30 seconds to return to your
vehicle and complete the following
steps. If you cannot locate the
“learn” button, refer to the Owner’s Guide of your garage door opener or
call the toll-free Car2U威 system help line at 1-866-57Car2U
(1-866-572-2728).
3. Return to your vehicle. Press and
hold the Car2U威 system button you
would like to use to control the
garage door. You may need to hold
the button from 5–20 seconds,
during which time the selected
button indicator light will blink
slowly. Immediately (within
1 second) release the button once the garage door moves. When the
button is released, the indicator light will begin to blink rapidly until
programming is complete.
4. Press and release the button again. The garage door should move,
confirming that programming is successful. If your garage door does not
operate, repeat the previous steps in this section.
After successful programming, you will be able to operate your Car2U威
system by pressing the button you programmed to activate the opener.
The indicator light above the selected button will turn on to confirm that
the Car2U威 system is responding to the button command.
To program another rolling code device such as an additional garage door
opener, a security device or home lighting, repeat Steps 1 through 4
substituting a different function button in Step 3 than what you used for
the garage door opener. For example, you could assign the left-most
button to the garage door, the center button to a security device, and
the right-most button to another garage door opener.
110
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Note: The Car2U威 system allows for three devices to be programmed. If
you need to change or replace any of the three devices after it has been
initially programmed, it is necessary to erase the current settings using
the Erasing the Car2U威 Home Automation System buttons procedure
and then programming all of the devices being used.
Fixed code programming
Note: Do not program the Car2U威 system with the vehicle in the garage.
Make sure that your key is on and engine off while programming the
transmitter.
1. To program units with fixed code DIP switches, you will need the
garage door hand-held transmitter, paper and a pen or pencil.
2. Open the battery cover and record the switch settings from left to
right for all 8 to 12 switches. Use the figure below:
When a switch is in the up, on, or + position, circle “L.”
When a switch is in the middle, neutral, or 0 position, circle “M.”
When a switch is in the down, off, or – position, circle “R.”
Switch
position
1 2 3
Up, on or +
L L L
Middle,
M M M
neutral or 0
Down, off or – R R R
L=left; M=middle; R=right
4
L
5
L
6
L
7
L
8
L
9
L
10
L
11
L
12
L
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
111
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
3. To input these positions into the
Car2U威 system, simultaneously
press all three Car2U威 system
buttons for a few seconds and then
release to put the device into
programming mode. The indicator
lights will blink slowly. Within
2.5 minutes enter your
corresponding DIP switch settings
from left to right into your Car2U威 system by pressing and releasing the
buttons corresponding to the settings you circled.
4. After inputting switch settings, simultaneously press and release all
three Car2U威 system buttons. The indicator lights will turn on.
5. Press and hold the Car2U威
system button you would like to use
to control the garage door.
Immediately (within 1 second)
release the button once the garage
door moves. During this time the
selected button indicator light will
blink slowly. Do not release the
button until you see the garage door move. Most garage doors open
quickly. You may need to hold the button from 5–55 seconds before
observing movement of the garage door.
6. The indicator light will (begin to) blink rapidly until programming is
complete. If your garage door opener does not operate following these
steps, repeat Steps 2 through 6. Otherwise, call the toll-free Car2U威 help
line at 1-866-57Car2U (1-866-572-2728).
After successful programming, you will be able to operate your Car2U威
system by pressing the button you programmed to activate the opener.
The indicator light above the selected button will turn on to confirm that
the Car2U威 system is responding to the button command.
Erasing the Car2U姞 Home Automation System buttons
Note: The system allows for three devices to be programmed. If you
need to change or replace any of the three devices after it has been
initially programmed, it will be necessary to erase the current settings
using the procedure below and then reprogramming all of the devices
being used.
112
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
To erase programming on the Car2U威 system (individual buttons cannot
be erased), use the following procedure:
1. Firmly press the two outside
Car2U威 system buttons
simultaneously for approximately
20 seconds until the indicator lights
begin to blink rapidly. The indicator
lights are located directly above the
buttons.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to
blink, release your fingers from the
buttons. The codes for all buttons
are erased.
If you sell your vehicle equipped with the Car2U威 system, it is
recommended that you erase the programming for security reasons.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada Compliance
The Car2U威 system complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
This device must accept any interference received including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Changes and modifications to the Car2U威 system transmitter by other
than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use the
equipment.
TAILGATE LOCK (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
tailgate lock designed to help
prevent theft of the tailgate.
• Insert ignition key and turn to the
right to engage lock.
• Turn ignition key to the left to
unlock.
113
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Tailgate removal
Your tailgate is removable to allow more room for loading.
WARNING: Always properly secure cargo to prevent shifting
cargo or cargo falling from vehicle, which could result in
compromised vehicle stability and serious personal injury to vehicle
occupants or others.
Note: If equipped with a rearview camera system (RCS), do Steps 1
through 3 before removing the tailgate.
1. Before removal of the tailgate,
locate and disconnect the tailgate
in-line connector under the pickup
box on the passenger side of the
vehicle near the spare tire.
2. Install a protective cap (located
in the glove box) onto the in-line
RCS connector that remains under
the pickup box.
3. Partially lower tailgate and
carefully feed tailgate harness up through the gap between the pickup
box and the bumper. Place the tailgate harness out of the way under the
pickup box.
4. Lower the tailgate.
5. Using a screwdriver, gently pry
the spring clip (on each connector)
past the head of the support screw.
Disconnect cable.
6. Disconnect the other cable.
7. Lift tailgate to a 45-degree angle
from horizontal.
8. Lift right side off of its hinge.
9. Lift tailgate to a 80-degree angle from horizontal.
10. Remove tailgate from left side hinge by sliding tailgate to the right.
To install, follow the removal procedures in reverse order.
114
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Tailgate step (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a feature that allows easier entry into
the truck bed. To open the tailgate step:
1. Flip down the tailgate.
2. Pull the yellow latch lever to the
unlock positon ( ) to release the
grab handle from its stowed postion
and raise the handle upright until
you feel it latch and see the latch
lever in the lock positon ( ). The
yellow lever only needs to be used
when releasing the grab handle.
3. Rotate the center molding to
unlatch the tailgate step and pull it
towards you to extend it.
4. Flip open the step panel to widen
the step.
Note: To reduce risk of falling:
• Operate step only when the
vehicle is on level surface.
• Operate step only in areas with
sufficient lighting
• Always open flip panel to widen step.
• Always use grab handle when stepping up and down.
• Step not intended for bare-footed use.
• Keep step clean from contamination before use (e.g. snow, mud)
• Keep the step load (you + load) below 350 lb. (159 kg).
• Never drive with step deployed.
To close the tailgate step:
1. Close the step panel, then lift and fully close the tailgate step into the
tailgate.
2. Slide the latch at the bottom of the handle, then lower the handle.
115
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Note:
• Fully close and latch the tailgate step before moving the vehicle.
• Never drive with the step or grab handle deployed.
• Replace slip resistance tape (serviceable item) if worn out.
• Replace handle molding (serviceable item) if damaged.
• Do not tow with grab handle or step frame.
Box side step (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a box side step that allows easier
access to the truck bed.
Note: Do not drive vehicle with box side step(s) in the deployed
position.
Note: The Box Side Step load carrying capability (1 person + cargo) is
500 lbs (227 kg). Do not exceed 500 lbs (227 kg).
To deploy the box side step, with your foot, push down on the button.
The step will automatically extend out from the stowed position.
Note: The box side steps may operate slower in cooler temperatures. In
adverse conditions, debris such as mud, dirt, snow, ice, and salt may
become trapped in the box side step mechanism, possibly causing the
box side step to not deploy automatically after pressing the button. If
this occurs, ensure that the button is pressed down, carefully manually
pull out the box side step, wash off the debris with a high-pressure car
wash wand, and re-stow the step.
116
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
To stow the box side step, with your foot, push the box side step under
the truck until fully latched. Do not push on the button while stowing
the box side step.
Note: Do not use the box side steps to lift the vehicle when jacking.
Utilize proper jacking points. Refer to Changing the tires in the
Roadside Emergencies chapter.
BED EXTENDER (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a cargo management feature in the
truck bed.
Note: This feature is not intended for off-road usage.
To open the bed extender into tailgate mode:
1. Pull the locking pin toward the
center of the vehicle.
117
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
2. Open the latches to release the
panels.
3. Rotate the panels toward the
tailgate.
Repeat Steps 1–3 for the other side of the bed extender.
4. Connect the two panels, then rotate both knobs a quarter-turn
clockwise to secure the panels.
118
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
5. Ensure the latch rod is inserted
into the tailgate hole and the locking
pins on both sides are engaged into
their holes in the pick-up box.
6. Reverse steps for storage of the
bed extender.
Note: When the vehicle is in motion, ensure the locking pins and knobs
are fully engaged.
Note: Ensure all cargo is secured.
Note: When the vehicle is in motion, the tailgate load must not exceed
150 lbs. (68 kg).
Note: The bed extender should always be kept in the grocery mode or
stowed position with the tailgate closed when not being used for the
purpose of restraining cargo in the tailgate mode.
To open the bed extender into grocery mode, follow Steps 1–4 by
rotating the panels away from the tailgate. Close the tailgate.
119
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
CARGO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The cargo management system consists of the Cargo rail package with
the following as optional accessories:
• Front header bar (if equipped)
• Cross bars (if equipped)
• Bed divider (if equipped)
• Side mounted tool bins (if equipped)
Cargo rail package: The strong extruded aluminum double channel
rails and four adjustable cleats are designed to hold loads up to 600 lb
(272 kg) per cleat (maximum of two cleats per rail).
• Cleat positions are adjusted by pulling the knob and turning slightly to
lock open. The cleat can then be moved along the rail. Once the
desired position is reached, return the knob to the horizontal position.
Pull the cleat side-to-side to ensure it has locked into the next
available hole location.
• To remove cleat from rail, pull the knob and turn slightly to lock open
and slide it off the end of the rail.
When installing cleat, reverse instructions above.
120
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Note: When replacing a cleat into the rail, make sure the oval embossed
on the knob is not upside down. This will ensure that the cleat is
properly oriented to accept accessory attachments.
Front header bar: Spans the header area of the pickup box, providing
the function of a header rail.
• Attachment cleats from side rails or other attachments may be
positioned in the front header bar to secure loads up to 600 lb
(272 kg) per cleat (maximum of two cleats).
• Cleats and other attachments may be inserted through the access
window located in the center of the header bar. These items can then
be slid to either side, and secured the same way as the side rails.
121
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Cross bars: Aluminum cross bars with T-slot channels in all four sides,
and a latch mechanism that allows the end supports to snap over the
existing cleats. Cross bars are rated to hold loads up to 100 lb (45 kg)
load evenly distributed between the two crossbars, and the T-slots are
sized to accept industry-standard roof rack accessories.
• To remove cross bar, lift handle on each side and lift end support
shroud off of the cleat.
• To install cross bar, align cleats directly across from each other on the
same rail (upper or lower). Then place crossbar end support onto
cleat and press down on each side until the latch handle cycles up and
then press the handle down to secure (pull up on the bars to ensure
they are securely attached).
• To install accessories into T-slots, remove cross bar and turn upside
down, then find the slip joint end, indicated with an arrow embossed
on the bottom of the support. Using a T25 Torx driver, remove two
Torx head bolts from bottom, and slide end support off of aluminum
extrusion. Insert accessory into desired T-slot, and install end support.
When tightening Torx head bolts, hand tightening with a Torx driver is
sufficient, DO NOT over torque by using a ratchet.
122
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Bed divider: This panel will keep small items up to 400 lb (180 kg) in
position in the pickup box. Also includes T-slots to allow attachment of
industry-standard roof rack accessories.
• To remove bed divider, lift handle on each side and lift end support
shroud off of the cleat.
• To install bed divider, align cleats directly across from each other on
the lower rail. Then place divider end support onto the cleats and
press down on each side until the latch handle cycles up then press
the handle down to secure (pull up on the divider to ensure they are
securely attached).
• To install accessories into T-slots, remove bed divider, then find the
slip joint end, indicated with an arrow embossed on the support. Using
a T25 Torx driver, remove two Torx head bolts and slide end support
off of the aluminum extrusion. Insert accessory into desired T-slot and
install end support. When tightening Torx head bolts, hand tightening
with a Torx driver is sufficient, DO NOT over torque by using a
ratchet.
123
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Side mounted tool bins: Watertight bins can be positioned at any point
along the side rails and can be easily removed (even when full), and
carried to wherever the contents are needed. Each bin will hold up to
60 lb (27 kg) of cargo, and has a drain plug for use as a cooler. Note:
When multiple bins are placed on one side of the pickup box, the total
cargo weight in all bins on that side of the pickup box cannot exceed
60 lb (27 kg).
• To access the lock, pull the tab at the base of the rubber cap to
uncover the lock. When you are done with the lock always reinstall
the rubber cap on the lock to ensure proper sealing. When the bin is
unlocked the rubber cap does not need to be removed to open the
bin, just press the rubber cap to unlatch the lid.
• The lock cylinder is keyed to the first ignition key to be turned in the
lock. This allows one key to work all bins, even if more are ordered
through the dealer. The dealer will usually key the locks during
pre-delivery, but if necessary, simply remove the sticker covering the
keyhole, insert ignition key and turn to the extent of travel in each
direction. This key will then be the only key to unlock the bin.
• Once the key has been set, simply turn the key to the right to lock, or
to the left to unlock. When locked, the push-button will not depress
when pushed.
124
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
• To remove the bin from the rail, open lid and pull up on both levers
located on the outboard edge (next to the pickup box top rail) until
the handles are all the way up (approximately 90 degrees). Once both
handles are raised, the lid may be closed. Note: Windows in the lid
will allow the handles to stick up above the lid (with the lid closed).
After closing the lid, simply lift up and inboard away from the pickup
box side to release bin from rail.
• To install, reverse the above instructions.
Note: Remove the bins during severe off road driving to avoid damage to
the cargo bins and pickup box.
WARNING: If any levers are visible above the lid of the bin, the
bin is not securely attached to the rail, and may become
detached from the vehicle if driven in that configuration.
125
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
KEYS
The key operates all locks on your vehicle. In case of loss, replacement
keys are available from your dealer.
You should always carry a second key with you in a safe place in case
you require it in an emergency.
Refer to the SecuriLock威 passive anti-theft system section in this
chapter for more information.
POWER DOOR LOCKS (IF EQUIPPED)
Press control to unlock all doors.
Press control to lock all doors.
Smart unlocking feature
The smart unlocking feature helps prevent you from locking yourself out
of your vehicle.
With the key in any ignition position:
• The driver’s door will automatically unlock if it is locked by the
driver’s power lock control while the driver’s door is open.
The vehicle may still be locked with the key in the ignition, and
performing one of the following actions:
• Pressing the manual lock button on the door.
• Operating the remote entry transmitter.
• Operating the keyless entry keypad.
• Operating the driver’s door with a key will only lock the driver’s door.
126
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Autolock
The autolock feature is available on vehicles with power locking. This
feature will lock all the doors when:
• all the doors are closed,
• the ignition is in the on position,
• you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion, (for manual
transmission the park brake should not be engaged) and
• the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
The autolock feature repeats when:
• any door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the on position
and the vehicle speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower and
• the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Deactivating/activating autolock
Your vehicle comes with the autolock feature enabled. There are four
methods to enable/disable this feature:
• Through your authorized dealer, or
• Performing the power door lock control procedure,
• Performing the keyless entry keypad (if equipped) procedure, or
• Performing the message center (if equipped) procedure.
Power door unlock/lock procedure
Before starting, ensure the ignition is in the off position and all vehicle
doors are closed. You must complete Steps 1-5 within 30 seconds or the
procedure will have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be
repeated, you must wait 30 seconds. Note: All doors must be closed and
remain closed throughout the configuration process.
1. Turn the ignition to the on
position.
2. Press the power door unlock
control three times.
3. Turn the ignition from the on to
the off position.
4. Press the power door unlock
control three times.
5. Turn the ignition back to the on position. The horn will chirp.
127
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
6. Press the unlock control, then press the lock control. The horn will
chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice (one short and one long
chirp) if autolock was activated.
7. Turn the ignition to the off position. The horn will chirp once to
confirm the procedure is complete.
Keyless entry keypad procedure
1. Turn the ignition to the off position.
2. Close all doors
3. Enter 5–digit entry code
4. Press and hold the 3 • 4. While holding the 3 • 4 press the 7 • 8.
5. Release the 7 • 8.
6. Release the 3 • 4.
The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been
disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been
enabled.
Message center procedure
For information on activating/deactivating the autolock feature using the
vehicle’s message center, refer to Message center information in the
Instrument cluster chapter.
Autounlock feature
The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when:
• the ignition is in the on position, all the doors are closed, and the
vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h);
• the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned to the
off or accessory position; and
• the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being
transitioned to the off or accessory position.
Note: The doors will not autounlock if the vehicle has been
electronically locked before the driver door is opened.
128
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Deactivating/activating autounlock feature
Your vehicle comes with the autounlock features activated; there are four
methods to enable/disable this feature:
• Through your authorized dealer,
• by using a power door unlock/lock sequence,
• using a keypad procedure (if equipped), or
• or by using the instrument cluster message center (if equipped). Refer
to Message center in the Instrument ClusterDriver Controls chapter.
Note: The autounlock feature can be activated/deactivated
independently of the autolock feature.
Power door lock switch autounlock enable/disable procedure
Before starting, ensure the ignition is in the off position and all vehicle
doors are closed. You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds or the
procedure will have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be
repeated, wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.
1. Place the key in the ignition and
turn the ignition to the on position.
2. Press the power door unlock
control three times.
3. Turn the ignition from the on
position to the off position.
4. Press the power door unlock
control three times.
5. Turn the ignition back to the on position. The horn will chirp one time
to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.
6. To enable/disable the autounlock feature, press the lock control, then
press the unlock control. The horn will chirp once if autounlock was
deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autounlock was
activated.
7. Turn the ignition to the off position. The horn will chirp once to
confirm the procedure is complete.
Keyless entry keypad autounlock enable/disable procedure
1. Turn the ignition to the off position.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Enter factory–set 5–digit entry code.
129
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
4. Press and hold the 3 • 4. While holding the 3 • 4, press and release
the 7 • 8. While still holding the 3 • 4, press and release the 7 • 8 a
second time.
5. Release the 3 • 4.
The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been
disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been
enabled.
Message center procedure
For information on activating/deactivating the autolock feature using the
vehicle’s message center, refer to Message center information in the
Instrument cluster chapter.
CHILDPROOF DOOR LOCKS (ON VEHICLES WITH REAR DOORS)
• When these locks are set, the
rear doors cannot be opened from
the inside.
• The rear doors can be opened
from the outside when the doors
are unlocked.
The childproof locks are located on
rear edge of each rear door and
must be set separately for each
door. Setting the lock for one door
will not automatically set the lock
for both doors.
• Insert the key and turn to the
lock position (key horizontal) to
engage the childproof locks.
• Insert the key and turn to the
unlock position (key vertical) to
disengage the childproof locks.
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
130
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
The typical operating range for your remote entry transmitter is
approximately 33 feet (10 meters). A decrease in operating range could
be caused by:
• weather conditions,
• nearby radio towers,
• structures around the vehicle, or
• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with a remote entry system which allows you to:
• unlock the vehicle doors without
a key.
• lock all the vehicle doors without
a key.
• activate the personal alarm.
If there are problems with the
remote entry system, make sure to
take ALL remote entry
transmitters with you to your
authorized dealer in order to aid in
troubleshooting the problem.
Two step door unlocking
1. Press
and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The interior
lamps parking lamps will illuminate.
and release again within three seconds to unlock the
2. Press
passenger doors and the rear doors.
The battery saver feature will turn off the lamps 10 minutes after the
ignition is turned to the off position.
One step door unlocking
and release
If the one step door unlocking feature is activated, press
once to unlock the passenger doors and the rear doors.
Note: The parking lamps and interior lamps will illuminate (refer to the
Illuminated entry feature later in this section), if the control on the
overhead lamp is not set to the off position.
131
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Switching from two step to one step door unlocking
Your vehicle comes with two step unlocking enabled. Unlocking can be
switched between two step and one step door unlocking by pressing and
and
buttons simultaneously on the remote entry
holding both the
transmitter for approximately four seconds and release. The lamps will
flash twice to indicate that the vehicle has switched to one step
unlocking. Repeat the procedure to switch back to two-step unlocking.
Locking the doors
1. Press
and release to lock all the doors. The parking lamps will
illuminate.
and release again within three seconds to confirm that all the
2. Press
doors are closed and locked. Note: The doors will lock again, the horn
will chirp once, and the turn lamps will illuminate if all the doors are
closed..
If any of the doors are not properly closed the horn will make two quick
chirps and the lamps will not illuminate.
Car finder
twice within three seconds. The horn will chirp and the turn
Press
lamps will flash. It is recommended that this method be used to locate
your vehicle, rather than using the panic alarm.
Sounding a panic alarm
to activate the alarm. Press again or turn the ignition to
Press
accessory or on to deactivate.
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the off
position.
Memory seats/power mirrors/adjustable pedals/steering column
(if equipped)
The remote entry transmitter allows you to recall the memory seat/power
mirrors/adjustable pedals/steering column (if equipped) feature.
to automatically move the seat, mirrors, adjustable pedals and
Press
steering column (if equipped) to the desired memory position.
Note: The seat will not travel to its final position if the key is not in the
ignition and the easy entry feature is enabled.
132
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Activating the memory feature
To activate this feature:
1. Position the seat, power mirrors, adjustable pedals and steering
column (if equipped) to the desired positions.
2. Press and hold either the 1 or 2
control on the driver’s seat for five
seconds. (A tone will be heard after
11⁄2 seconds when the memory store
is done) continue to hold until a
second tone is heard after five
seconds then release the control.
3. Within three seconds press
control on the remote entry
the
transmitter.
4. A tone will be heard when the activation is complete.
5. Repeat this procedure for another remote entry transmitter if desired.
Deactivating the memory feature
To deactivate this feature:
1. Press and hold either the 1 or 2 control on the driver’s seat memory
switch for five seconds. (A tone will be heard after 11⁄2 seconds when the
memory store is done) continue to hold until a second tone is heard
after five seconds then release the control.
2. Within three seconds press the
transmitter.
control on the remote entry
3. A tone will be heard when the deactivation is complete.
4. Repeat this procedure for another remote entry transmitter if desired.
Replacing the battery
The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three-volt lithium
battery CR2032 or equivalent.
133
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
To replace the battery:
1. Twist a thin coin between the two
halves of the remote entry
transmitter near the key ring. DO
NOT TAKE THE RUBBER COVER
AND CIRCUIT BOARD OFF THE
FRONT HOUSING OF THE
REMOTE ENTRY TRANSMITTER.
2. Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals on the back
surface of the circuit board.
3. Remove the old battery.
Note: Please refer to local
regulations when disposing of
transmitter batteries.
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to
the diagram inside the remote entry
transmitter for the correct
orientation of the battery. Press the battery down to ensure that the
battery is fully seated in the battery housing cavity.
5. Snap the two halves back together.
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter
to become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter
should operate normally after battery replacement.
Replacing lost transmitters
If a remote transmitter has been lost and you would like to remove it
from the vehicle’s memory, or you would like to purchase additional
remote transmitters and have them programmed to your vehicle:
• Take all your vehicle’s transmitters to your authorized dealer for
programming, or
• Perform the programming procedure yourself.
134
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Programming remote transmitters
It is necessary to have all (maximum of four — original and/or new) of
your remote transmitters available prior to beginning this procedure. If
all remote entry transmitters are not present during the programming
procedure, the transmitters that are not present during programming will
no longer operate the vehicle.
To program the transmitters yourself:
Note: Ensure the brake pedal is not
3
depressed during this sequence.
• Unlock all doors using the power
2
door lock/unlock control. Insert a
4
key and turn the ignition from
the 1 (off) to the 3 (on) position
and cycle between 1 (off) and 3
(on) eight times in rapid
1
succession (within 10 seconds)
with the eighth turn ending in the
3 (on) position. The locks will cycle to confirm that the programming
mode has been entered.
• Within 20 seconds, program a remote transmitter by pressing any
button on a transmitter. The locks will cycle once to confirm that the
remote transmitter has been programmed. (If more than 20 seconds
pass before pressing a remote transmitter button, the programming
mode will exit and the procedure will have to be repeated.)
• Repeat the previous step to program additional remote transmitters.
The locks will cycle once to confirm that each remote transmitter has
been programmed.
• When you have completed programming the remote transmitters, turn
the ignition to the 1 (off) position or wait 20 seconds. Again the doors
will lock/unlock to confirm programming has been completed.
Illuminated entry
The interior lamps and parking lamps illuminate when the remote entry
system is used to unlock the door(s) or sound the personal alarm, or
when the factory set 5-digit code or your personal code are correctly
entered into the keyless keypad.
The illuminated entry system will turn off the lights if:
• the ignition switch is turned to the on position, or
• the remote transmitter lock control is pressed, or
135
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
The dome lamp control (if equipped) must not be set to the off position
for the illuminated entry system to operate.
The lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or
• any door is open.
The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 10 minutes after the
last door is closed, even if the dimmer control is on.
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
You can use the keyless entry
keypad to:
• lock all vehicle doors.
• unlock only the driver’s door.
• unlock all vehicle doors.
• program/erase the customer keycode.
• enable/disable the autolocking feature.
The keypad can be operated with the factory set 5–digit entry code; this
code is located on the owner’s wallet card in the glove box, is marked on
the computer module, and is available from your authorized dealer. You
can also create your own 5–digit personal entry code.
When pressing the controls on the keypad, press the middle of the
controls to ensure a good activation.
Anti-scan feature
The keyless entry keypad is equipped with an anti-theft function called
“antiscan.” The antiscan feature provides a one-minute lockout feature,
where the user is unable to enter the vehicle using the keypad; this
lockout occurs when a valid entry code has not been entered by the user
within seven attempts (35 consecutive button presses). During the
lockout, the keypad will flash and pressing the controls on the keypad
will be ignored, except for pressing the 7 • 8 and the 9 • 0 controls
simultaneously, which will still lock the vehicle.
The anti-scan feature will be turned off after:
• one minute, when the anti-scan feature times out.
• one minute of keypad inactivity.
136
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
• the
control is pressed on the remote entry transmitter.
• the ignition is turned from the off position to the on position, or from
the on position to the off position.
Programming a personal entry code
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory set code (keypad will illuminate when pressed).
2. Within five seconds press the 1 • 2 on the keypad.
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. Each number must be entered
within five seconds of each other.
4. After the code is entered, the locks will cycle, confirming that the new
code has been set.
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential order.
• The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal
code.
• If you set a second personal code it will erase your first personal code.
Erasing personal code
1. Enter the factory set 5–digit code.
2. Press and release 1 • 2 then,
3. Press and hold the 1 • 2 for two seconds. This must be done within
five seconds of completing Step 1.
Your personal code is now erased and only the factory set 5–digit code
will work.
Unlocking and locking the doors using keyless entry keypad
To unlock the driver’s door, enter the factory set 5-digit code or your
personal code. Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each
other. Note: The driver’s door will unlock and the interior lamps will
illuminate after the factory set 5-digit code or your personal code are
correctly entered.
To unlock all doors, press the 3 • 4 control within five seconds.
To lock all doors, press the 7 • 8 and the 9 • 0 at the same time. You
do not need to enter the keypad code first. Note: The interior lamps
will turn off.
137
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
SECURILOCK姞 PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
SecuriLock威 passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization
system. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being
started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used. The
use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a “no-start” condition.
Your vehicle comes with two coded keys; additional coded keys may be
purchased from your authorized dealer. The authorized dealer can
program your spare keys to your vehicle or you can program the keys
yourself. Refer to Programming spare keys for instructions on how to
program the coded key.
Note: The SecuriLock威 passive anti-theft system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.
Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to
purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same
key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these
objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine. These
objects will not cause damage to the coded key, but may cause a
momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the
engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition off, remove all objects on
the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle. Always
take your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
138
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Anti-theft indicator
The anti-theft indicator is located in the instrument cluster.
• When the ignition is in the off
position, the indicator will flash
once every two seconds to
indicate the SecuriLock威 system
is functioning as a theft
deterrent.
• When the ignition is in the on position, the indicator will glow for
three seconds to indicate normal system functionality.
If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock威 system, the indicator will flash
rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the on position. If this
occurs, turn the ignition off then back to on to make sure there was no
electronic interference with the programmed key. If the vehicle doesn’t
start, try to start it with the 2nd programmed key and if successful
contact your authorized dealership for key replacement. If the indicator
still flashes rapidly or glows steadily, the vehicle will not start, contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible for service.
Automatic arming
The vehicle is armed immediately after switching the ignition to the off
position.
Automatic disarming
Switching the ignition to the on position with a coded key disarms the
vehicle.
Replacement keys
If your keys are lost or stolen and you don’t have an extra coded key,
you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. The
key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will
need to be programmed.
Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key
away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any
inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional
spare or replacement keys.
139
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Programming spare keys
A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle. Only
SecuriLock威 keys can be used. To program a coded key yourself, you
will need two previously programmed coded keys (keys that already
operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed key(s) readily
accessible for timely implementation of each step in the procedure.
If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you must
bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare coded
key(s) programmed.
Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously
3
programmed coded key into the
ignition.
2
2. Turn the ignition from the 1 (off)
4
position to the 3 (on) position. Keep
the ignition in the 3 (on) position
for at least three seconds, but no
more than 10 seconds.
1
3. Turn the ignition to the 1 (off)
position and remove the first coded
key from the ignition.
4. After three seconds but within 10 seconds of turning the ignition to
the 1 (off) position, insert the second previously coded key into the
ignition.
5. Turn the ignition from the 1 (off) position to the 3 (on) position. Keep
the ignition in the 3 (on) position for at least three seconds, but no more
than 10 seconds.
6. Turn the ignition to the 1 (off) position and remove the second
previously programmed coded key from the ignition.
7. After three seconds but within 20 seconds of turning the ignition to
the 1 (off) position and removing the previously programmed coded
key, insert the new unprogrammed key (new key/valet key) into the
ignition.
8. Turn the ignition from the 1 (off) position to the 3 (on) position. Keep
the ignition in the 3 (on) position for at least six seconds.
9. Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition.
If successful, the new coded key(s) will start the vehicle’s engine and the
theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out.
140
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
If not successful, the new coded key(s) will not start the vehicle’s engine
and the theft indicator will flash on and off and you may repeat Steps 1
through 5. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer
to have the new spare key(s) programmed.
Note: To program MyKey features, refer to MyKey in this chapter.
MYKEY™
The MyKey™ feature allows you to program a restricted driving mode to
promote good driving habits. All but one of the keys programmed to the
vehicle can be activated as a MyKey™. The key will remain restricted
until MyKey™ is disabled. Any remaining keys are referred to as an
“Administrator key” or Admin key. The Admin key can be used to create
a MyKey™, program optional MyKey™ settings, and disable the
MyKey™ feature. When the MyKey™ feature is enabled the user can use
System Check in the message center to see how many MyKeys™ and
Admin keys are programmed to the vehicle, and how many total miles
have been driven with the MyKey™ active.
MyKey™ Restricted Features
Standard settings – These settings cannot be changed
• The audio system will be muted whenever Belt-Minder威 is activated
until the safety belts are buckled. Refer to the Seating and Safety
Restraints chapter for a detailed description of Belt-Minder威
operation.
• Low fuel warnings are displayed in the message center followed by a
chime when the Distance to Empty value reaches 75 miles (120 km).
• The reverse sensing system cannot be turned off.
Optional settings – These settings can be changed
• Vehicle speed is limited to 80 mph (130 km/h). Visual warnings are
displayed followed by a chime when the vehicle speed has reached
80 mph (130 km/h).
• Visual warnings are displayed followed by a chime when a preselected
vehicle speed of 45, 55 or 65 mph (75, 90, or 105 km/h) is exceeded
• The maximum volume of the audio system is limited to 45%. MYKEY
VOLUME LIMITED will be displayed in the radio or (if equipped)
navigation screen when attempting to exceed the limited volume
• The AdvanceTrac威 system cannot be turned off. When this optional
setting is on, the MyKey™ user will not be able to deactivate the
system. Note: It may be beneficial to deactivate the AdvanceTrac威
system if the vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, or sand.
141
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Create a MyKey™
To program MyKey™ on one of the keys programmed to the vehicle,
insert the key that you want to make a MyKey™ into the ignition. Turn
the ignition on. Use the message center buttons to do the following:
1. Press SETUP until PRESS RESET TO CREATE MYKEY is displayed.
2. Press and release the RESET button. HOLD RESET TO CONFIRM
MYKEY will be displayed.
3. Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds until MARK THIS
AS RESTRICTED is displayed.
4. Wait until KEY RESTRICTED AT NEXT START is displayed.
MyKey™ is successfully programmed. Make sure you label it so you can
distinguish it from the Admin keys. Note: To program the optional
settings go to step 2 in the Programming MyKey™ Optional Settings
section. If your vehicle is equipped with remote start, see the Using
MyKey™ with Remote Start Systems section.
Note: The MyKey™ can be cleared within the same key cycle that it was
created, otherwise a standard key (Administrator key) is required to
disable the MyKey™ programming. To clear all MyKeys™ go to step 2 in
the Disable MyKey™ section.
Programming MyKey™ Optional Settings
Turn the ignition on using an Admin key. To program the optional
settings, use the message center buttons to do the following:
1. Press SETUP until RESET FOR MYKEY SETUP is displayed.
2. Press and release the RESET button to display MyKey™ setup menus.
The first menu shown is:
MYKEY MAX MPH <80 MPH> OFF
3. If you don’t want to change the maximum speed setting, press the
SETUP button to display the next menu. The remaining menus appear as
follows with the default settings shown:
MYKEY MPH TONES 45 55 65 <OFF>
MYKEY VOLUME LIMIT <ON> OFF
MYKEY ADVTRAC CTRL ON <OFF>.
4. On any of the menus press RESET to highlight your choice with the
<…>.
5. Press SETUP to enter your choice. The next optional setting will be
displayed.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you are done changing the optional
settings.
142
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Disable MyKey™
To reset all MyKeys™ as Admin keys do the following:
1. Turn the vehicle on using the Admin key.
2. Press SETUP until PRESS RESET TO CLEAR MYKEY is displayed.
3. Press and release the RESET button. HOLD RESET TO CONFIRM
CLEAR is displayed.
4. Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds until ALL MYKEYS
CLEARED is displayed.
Check MyKey™ System Status
The vehicle System Check will provide the status of the following
MyKey™ parameters:
• MYKEY MILES — This odometer only tracks mileage when a MyKey™
is used. If mileage does not accumulate as expected, then the
MyKey™ is not being used by the intended user. The only way to
reset this odometer to zero is by disabling MyKey™. If this odometer
is lower than the last time you checked, then the MyKey™ system has
been recently cleared.
• # MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED — Indicates how many MyKeys™ are
programmed to the vehicle. Can be used to detect deletion of a
MyKey™.
• # ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED — Indicates how many Admin keys
are programmed to the vehicle. Can be used to detect if an additional
spare key has been programmed to the vehicle
Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter for MyKey™
system warnings displays.
Using MyKey™ with Remote Start Systems
MyKey™ is not compatible with non-Ford approved aftermarket remote
start systems. If you choose to install a remote start system please see
your authorized dealer for a Ford approved remote start system.
Vehicles equipped with traditional keys:
When using a Ford-approved remote start system, the default settings
will recognize the remote start system as an additional Admin Key with
its associated privileges. Owners of vehicles equipped with traditional
keys should program the remote start system as a MyKey™ in addition
to the key that they have already programmed as a MyKey™. To
program the remote start system as MyKey™, do the following:
1. Enter the vehicle and close all doors.
143
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
2. Remote start the vehicle using a remote start fob.
3. Follow steps 1-4 in the Create a MyKey™ section.
Note: For all vehicles, the number of MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED or
ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED that is displayed in the MyKey™ System
Status menus will include the remote start system as an additional key in
the total count. See the Check MyKey™ System Status section.
Note: For all vehicles with remote start installed, it is possible to
program all ’real’ keys as MyKeys™, in which case, you will need to use
your remote start system to reset all MyKeys™ as Admin keys by doing
the following:
1. Enter the vehicle, close all doors.
2. Remote start the vehicle using your remote start fob.
3. Follow steps 1-4 in the Disable MyKey™ section.
144
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Troubleshooting
Condition
Can’t create a MyKey™
Cannot program the MyKey™
optional settings
Cannot disable MyKey™
Lost the only Admin key
Potential Causes
• Key in the ignition is already a
MyKey™
• Key in the ignition is the last
remaining Admin key (there always
has to be at least one Admin key)
• SecuriLock威 Passive Anti-Theft
System is disabled or in unlimited
mode
• Vehicle has been started using a
remote start system that is
programmed as MyKey™. Refer to
MyKey™ with Remote Start Systems
section.
• Key in the ignition is a MyKey™
• No MyKeys™ are programmed to
the vehicle. Refer to Create a
MyKey™ section
• Vehicle has been started using a
remote start system that is
programmed as MyKey™. Refer to
MyKey™ with Remote Start Systems
section.
• Key in the ignition is a MyKey™
• No MyKeys™ are programmed to
the vehicle. Refer to Create a
MyKey™ section
• Vehicle has been started using a
remote start system that is
programmed as MyKey™. Refer to
MyKey™ with Remote Start Systems
section.
• Purchase a new key from your
authorized dealer
145
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Condition
Lost any key
I accidentally programmed all
keys as MyKeys™
MyKey™ Programmed total
includes one additional key
Admin Keys Programmed total
includes one additional key
MyKey™ miles does not
accumulate
146
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Potential Causes
• For programming spare keys, refer
to the Programming spare keys
section in this chapter.
• Vehicle has a remote start system
that is recognized as an Admin key.
Refer to the Using MyKey™ with
Remote Start Systems section to reset
all MyKeys™ as Admin keys.
• Unknown key has been programmed
to the vehicle as a MyKey™.
• Vehicle is equipped with a remote
start system. Refer to MyKey™ with
Remote Start Systems section.
• Unknown key has been programmed
to the vehicle as Admin key.
• Vehicle is equipped with a remote
start system. Refer to MyKey™ with
Remote Start Systems section.
• MyKey™ is not being used by the
intended user.
• MyKey™ system has been recently
cleared.
Seating and Safety Restraints
SEATING
WARNING: Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to
slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal
injuries in the event of a collision.
WARNING: Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to
reduce the risk of injury in a collision or sudden stop.
WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original
position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped
behind the seatback. After returning the seatback to its original
position, pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or
collision.
Adjustable head restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with front row outboard head restraints that are
vertically adjustable.
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in
and/or operate the vehicle, until the head restraint is placed in its
proper position. The driver should never adjust the head restraint
while the vehicle is in motion.
The adjustable head restraints
consist of :
• a trimmed energy absorbing foam
and structure (1),
• two steel stems (2),
• a guide sleeve adjust/release
button (3),
• and a guide sleeve unlock/remove
button (4).
147
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
To adjust the head restraint, do the following:
1. Adjust the seatback to an upright driving/riding position.
2. Raise the head restraint by
pulling up on the head restraint.
3. Lower the head restraint by
pressing and holding the guide
sleeve adjust/release button and
pushing down on the head restraint.
Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is
even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the
back of your head. For occupants of extremely tall stature, adjust the
head restraint to its full up position.
WARNING: The adjustable head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted
when the seat is occupied.
148
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
To remove the adjustable head restraint, do the following:
1. Pull up the head restraint until it
reaches the highest adjustment
position.
2. Simultaneously press and hold
both the adjust/release button and
the unlock/remove button, then pull
up on the head restraint.
To reinstall the adjustable head restraint, do the following:
1. Insert the two stems into the
guide sleeve collars.
2. Push the head restraint down
until it locks.
Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is
even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the
back of your head. For occupants of extremely tall stature, adjust the
head restraint to its full up position.
149
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, head restraints must be installed properly.
Front seat
• Lift the track release bar to move
the seat forward or rearward.
Make sure that the seat is
relatched into place.
150
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• Pull the release lever handle
located on the side of the seat up
to move the seatback forward or
backward.
Using the armrest (if equipped)
• Push the release control to move
the armrest up or down.
• Pull out the drawer at the bottom
of the center seat to access the
cup holders (if equipped)
151
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• To gain access to the storage
compartment (if equipped) in
your armrest, lift the latch to
open the lid.
Using the manual lumbar support
For more lumbar support, turn the
lumbar support control toward the
front of vehicle.
For less lumbar support, turn the
lumbar support control toward the
rear of vehicle.
152
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Using the power lumbar support (if equipped)
The power lumbar control is located on the outboard side of the seat.
Press the forward side of the control
for additional support.
Press the rear side of the control to
reduce support.
Adjusting the front power seat (if equipped)
WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the
vehicle is moving.
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to
slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal
injuries in the event of a collision.
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat
back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system, resulting in
serious injury or death in a crash. Always sit upright against your
seatback, with your feet on the floor.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of possible serious injury: Do not
hang objects off seat back or stow objects in the seatback map
pocket (if equipped) when a child is in the front passenger seat. Do
not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between the
seat and the center console (if equipped). Check the “passenger airbag
off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp for proper airbag status. Refer
to Front passenger sensing system in the Airbag supplemental
restraint system (SRS) section for additional details. Failure to follow
these instructions may interfere with the front passenger seat sensing
system.
153
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion.
Move the switch in the direction of
the arrows to raise or lower the
front portion of the seat cushion.
Move the switch in the direction of
the arrows to raise or lower the rear
portion of the seat cushion.
Press the switch in the direction of
the arrows to move the seat
forward, backward, up or down.
Power recline (if equipped)
Press the control to recline the
seatback forward or rearward.
154
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Memory seat/power mirrors/adjustable pedals/steering column
(if equipped)
This system allows automatic
positioning of the driver seat,
outside rearview mirrors, adjustable
pedals, and steering column to two
programmable positions.
The memory seat control is located
on the driver’s seat.
• To program position one, move
the driver seat, exterior mirrors,
adjustable pedals and steering
column to the desired positions using the associated controls. Press
and hold control button 1 for at least two seconds.
• To program position two, repeat the previous procedure using control
button 2.
A position can only be recalled when the transmission gearshift is in Park
(automatic transmission). A memory seat position may be programmed
at any time.
The memory seat positions are also recalled when you press your remote
(unlock) control and the transmitter is
entry transmitter
programmed to a memory seat position or when you enter a valid
customer code 1 or 2 on the keypad.
To program the memory seat to remote entry transmitter, refer to
Remote entry system in the Locks and Security chapter..
Note: The seat will not travel to its final position if the key is not
in the ignition and the easy entry feature is enabled.
Easy-access/easy-out feature (if equipped)
The easy entry feature automatically moves the driver’s seat 2 inches
(5 cm) forward when:
• the transmission is in P (Park)
• the key is inserted into the ignition cylinder
(If the seat is located less than 2 inches [5 cm] from the front of the seat
track, the seat will travel up to 1⁄4 inch (.64 cm) to the front of the seat
track).
155
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The easy out feature automatically moves the driver’s seat 2 inches
(5 cm) backward when:
• the transmission is in P (Park)
• the key is removed from the ignition cylinder
(If the seat is located less than 2 inches (5 cm) from the rear of the seat
track, the seat will travel up to 1⁄4 inch (.64 cm) to the rear of the seat
track).
If the memory setting is programmed through the remote transmitter,
upon unlocking the door via remote entry system, the seat position will
travel to the desired memory setting less 2 inches (5 cm). Once entering
the vehicle and inserting the key in the ignition while in P (Park), the
easy entry feature will move the seat an additional 2 inches (5 cm) to
the desired memory location. See Locks and Security for activating the
memory seat feature through the remote entry system.
Deactivating/activating the easy access/easy out feature
The easy entry/exit feature can be turned off or on through the vehicle
message center (if equipped). If your vehicle does not have a message
center, the feature can be turned off or on through the following process:
1. Put the key into the ignition (The driver seat may move forward if the
easy entry/exit feature is activated).
2. Place the ignition key into the on position (do not start the vehicle).
When the vehicle is in the on position, the interior and exterior lights,
the climate controls, and the radio are functional without the engine
started. See Programming remote transmitters for ignition switch
diagram.
3. Turn the ignition key to the off position.
4. Cycle the ignition key between the off position and the on position a
total of three times ending with the ignition in the off position.
5. Engage the forward or rearward seat switch.
6. Remove the ignition key from the ignition switch. (The driver seat
may move rearward if the easy entry/exit feature is activated).
Steps 2 through 6 must be performed within a 20 second period. The
easy entry/exit feature will be deactivated. Repeating the above process
will also reactivate the easy entry/exit feature.
156
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Heated seats (if equipped)
WARNING: Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical
conditions, must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins,
needles, or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating
element which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat
• Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
To operate the heated seats, do the following:
• Press control located on the
instrument panel to set at high
heat.
• Press control again to set at low heat.
• Press again to deactivate.
The indicator light on the control will illuminate when activated.
The system automatically shuts off after 10 minutes.
Heated and cooled seats (if equipped)
The controls for the climate controlled seats are located on the dual
electronic automatic temperature control (DEATC) system.
157
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Heated seats
WARNING: Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical
conditions, must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins,
needles, or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating
element which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat
• Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
The heated seats will only function when the engine is running.
To operate the heated seats:
Press once to activate the high heat
setting (three indicator lights).
Continue pressing to scroll through
the other settings; medium heat
(two indicator lights), low heat (one indicator light) or off.
Cooled seats
The cooled seats will only function when the engine is running.
To operate the cooled seats:
Press once to activate the high cool
setting (three indicator lights).
Continue pressing to scroll through
the other settings; medium cool
(two indicator lights), low cool (one indicator light) or off.
If the engine falls below 350 RPMs while the cooled seats are on, the
feature will turn itself off and will need to be reactivated.
A/C
158
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Climate controlled seats air filter replacement (if equipped)
The climate controlled seat system includes air filters that must be
replaced periodically. Refer to the scheduled maintenance information
for more information.
• There is a filter located under the
rear of each front seat.
• The filter can be accessed from the second row seat. Move the front
seats all the way forward and up to ease access.
To remove an air filter:
1. Remove key from ignition.
2. Push up on the outside rigid edge
of the filter and rotate toward the
front of the vehicle once tabs are
released.
3. Remove filter.
159
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
To install a filter:
• First, position the filter in it’s
housing making sure that the far
forward end is all the way up in
the housing. Then push in on the
center of the outside edge of the
filter and rotate up into the
housing until it clips into position.
REAR SEATS
Second row head restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with 2nd row outboard head restraints that are
vertically adjustable.
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in
and/or operate the vehicle, until the head restraint is placed in its
proper position. The driver should never adjust the head restraint
while the vehicle is in motion.
The adjustable head restraints
consist of :
• a trimmed energy absorbing foam
and structure (1),
• two steel stems (2),
• a guide sleeve adjust/release
button (3),
• and a guide sleeve unlock/remove
button (4).
160
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
To adjust the head restraint, do the following:
1. Raise the head restraint by
pulling up on the head restraint.
2. Lower the head restraint by
pressing and holding the guide
sleeve adjust/release button and
pushing down on the head restraint.
Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is
even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the
back of your head. For occupants of extremely tall stature, adjust the
head restraint to its full up position.
WARNING: The adjustable head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted
when the seat is occupied.
161
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
To remove the adjustable head restraint, do the following:
1. Pull up the head restraint until it
reaches the highest adjustment
position.
2. Simultaneously press and hold
both the adjust/release button and
the unlock/remove button, then pull
up on the head restraint.
To reinstall the adjustable head restraint, do the following:
1. Insert the two stems into the
guide sleeve collars.
2. Push the head restraint down
until it locks.
Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is
even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the
back of your head. For occupants of extremely tall stature, adjust the
head restraint to its full up position.
162
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, head restraints must be installed properly.
Folding up the rear seats (SuperCab only)
The rear seat has a split 60/40 cushion. Each seat cushion can be flipped
up into a vertical storage position.
1. Pull control to release seat
cushion.
2. Rotate seat cushion up until it
locks into vertical storage position.
Returning the seat to seating position
WARNING: Make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped
underneath the seat cushion before returning the seat cushion to
its original position, and that the seat cushion locks into place. Failure
to do so may prevent the seat from operating properly in the event of
a crash, which could increase the risk of serious injury.
1. Pull control on the side of the seat to release seat cushion from
storage position.
2. Push seat cushion down until it locks into horizontal position.
Folding up the rear seats (SuperCrew vehicles only)
The rear seat has a split 60/40 cushion. Each seat cushion can be flipped
up into a vertical storage position.
163
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• Rotate seat cushion up by lifting
on the corner until it locks into
vertical storage position.
Returning the seat to seating position
WARNING: Before returning the seat cushion to its original
position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped
underneath the seat cushion.
1. Pull control on the bottom of the
seat cushion to release seat cushion
from storage position.
2. Push seat cushion down until it
rests into the horizontal position.
Armrest and cupholders (if equipped)
Pull the strap located on the center
seatback to access the armrest and
cupholders.
The cupholders are located inside
the rear seat armrest. To open the
cupholders:
• Push in gently on the center of
the plastic panel on the front
edge of the armrest. The
cupholders will partially open.
• Pull the cupholder fully open before using.
164
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
To close the cupholders:
• Push the front edge back into the seat until the cupholders are fully
seated.
• Make sure there is nothing in the cupholders before attempting to
close them.
Make sure that the cupholders are fully seated before stowing the
armrest.
Rear heated seats (if equipped)
WARNING: Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical
conditions, must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins,
needles, or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating
element which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat
• Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
The rear seat heat controls are located on the rear door armrest.
To operate the heated seats:
• Push the indicated side of the
control for maximum heat.
• Push again to deactivate.
165
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• Push the indicated side of the
control for minimum heat.
• Push again to deactivate.
The heated seat module resets at every ignition run cycle. While the
ignition is in the on position, activating the high or low heated seat
switch enables heating mode. When activated, they will turn off
automatically when the engine is turned off.
The indicator light will illuminate when the heated seats have been
activated.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS
Personal Safety System™
The Personal Safety System™ provides an improved overall level of
frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help
further reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to
analyze different occupant classifications and conditions and crash
severity before activating the appropriate safety devices to help better
protect a range of occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System™ consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints.
• Front outboard safety belts with pretensioners, energy management
retractors, and safety belt usage sensors.
• Driver’s seat position sensor.
• Front crash severity sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system
• Passenger Airbag Off indicator light.
• Restraints Control Module (RCM) with impact and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and back-up tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensor(s), safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position
sensor, and indicator lights.
166
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
How does the Personal Safety System™ work?
The Personal Safety System™ can adapt the deployment strategy of your
vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant
classification and conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors
provides information to the Restraints Control Module (RCM). During a
crash, the RCM may activate the safety belt pretensioners and/or either
none, one, or both stages of the dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints
based on crash severity and occupant classification and conditions.
The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with
the system. Rather, it means the Personal Safety System™ determined
the accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.) were not
appropriate to activate these safety devices. Front airbags are designed
to activate only in frontal and near-frontal collisions, not rollovers,
side-impacts, or rear-impacts unless the collision causes sufficient
longitudinal deceleration.
Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints
The dual-stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbag
inflation energy. A lower, less forceful energy level is provided for more
common, moderate-severity impacts. A higher energy level is used for
the most severe impacts. Refer to Airbag Supplemental Restraints
(SRS) section in this chapter.
Front crash severity sensor
The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the
severity of an impact. Positioned up front, it provides valuable
information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact. This
allows your Personal Safety System™ to distinguish between different
levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the
dual-stage airbags and safety belt pretensioners.
Driver’s seat position sensor
The driver’s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System™ to
tailor the deployment level of the driver dual-stage airbag based on seat
position. The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting
close to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level.
Front passenger sensing system
For airbags to do their job they must inflate with great force, and this
force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close
to the airbag when it begins to inflate. For some occupants, like infants
167
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
in rear-facing child seats, this occurs because they are initially sitting
very close to the airbag. For other occupants, this occurs when the
occupant is not properly restrained by safety belts or child safety seats
and they move forward during pre-crash braking. The most effective way
to reduce the risk of unnecessary injuries is to make sure all occupants
are properly restrained. Accident statistics suggest that children are
much safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in
the front.
WARNING: Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active air
bag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move
the seat all the way back.
WARNING: Always transport children 12 years old and under in
the back seat and always properly use appropriate child
restraints.
WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.
The front passenger sensing system can automatically turn off the
passenger front airbag when a rear facing child seat, a forward-facing
child restraint, or a booster seat is detected. Even with this technology,
parents are STRONGLY encouraged to always properly restrain children
in the rear seat. The sensor also turns off the passenger front airbag and
passenger seat-mounted side airbag when the passenger seat is empty.
When the front passenger seat is occupied and the sensing system has
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag, the “pass airbag off” indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal
airbag is off. See Front passenger sensing system in the Airbag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) section of this chapter.
Front safety belt usage sensors
The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and
front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened. This information
allows your Personal Safety System™ to tailor the airbag deployment
and safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage.
Refer to Safety belt usage sensors later in this chapter.
168
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Front outboard safety belt pretensioners
The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are
designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant’s body
during frontal collisions, and in side collisions and rollovers. This helps
increase the effectiveness of the safety belts. In frontal collisions, the
safety belt pretensioners can be activated alone or, if the collision is of
sufficient severity, together with the front airbags.
Front outboard safety belt energy management retractors
The front outboard safety belt energy management retractors allow
webbing to be pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled
manner in response to the occupant’s forward momentum. This helps
reduce the risk of force-related injuries to the occupant’s chest by
limiting the load on the occupant. Refer to Energy management
retractors section in this chapter.
Determining if the Personal Safety System™ is operational
The Personal Safety System™ uses a warning light in the instrument
cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer
to the Warning lights and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster
chapter. Routine maintenance of the Personal Safety System™ is not
required.
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) monitors its own internal circuits
and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints, crash sensor(s),
safety belt pretensioners, front safety belt buckle sensors, and the driver
seat position sensor. In addition, the RCM also monitors the restraints
warning light in the instrument cluster. A difficulty with the system is
indicated by one or more of the following.
• The warning light will either flash or stay lit.
• The warning light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the Personal
Safety System™ serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
169
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Safety restraints precautions
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit
in a rear seating position where they can be properly restrained.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety
belt.
WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific
safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt
on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the
arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.
170
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a
small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child
anywhere near them.
WARNING: Front and rear seat occupants, including pregnant
women, should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an
accident.
Combination lap and shoulder belts
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.
2. To unfasten, push the release
button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.
171
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Regular Cab Center front safety belt
WARNING: Always use both lap and shoulder safety belt in the
Regular Cab center seating position.
If you carry large cargo behind the seat or items that might damage or
soil the belt, detach the belt from the seat:
• Release the mini-buckle by
inserting a key or similar object
into the slot.
If the belt has been disconnected to carry large objects behind the seat,
reconnect it as follows:
• Buckle the small tongue on the
end of the belt into the
mini-buckle on the driver’s side.
The belt is now ready for use.
This mini-buckle should stay
buckled at all times unless
cargo-carrying makes it necessary
to detach the belt.
Safety belt with cinch tongue (Regular Cab center only)
The cinch tongue will slide up and down the belt webbing when the belt
is stowed or while putting safety belts on. When the lap/shoulder safety
belt is buckled, the cinch tongue will allow the lap portion to be
shortened, but pinches the webbing to keep the lap portion from getting
longer. The cinch tongue is designed to slip during a crash, so always
wear the shoulder belt properly and don’t allow any slack in either the
lap or shoulder portions.
Before you can reach and latch a combination lap and shoulder belt
having a cinch tongue into the buckle, you may have to lengthen the lap
belt portion of it.
172
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
1. To lengthen the lap belt, pull
some webbing out of the shoulder
belt retractor.
2. While holding the webbing below
the tongue, grasp the tip (metal
portion) of the tongue so that it is
parallel to the webbing and slide the
tongue upward.
3. Provide enough lap belt length so that the tongue can reach the
buckle.
How to fasten the cinch tongue (Regular Cab center only)
1. Pull the combination lap and shoulder belt from the retractor so that
the shoulder belt portion of the safety belt crosses your shoulder and
chest.
2. Be sure the belt is not twisted. If the belt is twisted, remove the twist.
3. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for your seating position
until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
4. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened to the buckle by pulling on
the tongue.
WARNING: The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible
around the hips, not across the waist.
WARNING: Front and rear seat occupants, including pregnant
women, should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an
accident.
WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific
safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt
on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the
arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
173
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
While you are fastened in the safety belt, the combination lap/shoulder
belt with a cinch tongue adjusts to your movement. However, if you
brake hard, turn hard, or if your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the safety belt will become locked and help reduce
your forward movement.
Lap belts
Adjusting the lap belt
(Front center seat position SuperCab and SuperCrew only)
WARNING: The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible
around the hips, not across the waist.
The front center lap belt tongue is designed to fit only in the correct
buckle. The tongue will not securely latch if you attempt to use it in any
of the outboard seating position buckles. To ensure that you have used
the correct buckle you should hear a snap and feel it latch.
• Front center lap belt
The lap belt does not adjust automatically.
Insert the tongue into the correct
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming
from). To lengthen the belt, turn the
tongue at a right angle to the belt
and pull across your lap until it
reaches the buckle. To tighten the
belt, pull the loose end of the belt
through the tongue until it fits
snugly across the hips.
174
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Shorten and fasten the belt when
not in use.
For long term storage, the lap belt can be placed into a pocket found on
the inside lid of the storage compartment. To store the lap belt, do the
following:
1. Open the storage compartment
lid.
2. Place the lap belt into the pocket
found on the inside lid of the
storage compartment.
3. Fold the center buckle into the
storage compartment.
4. Close the lid.
Before a passenger sits in the front center seat, make sure the lap belt
and buckle are both placed in their in-use position, and no longer
stowed. Always fasten your seat belt when riding in the front center seat.
175
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Energy management retractors
Your vehicle has a safety belt system equipped with energy management
retractors at the driver and front outboard passenger seating positions.
An energy management retractor is a device which pays out webbing in a
controlled manner. This feature is designed to help further reduce the
risk of force-related injuries to the occupant.
Safety belt systems equipped with an energy management retractor must
be replaced if they were in use during a frontal collision which resulted
in deployment of the frontal airbags. Refer to the Safety belt
maintenance section in this chapter.
The front and rear safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap
and shoulder belts. The front passenger outboard and rear outboard seat
safety belts have two types of locking modes described below:
Vehicle sensitive mode
The vehicle sensitive mode is the normal retractor mode, allowing free
shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in
response to vehicle movement. For example, if the driver brakes
suddenly or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will
lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers.
The front outboard safety belts can also be made to lock manually by
quickly pulling on the shoulder belt. Rear safety belts (if equipped) can
also be made to lock up by pulling quickly on the belt.
Automatic locking mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt, or
the Regular Cab center safety belt.
When to use the automatic locking mode
• Anytime a child safety seat is installed in a front outboard passenger
seating position in a Regular Cab/ SuperCab/ SuperCrew or any rear
seating position of a SuperCab or SuperCrew. The Regular Cab front
center seatbelt has a cinch mechanism. Refer to Safety belt with
cinch tongue (Regular Cab center only) earlier in this chapter.
Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a
rear seat whenever possible. Refer to Safety restraints for children
or Safety seats for children later in this chapter.
176
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
How to use the automatic locking mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
• Right front passenger seat
• Rear seats (if equipped)
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and
pull downward until the entire belt
is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
How to disengage the automatic locking mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
177
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: After any vehicle collision, the safety belt systems
at all seating positions (except the driver position, which does
not have this feature) must be checked by an authorized dealer to
verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still
functioning properly. In addition, all safety belts should be checked for
proper function.
WARNING: BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE
REPLACED if the safety belt assembly “automatic locking
retractor” feature or any other safety belt function is not operating
properly when checked by an authorized dealer. Failure to replace the
Belt and Retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in
collisions.
Safety belt pretensioner
Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and
right front passenger seating positions.
The safety belt pretensioner removes some slack from the safety belt
system at the start of a crash. The safety belt pretensioner uses the
same crash sensor system as the front airbags and Safety Canopy威
system. When the safety belt pretensioner deploys, the lap and shoulder
belt are tightened.
When the Safety Canopy威 system and/or the front airbags are activated,
the safety belt pretensioners for the driver and right front passenger
seating positions will be activated when the respective seatbelt is
properly buckled.
WARNING: The driver and the right front passenger safety belt
system (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must
be replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in
deployment of front airbags or Safety Canopy威 and safety belt
pretensioners.
WARNING: Failure to replace the safety belt assembly under
the above conditions could result in severe personal injuries in
the event of a collision.
Refer to the Safety belt maintenance section in this chapter.
178
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Safety belt usage sensors
The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt buckles are
equipped with sensors that detect if the safety belts are fastened. The
sensors provide information to the Personal Safety System威 which can
then adapt the airbag deployment or safety belt pretensioner activation
based upon safety belt usage.
WARNING: The Personal Safety System威 provides the most
benefit to belted occupants. The system monitors and tailors the
air bag deployment based upon safety belt usage. Failure to properly
wear your safety belt will increase your risk of injury.
Front safety belt height adjustment
Your vehicle has safety belt height
adjustments at the front outboard
seating positions. Adjust the height
of the shoulder belt so the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height,
pull on the center button and slide
the height adjuster up or down.
Release the button and pull down
on the height adjuster to make sure
it is locked in place.
WARNING: Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust
the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety
belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime
The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.
179
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Conditions of operation
If...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the indicator
light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...
Then...
The safety belt warning light
illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.
The safety belt warning light and
indicator chime remain off.
Belt-Minder姞
The Belt-Minder威 feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders by
intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning
lamp in the instrument cluster when the driver’s and front passenger’s
safety belt is unbuckled.
The Belt-Minder威 feature uses information from the front passenger
sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and
therefore potentially in need of a warning. To avoid activating the
Belt-Minder威 feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat,
warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined
by the front passenger sensing system.
Both the driver’s and passenger’s safety belt usages are monitored and
either may activate the Belt-Minder威 feature. The warnings are the same
for the driver and the front passenger. If the Belt-Minder威 warnings have
expired (warnings for approximately five minutes) for one occupant
(driver or front passenger), the other occupant can still activate the
Belt-Minder威 feature.
Note: If you are using MyKey™, the Belt-Minder威 warning will not
expire. Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and security chapter.
When the Belt-Minder威 feature is activated, the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime sounds for six seconds every
30 seconds, repeating for approximately five minutes or until the safety
belts are buckled.
180
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The Belt-Minder威 feature uses two different warning chimes. During the
first minute of activation, the warning chime will sound once every
second. The remaining warning chimes will sound twice every second
while the system is activated.
If...
The driver’s and front
passenger’s safety belts are
buckled...
The driver’s or front
passenger’s safety belt is not
buckled when the vehicle has
reached at least 6 mph and
1-2 minutes have elapsed since
the ignition switch has been
turned to ON...
The driver’s or front
passenger’s safety belt becomes
unbuckled for approximately
1 minute while the vehicle is
traveling at least 6 mph and
1-2 minutes have elapsed since
the ignition switch has been
turned to ON...
The Belt-Minder威 feature is
activated and the vehicle speed
is less than 3 mph...
Then...
The Belt-Minder威 feature will not
activate.
The Belt-Minder威 feature is activated
- the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for six seconds every
30 seconds, repeating for
approximately five minutes or until
the safety belts are buckled.
The Belt-Minder威 feature is activated
- the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for six seconds every
30 seconds, repeating for
approximately five minutes or until
the safety belts are buckled.
The Belt-Minder威 feature is
suspended - the safety belt warning
light remains illuminated, but the
warning chime does not sound. This
time does not count towards the
five-minute expiration time.
181
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts:
(All statistics based on U.S. data)
Reasons given...
“Crashes are rare events”
“I’m not going far”
“Belts are uncomfortable”
“I was in a hurry”
“Safety belts don’t work”
“Traffic is light”
“Belts wrinkle my clothes”
“The people I’m with don’t
wear belts”
182
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Consider...
36700 crashes occur every day. The
more we drive, the more we are
exposed to “rare” events, even for
good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be
seriously injured in a crash during
our lifetime.
3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25
miles of home.
We design our safety belts to enhance
comfort. If you are uncomfortable try different positions for the safety
belt upper anchorage and seatback
which should be as upright as
possible; this can improve comfort.
Prime time for an accident.
Belt-Minder威 reminds us to take a few
seconds to buckle up.
Safety belts, when used properly,
reduce risk of death to front seat
occupants by 45% in cars, and by
60% in light trucks.
Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in
single-vehicle crashes, many when
no other vehicles are around.
Possibly, but a serious crash can do
much more than wrinkle your clothes,
particularly if you are unbelted.
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4
times more often in vehicles with
TWO or MORE people. Children and
younger brothers/sisters imitate
behavior they see.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Reasons given...
“I have an airbag”
“I’d rather be thrown clear”
Consider...
Airbags offer greater protection when
used with safety belts. Frontal airbags
are not designed to inflate in rear and
side crashes or rollovers.
Not a good idea. People who are
ejected are 40 times more likely
to DIE. Safety belts help prevent
ejection, WE CAN’T “PICK OUR
CRASH”.
WARNING: Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt or insert a
latchplate into the buckle to avoid the Belt-Minder威 chime. To
do so may adversely affect the performance of the vehicle’s air bag
system.
Deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder姞 feature
The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder威 are
deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating
one seating position, do not buckle the other position as this will
terminate the process.
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the
deactivation/activation programming procedure.
Note: If you are using MyKey™, the Belt-Minder威 cannot be disabled.
Also, if the Belt-Minder威 has been previously disabled, it will be
re-enabled after the use of MyKey™. Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks
and security chapter.
The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder威 features can be
deactivated/activated by performing the following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
• The parking brake is set
• The gearshift is in P (Park)
• The ignition switch is in the off position
• The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled
183
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: While the design allows you to deactivate your
Belt-Minder威, this system is designed to improve your chances of
being safely belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you
leave the Belt-Minder威 system activated for yourself and others who
may use the vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do not
deactivate/activate the Belt-Minder威 feature while driving the vehicle.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the on position. DO NOT START THE
ENGINE.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (Approximately one
minute)
• Step 3 must be completed within 30 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
3. For the seating position being disabled, buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt three times, ending in the unbuckled state.
• After Step 3, the restraint system warning light (airbag light) will be
turned on for three seconds.
4. Within approximately seven seconds of the light turning off, buckle
then unbuckle the safety belt.
• This will disable the Belt-Minder威 feature for that seating position if it
is currently enabled. As confirmation, the restraint system warning
light will flash four times per second for three seconds.
• This will enable the Belt-Minder威 feature for that seating position if it
is currently disabled. As confirmation, the restraint system warning
light will flash four times per second for three seconds, followed by
three seconds with the light off, then followed by the restraint system
warning light flashing four times per second for three seconds again.
Safety belt extension assembly
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is an 8 inch
(20 cm) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number
611C22). This assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
WARNING: Do not use extensions to change the fit of the
shoulder belt across the torso.
184
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
The airbag supplemental restraint system is designed to work in
conjunction with the safety belts to help protect the driver and front
outboard passenger from certain upper body injuries. The term
“supplemental restraint” means the airbags are intended as a supplement
to the safety belts. Airbags alone cannot protect as well as airbags plus
safety belts in impacts for which the airbags are designed to deploy, and
airbags do not offer any protection in crashes for which they do not
deploy.
The airbag supplemental restraint system consists of:
• driver and passenger dual stage airbag modules (which include the
inflators and airbags).
• side airbags and Safety Canopy威. Refer to Seat-mounted side airbag
system and Safety Canopy威 system later in this chapter.
• one or more impact and safing sensors.
• the same indicator light, RCM (restraints control module) and
diagnostic unit used for the Personal safety system.
• Front passenger sensing system
• Passenger airbag off indicator light.
The airbag supplemental restraints are an integral part of the Personal
Safety System. They are designed to be deployed in cases where the
Personal Safety System has determined the occupant conditions and
crash severity are appropriate to activate these devices. Refer to the
Personal Safety System™ section in this chapter.
185
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Important SRS precautions
The SRS is designed to work with
the safety belt to help protect the
driver and right front passenger
from certain upper body injuries.
Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a
deploying airbag.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.
WARNING: The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches
(25 cm) between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag module.
WARNING: Never place your arm over the airbag module as a
deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries.
To properly position yourself away from the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position.
WARNING: Do not put anything on or over the airbag module.
Placing objects on or over the airbag inflation area may cause
those objects to be propelled by the airbag into your face and torso
causing serious injury.
186
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer
protection to an occupant in the center front seating position.
WARNING: Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of
the vehicle (including frame, bumper, front end body structure
and tow hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the
vehicle.
WARNING: Additional equipment may affect the performance of
the airbag sensors increasing the risk of injury.
Children and airbags
For additional important safety
information, read all information on
safety restraints in this guide.
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat
than in the front seat. Failure to
follow these instructions may
increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
WARNING: Airbags can kill
or injure a child in a child
seat. NEVER place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active
airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat all the
way back.
187
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
If two adults and a child occupy a Regular Cab, properly restrain the
child in the center front unless doing so would interfere with driving the
vehicle. This arrangement provides lap and shoulder belt protection for
all occupants, and airbag protection for the adults. All occupants of the
vehicle should always properly wear their safety belts. Ensure the child
is properly restrained in an appropriate child seat or with the use of a
booster. A child or infant properly restrained in the center front seat
should not incur risk of serious injury from the airbags.
How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work?
The airbag SRS is designed to
activate when the vehicle sustains
sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
The fact that the airbags did not
inflate in a collision does not mean
that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the forces
were not of the type sufficient to
cause activation. Airbags are
designed to inflate in frontal and
near-frontal collisions, not rollover,
side-impact, or rear-impacts.
The airbags inflate and deflate
rapidly upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a
smoke-like, powdery residue or
smell the burnt propellant. This may
consist of cornstarch, talcum
powder (to lubricate the bag) or
sodium compounds (e.g., baking
soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the
airbag. Small amounts of sodium
hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but
none of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, it may also
cause minor abrasions, swelling or temporary hearing loss. Because
airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk
of death or serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or
188
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
internal injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly
restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag
deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be properly
restrained as far away from the airbag cover as possible while
maintaining vehicle control.
WARNING: Several airbag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.
WARNING: If the airbag has deployed, the airbag will not
function again and must be replaced immediately. If the
airbag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of
injury in a collision.
Front passenger sensing system
The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208
and is designed to disable (will not inflate) the front passenger’s frontal
airbag under certain conditions.
The front passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of
the front passenger’s seat and safety belt. The sensors are designed to
detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the
front passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or
disabled (will not inflate).
The front passenger sensing system will disable (will not inflate) the
front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• the front passenger seat is unoccupied, or has small/medium objects in
the front seat,
• the system determines that an infant is present in a rear-facing infant
seat that is installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions,
• the system determines that a small child is present in a forward-facing
child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer’s
instructions,
• the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat,
• a front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of
time,
• a child or a small person occupies the front passenger seat.
When the passenger airbag off light is illuminated, the passenger side
airbag may be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag deployment injuries.
189
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The front passenger sensing system
uses a ⬙passenger airbag off⬙ or
⬙pass airbag off⬙ indicator which will
illuminate and stay lit to remind you
that the front passenger frontal
airbag is disabled. The indicator
lamp is located in the center stack
of the instrument panel just above the radio.
Note: The indicator lamp will illuminate for a short period of time when
the ignition is turned to the on position to confirm it is functional.
When the front passenger seat is not occupied (empty seat) or in the
event that the front passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate), the
indicator lamp will be unlit.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable (will not
inflate) the front passenger’s frontal airbag when a rear facing infant
seat, a forward-facing child restraint, or a booster seat is detected.
• When the front passenger sensing system disables (will not inflate)
the front passenger frontal airbag, the indicator lamp will illuminate
and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is
disabled.
• If the child restraint has been installed and the indicator lamp is not
lit, then turn the vehicle off, remove the child restraint from the
vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate)
the front passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a
person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.
• When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the indicator will be unlit and stay unlit.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, but the
⬙passenger airbag off⬙ or ⬙pass airbag off⬙ indicator lamp is lit, it is
possible that the person isn’t sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the
full upright position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,
with the person’s legs comfortably extended.
• Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for
about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person
and enable the passenger’s frontal airbag.
190
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• If the indicator lamp remains lit even after this, the person should be
advised to ride in the rear seat.
Occupant
Pass Airbag Off
Indicator Lamp
Unlit
Lit
Empty seat
Small child in child
safety seat or booster
Small child with safety Lit
belt buckled or
unbuckled
Adult
Unlit
Passenger Airbag
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
WARNING: Even with Advanced Restraints Systems, children
12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it’s
very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated
occupant sits upright, leaning against the seat back, and centered on the
seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting
improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward,
leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of
injury during a crash is greatly increased.
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat
back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system, resulting
in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the floor.
The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objects
placed on the seat cushion. For most objects that are in the front
passenger seat, the passenger airbag will be disabled. Even though the
passenger airbag is disabled, the ⬙pass airbag off⬙ lamp may or may not
be illuminated according to the table below.
191
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Objects
Pass Airbag Off
Indicator Lamp
Unlit
Small (i.e. three-ring
binder, small purse,
bottled water)
Medium (i.e. heavy
Lit
briefcase, fully packed
luggage)
Empty seat, or small
Lit
to medium object with
safety belt buckled
Passenger Airbag
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
In case there is a problem with the
front passenger sensing system, the
airbag readiness lamp in the
instrument cluster will stay lit.
DO NOT attempt to repair or service the system; take your vehicle
immediately to an authorized dealer.
WARNING: The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer
protection to an occupant in the center seating position.
WARNING: An out of position front center occupant could
affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to
accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer
Assistance section of this Owner’s Guide.
WARNING: Any alteration/modification to the front passenger
seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing
system.
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses readiness lights in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to Airbag readiness in the
Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the airbag is not
required.
192
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness lights will either
flash or stay lit.
• The readiness lights will not
illuminate immediately after
ignition is turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not
function properly in the event of a collision.
Seat-mounted side airbag system
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or
near the airbag cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front
seats or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of a collision.
WARNING: Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of
accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side
airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident.
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag
could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
airbag SRS, its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an
airbag. See an authorized dealer.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle should always wear
their safety belts even when an airbag SRS is provided.
193
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
How does the side airbag system work?
The design and development of the
side airbag system included
recommended testing procedures
that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as
the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of
side airbags.
The side airbag system consists of
the following:
• An inflatable nylon bag (airbag) with a gas generator concealed behind
the outboard bolster of the driver and front passenger seatbacks.
• A special seat cover designed to allow airbag deployment.
• The same warning light, electronic control and diagnostic unit as used
for the front airbags.
• Crash sensors located on the front doors.
• One crash sensor located on each side of the b-pillar, (SuperCab only).
• One crash sensor located on each side of the c-pillar, (SuperCrew
only).
Side airbags, in combination with safety belts, can help reduce the risk of
severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision.
The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the
front seats. In certain lateral collisions, the airbag on the side affected by
the collision will be inflated. The airbag was designed to inflate between
the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided
occupants in side impact collisions.
The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral
deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit
that initiates airbag inflation.
The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that
something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were
not of the type sufficient to cause activation. Side airbags are designed
to inflate in side-impact collisions, not roll-over, rear-impact, frontal or
near-frontal collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient lateral
deceleration.
194
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Several airbag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.
WARNING: If the side
airbag has deployed, the
airbag will not function again.
The side airbag system
(including the seat) must be
inspected and serviced by an
authorized dealer. If the airbag
is not replaced, the unrepaired
area will increase the risk of injury
in a collision.
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to Airbag readiness in the
Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the side airbag is
not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light (same light as for front airbag system) will either
flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at your authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may
not function properly in the event of a collision.
195
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Safety Canopy姞 System
WARNING: Do not place
objects or mount equipment
on or near the headliner at the
siderail that may come into
contact with a deploying Safety
Canopy威. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk
of personal injury in the event of a
collision.
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The Safety
Canopy威 could injure you as it deploys from the headliner.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
Safety Canopy威 System, its fuses, the A, B, or C pillar trim, or
the headliner on a vehicle containing a Safety Canopy威. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle including the driver
should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag SRS
and Safety Canopy威 System is provided.
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct or place
objects in the deployment path of the inflatable Safety Canopy威.
196
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
How does the Safety Canopy姞 system work?
The design and development of the
Safety Canopy威 system included
recommended testing procedures
that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as
the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of
side airbags (including the Safety
Canopy威).
The Safety Canopy威 system consists
of the following:
• An inflatable nylon curtain with a
gas generator concealed behind
the headliner and in the corner or
C pillar behind the doors.
• A headliner designed to flex open
above the side doors to allow Safety Canopy威 deployment.
• The same warning light, electronic control and diagnostic unit as used
for the front airbags.
• Two crash sensors located on the C-pillar (one on each side)
(SuperCab and SuperCrew only).
• Crash sensors located on the front doors.
• Rollover sensor in the restraints control module (RCM).
The Safety Canopy威 system, in combination with safety belts, can help
reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact
collision or rollover event.
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in
the second row seats. The Safety Canopy威 will not interfere with
children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat
because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the
doors along the side window opening.
The Safety Canopy威 system is designed to active when the vehicle
sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the RCM to initiate Safety
Canopy威 inflation or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is
detected by the rollover sensor.
197
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The Safety Canopy威 is mounted to roof side-rail sheet metal, behind the
headliner, above each row of seats. The Safety Canopy威 is designed to
inflate between the side window area and occupants to further enhance
protection provided in side impact collisions and rollover events.
The fact that the Safety Canopy威 did not activate in a collision does not
mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the
forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation. The Safety
Canopy威 is designed to inflate in certain side impact collisions or rollover
events, not in rear impact, frontal or near-frontal collisions, unless the
collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration or rollover likelihood.
WARNING: Several Safety
Canopy威 system
components get hot after inflation.
Do not touch them after inflation.
WARNING: If the Safety Canopy威 system has deployed, the
Safety Canopy威 will not function again unless replaced. The
Safety Canopy威 system (including the A, B, C, and D pillar trim and
headliner) must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer. If
the Safety Canopy威 is not replaced, it will not function again, which
will increase the risk of injury in a future collision.
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to Airbag readiness in the
Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the side airbag is
not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light (same light as for front airbag system) will either
flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
198
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at your authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may
not function properly in the event of a collision.
SOS Post-Crash Alert System™
The system automatically flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the
horn three times at four second intervals in the event of a serious impact
that deploys an airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety Canopy威) or
the safety belt pretensioners.
The system can be turned off when any one of the following actions are
taken by the driver or any other person:
• pressing the hazard control button,
• or pressing the panic button on the remote entry transmitter.
The feature will continue to operate until the vehicle runs out of power.
Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles
(including pretensioners)
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Airbags MUST BE
disposed of by qualified personnel.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children. Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags.
Important child restraint precautions
WARNING: Always make sure your child is secured properly in
a device that is appropriate for their height, age and weight.
Child safety restraints must be purchased separately from the vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to your child.
199
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: All children are shaped differently. The
Recommendations for Safety Restraints are based on probable
child height, age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety
organizations or are the minimum requirements of law. Ford
recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician (CPST) and consult your pediatrician to make sure your
child seat is appropriate for your child, and is compatible with and
properly installed in the vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station
and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the
internet at http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check with your local
St. John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further
information, contact your provincial ministry of transportation, your
local St. John Ambulance office at http://www.sfa.ca, or Transport
Canada at 1–800–333–0371 (http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to properly
restrain children in safety seats made especially for their height, age,
and weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to
your child.
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended
Child size, height, weight, or age
restraint type
Infants or Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less Use a child safety
toddlers
(generally age four or younger)
seat (sometimes
called an infant
carrier,
convertible seat,
or toddler seat).
Small
Children who have outgrown or no
Use a
belt-positioning
children
longer properly fit in a child safety
seat (generally children who are less
booster seat.
than 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall,
are greater than age four (4) and less
than age twelve (12), and between
40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and
upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by your child restraint
manufacturer)
200
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended
Child size, height, weight, or age
restraint type
Larger
Children who have outgrown or no
Use a vehicle
children
longer properly fit in a belt-positioning safety belt having
booster seat (generally children who
the lap belt snug
and low across
are at least 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall or greater than 80 lb the hips, shoulder
belt centered
(36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by child restraint
across the
manufacturer)
shoulder and
chest, and
seatback upright.
• You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and
toddlers in the U.S. and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that small children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 ft 9 in
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your local and state or
provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of
children in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly restrain children twelve (12) years of
age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. Accident
statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seating positions than in a front seating position.
201
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
Restraint
Type
Rear
facing
child seat
Forward
facing
child seat
Forward
facing
child seat
Use any attachment method as indicated
below by “X”
LATCH LATCH Safety Safety
Safety
(lower (lower
belt
belt and belt
Child anchors anchors and
LATCH
only
Weight and
only)
top
(lower
top
tether anchors
tether
anchor and top
anchor)
tether
anchor)
Up to
48 lb
X
X
(21 kg)
Up to
48 lb
X
X
X
(21 kg)
Over
48 lb
X
X
(21 kg)
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
vehicle seat all the way back. When possible, all children age 12 and
under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. If all
children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating
position, properly restrain the largest child in the front seat.
202
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Always carefully follow the instructions and
warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to
determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child’s size,
height, weight, or age. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by the vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child’s height, age, or weight or does not
properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision, which may result in serious injury or
death.
WARNING: Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child.
They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or
death in a collision.
WARNING: Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster
seat. These objects may become projectiles in a collision or
sudden stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury.
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a collision.
WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets
unattended in your vehicle.
Transporting children
Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is
appropriate for their age, height and weight. All children are shaped
differently. The child height, age and weight thresholds provided are
recommendations or the minimum requirements of law. The National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) provides education and
203
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
training to ensure that all children ages 0 to 16 are properly restrained in
the correct restraint system. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and your
pediatrician to make sure your seat is appropriate for your child and
properly installed in the vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station and
CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the internet
at http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check with your local St. John
Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further information,
contact your provincial ministry of transportation, your local St. John
Ambulance office at http://www.sfa.ca, or Transport Canada at
1–800–333–0371 (http://www.tc.gc.ca).
Follow all the safety restraint and airbag precautions that apply to adult
passengers in your vehicle.
If the child is the proper height, age, and weight (as specified by your
child safety seat or booster manufacturer), fits the restraint and can be
restrained properly, then restrain the child in the child safety seat or
with the belt-positioning booster. Remember that child seats and
belt-positioning boosters vary and may be designed to fit children of
different heights, ages and weights. Children who are too large for child
safety seats or belt-positioning boosters (as specified by your child safety
seat manufacturer) should always properly wear safety belts.
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN
Infant and/or toddler seats
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
When installing a child safety seat:
• Review and follow the information
presented in the Airbag
supplemental restraint system
(SRS) section in this chapter.
• Carefully follow all of the
manufacturer’s instructions
included with the safety seat you
put in your vehicle. If you do not
install and use the safety seat
properly, the child may be injured
in a sudden stop or collision.
204
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the vehicle seat all the
way back.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If all children cannot be seated and
restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the
largest child in the front seat.
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder
belts
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If all children cannot be seated and
restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the
largest child in the front seat.
When installing a child safety seat with combination lap/shoulder belts:
• Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap
and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the
buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,
to help prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place vehicle seat back in upright position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to step 5
below. This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip.
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint,
and depending on the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and/or LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able
to be properly restrained.
205
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
If you are using a Regular Cab center seat, see Installing child safety
seats in cinch tongue combination lap and shoulder belt seating
position later in this chapter for instructions.
Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with
combination lap/shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat,
the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat.
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.
206
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.
5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
pulled out and a click is heard.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The belt will click as it
retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5
and 6.
207
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
8. Remove remaining slack from the
belt. Force the seat down with extra
weight, e.g., by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in
order to force slack from the belt.
This is necessary to remove the
remaining slack that will exist once
the additional weight of the child is
added to the child restraint. It also
helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child seat to the
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
towards the buckle will additionally
help to remove remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat is equipped). Refer to
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter.
10. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place. To check
this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side
and forward and back. There should
be no more than one inch (2.5 cm)
of movement for proper installation.
11. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger
Safety Technician (CPST) to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed.
Installing child safety seats in cinch tongue combination lap and
shoulder belt seating position (Front center seating position only)
If you are using a regular cab center seat, see Center front safety belt
(Regular Cab center seating position only) under Combination lap
and shoulder belts earlier in this chapter for instructions on attaching
the mini-buckle.
The belt webbing below the tongue is the lap portion of the combination
lap/shoulder belt, and the belt webbing above the tongue is the shoulder
belt portion of the combination lap/shoulder belt.
208
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Always use both lap and shoulder safety belt in the
Regular Cab center seating position.
1. Position the child safety seat in
the Regular Cab center front seat.
2. If the center lap/shoulder safety
belt has been disconnected from the
seat to carry large cargo behind the
seat, reconnect it by buckling the
small buckle on the end of the belt
into the mini-buckle on the driver’s
side.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. If
you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move
seat all the way back.
WARNING: Rear facing child seats should NEVER be placed in
front of an active airbag.
209
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
3. Slide the tongue up the webbing.
4. While holding both shoulder and
lap portions next to the tongue,
route the tongue and webbing
through the child seat according to
the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions. Be sure that the belt
webbing is not twisted.
5. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.
210
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
6. While pushing down with your
knee on the child seat pull up on
the shoulder belt portion to tighten
the lap belt portion of the
combination lap and shoulder belt.
7. Allow the safety belt to retract and remove any slack in the belt to
securely tighten the child safety seat in the vehicle.
8. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat is equipped). Refer to
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter.
9. Before placing the child into the
child seat, forcibly pull the child
seat forward and back to make sure
that the seat is held securely in
place. To check this, grab the seat
at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than
one inch (2.5 cm) of movement for
proper installation.
10. Check from time to time to be sure that there is no slack in the
lap/shoulder belt. The shoulder belt must be snug to keep the lap belt
tight during a collision.
11. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger
Safety Technician (CPST) to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with your local St. John Ambulance office for
referral to a CPST.
Installing child safety seats in the front row lap belt seating
positions (SuperCab and SuperCrew)
WARNING: Installing a child safety seat in the front row lap
seating position should be avoided if at all possible. The
passenger sensing system does not recognize child seats in the front
center seating position.
211
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Never place a rear-facing child seat in the front
center seating position of a vehicle with rear seating positions.
1. Lengthen the lap belt. To lengthen the belt, hold the tongue so that its
bottom is perpendicular to the direction of webbing while sliding the
tongue up the webbing.
2. Place the child safety seat in the center seating position.
3. Route the tongue and webbing through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for the center seating
position until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened to the buckle by pulling on the tongue.
5. Push down on the child seat while pulling on the loose end of the lap
belt webbing to tighten the belt.
6. Before placing the child into the child seat, forcibly tilt the child seat
from side to side and in forward direction to make sure that the seat is
securely held in place. To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and
attempt to move it side to side and forward and back. There should be
no more than one inch (2.5 cm) of movement for proper installation.
7. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger
Safety Technician (CPST) to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with your local St. John Ambulance office for
referral to a CPST.
Attaching child safety seats with LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) attachments
The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points: two (2)
lower anchors located where the vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet
(called the “seat bight”) and one (1) top tether anchor located behind
that seating position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH
equipped seating positions in your vehicle. This type of attachment
method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat,
however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat if the
lower anchors are not used. For forward-facing child seats, the top tether
strap must also be attached to the proper top tether anchor, if a top
tether strap has been provided with your child seat. See Attaching child
safety seats with tether straps in this chapter for more information.
212
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with LATCH lower anchors for child seat
installation at the following seating positions (LATCH is not available on
F150 Regular cab) :
• F150 SuperCab and SuperCrew
The LATCH anchors are located at
the rear section of the rear seat
between the cushion and seatback.
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions to properly install a
child seat with LATCH attachments.
Follow the instructions later in this chapter on attaching child safety
seats with tether straps.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors
shown.
WARNING: Never attach two child safety seats to the same
anchor. In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold
two child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious
injury or death.
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint,
and depending on the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and/or LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able
to be properly restrained.
213
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Use of inboard lower anchors from the outboard seating positions
(center seating use)
The lower anchors at the center of the second row rear seat are spaced
652 mm (25.7 inches) apart. The standardized spacing for LATCH lower
anchors is 280 mm (11 inches) center to center. A child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments cannot be installed at the center seating position.
LATCH compatible child seats (with attachments on belt webbing) can
only be used at this seating position provided that the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions permit use with the anchor spacing stated.
Do not attach a child seat to any lower anchor if an adjacent child seat is
attached to that anchor.
WARNING: The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors
is 280 mm (11 inches) center to center. Do not use LATCH
lower anchors for the center seating position unless the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced at
least as far apart as those in this vehicle.
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten
the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion
when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without
lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just touching the
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly
attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug the
child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to
the vehicle. The seat should move less than one inch when you do this
for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a crash greatly increases.
Combining safety belt and LATCH lower anchors for attaching
child safety seats
When used in combination, either the safety belt or the LATCH lower
anchors may be attached first, provided a proper installation is achieved.
Attach the tether strap afterward, if included with the child seat. Refer
to Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
in this chapter.
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps
Many forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which
extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring
214
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
point called the top tether anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats. Contact the manufacturer of your
child seat for information about ordering a tether strap, or to obtain a
longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach
the appropriate top tether anchor in the vehicle.
The passenger seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether
strap anchors located behind the seats as described below.
The tether anchors in your vehicle may be loops of webbing above the
seatback or an anchor bracket behind the seat on the rear edge of the
seat cushion.
The rear seat in the SuperCab and SuperCrew has three straps along the
top of the seatback that function as both routing loops for the tether
straps and anchor loops.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view):
• F150 Regular Cab
• F150 SuperCrew and SuperCab
Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown.
The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other
than the correct tether anchor.
Once the child safety seat has been installed using either the safety belt,
the lower anchors of the LATCH system, or both, you can attach the top
tether strap.
215
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Front seat tether strap attachment
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat and
under the head restraint.
For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the head restraint posts, otherwise route
the tether strap over the top of the seatback.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position.
• You may need to pull the seatback forward to access the tether
anchors. Make sure the seatback is locked in the upright position
before installing the child seat.
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown.
• Regular Cab passenger and center
seats (located on back panel)
If the tether strap is clipped
incorrectly, the child safety seat may
not be retained properly in the
event of a collision.
4. Tighten the child safety seat
tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored
properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a collision greatly
increases.
216
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Rear seat tether strap attachment
There are three loops of webbing
just above the back of the rear seat
(along the bottom edge of the rear
window) in the SuperCab and
SuperCrew. These loops are to be
used as both routing loops and
anchor loops for up to three child
safety seat tether straps. For
example, the center loop can be
used as a routing loop for a child
safety seat in the center rear seat
and as an anchoring loop for child seats installed in the outboard rear
seats.
Many tether straps cannot be tightened if the tether strap is hooked to
the loop directly behind the child seat. To provide a tight tether strap:
1. Route the tether strap under the
head restraint and through the loop
directly behind the child seat.
2. Route the tether strap behind the
head restraint supports to a loop
behind an adjacent seating position,
and hook the strap hook onto the
loop. If using the driver’s side, pass
the strap behind the shoulder belt
mounting for the center seat.
• Always put the tether strap
through the routing loop. The
head restraint support post will
hold the child seat tightly, but the head restraint post is not strong
enough to hold the child seat during a collision.
217
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
3. Tighten the tether strap
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a collision greatly increases.
If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap, and the
child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, Ford also recommends
its use.
Child booster seats
The belt-positioning booster (booster seat) is used to improve the fit of
the vehicle safety belt. Children outgrow a typical child seat (e.g.,
convertible or toddler seat) when they weigh about 40 lb (18 kg) and are
around four (4) years of age. Consult your child safety seat owner guide
for the weight, height, and age limits specific to your child safety seat.
Keep your child in the child safety seat if it properly fits the child,
remains appropriate for their weight, height and age AND if properly
secured to the vehicle.
Although the lap/shoulder belt will provide some protection, children
who have outgrown a typical child seat are still too small for lap/shoulder
belts to fit properly, and wearing an improperly fitted vehicle safety belt
could increase the risk of serious injury in a crash. To improve the fit of
both the lap and shoulder belt on children who have outgrown child
safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use of a belt-positioning
booster.
Booster seats position a child so that vehicle lap/shoulder safety belts fit
better. They lift the child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips
and the knees bend comfortably at the edge of the cushion, while
minimizing slouching. Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit
better and more comfortably. Try to keep the belt near the middle of the
shoulder and across the center of the chest. Moving the child closer (a
few centimeters or inches) to the center of the vehicle, but remaining in
the same seating position, may help provide a good shoulder belt fit.
218
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
When children should use booster seats
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they reach a
height of at least 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall (around age eight to
age twelve and between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) or upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer).
Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions when seated without a booster seat:
• Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without
slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Types of booster seats
There are generally two types of belt-positioning booster seats: backless
and high back. Always use booster seats in conjunction with the vehicle
lap/shoulder belt.
• Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the
shield. If a vehicle seating position
has a low seat back or no head
restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child’s head (as
measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this
case, move the backless booster
to another seating position with a
higher seat back or head restraint and lap/shoulder belts, or consider
using a high back booster seat.
219
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat,
you cannot find a seating position
that adequately supports your
child’s head, a high back booster
seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and shape. Choose a booster that
keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across the
stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and
rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The drawings below compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck
and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder. The drawings below
also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child’s
hips.
220
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition. Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster
seat. Check with the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.
The importance of shoulder belts
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is generally best to use a
booster seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat.
Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt does not
stay positioned on the shoulder during use.
Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat.
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a collision.
Child restraint and safety belt maintenance
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically
to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the
vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks, tears
or cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including
retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle support
assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if
equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if equipped), child safety
seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should be
inspected after a collision. Refer to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint. Ford Motor Company recommends that all
safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision be
replaced. However, if the collision was minor and an authorized dealer
finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate
properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in
use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
For proper care of soiled safety belts, refer to Interior in the Cleaning
chapter.
221
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the
safety belt assembly or child restraint system under the above
conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a
collision.
222
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
NOTICE TO UTILITY VEHICLE AND TRUCK OWNERS
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in
the various driving conditions that
are encountered on streets,
highways and off-road. Utility
vehicles and trucks are not designed
for cornering at speeds as high as
passenger cars any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed
to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions.
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must:
• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers;
• Drive at safe speeds for the conditions;
• Keep tires properly inflated;
• Never overload or improperly load your vehicle; and
• Make sure every passenger is properly restrained.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
All occupants must wear seat belts and children/infants must use
appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury or ejection.
Study your owner’s guide and any supplements for specific information
about equipment features, instructions for safe driving and additional
precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury.
VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS
4WD and AWD Systems (if equipped)
A vehicle equipped with AWD or 4WD (when selected) has the ability to
use all four wheels to power itself. This increases traction which may
enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a
conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
223
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case or power
transfer unit. 4WD vehicles allow you to select different drive modes as
necessary. Information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures
can be found in the Driving chapter. Information on transfer case
maintenance can be found in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. You should become thoroughly familiar with this information
before you operate your vehicle.
On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4WD
while the vehicle is moving can cause a momentary clunk and ratcheting
sound. These sounds are normal as the front drivetrain comes up to
speed and is not cause for concern.
WARNING: Do not become overconfident in the ability of 4WD
and AWD vehicles. Although a 4WD or AWD vehicle may
accelerate better than two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction
situations, it won’t stop any faster than two-wheel drive vehicles.
Always drive at a safe speed.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
SUV and trucks can differ from
some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may
be:
• Higher – to allow higher load
carrying capacity and to allow it
to travel over rough terrain
without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.
• Shorter – to give it the capability
to approach inclines and drive
over the crest of a hill without
getting hung up or damaging
underbody components. All other
things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer
wheelbase.
224
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Narrower — to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, SUV’s and trucks often
will have a higher center of gravity
and a greater difference in center of
gravity between the loaded and
unloaded condition.
These differences that make your
vehicle so versatile also make it
handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or
temporary use spare tires, light truck or “LT” type tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as
defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you
the following information about tire grades exactly as the government
has written it.
225
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
WARNING: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A B C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established
for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
226
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
TIRES
Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they
must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.
Glossary of tire terminology
• Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
the tire’s load carrying capability.
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
• Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).
• Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
• B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
227
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the
others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if
required.
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check
the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate
all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company.
You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic
service station gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a
digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire
failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation
or ⬙blowout⬙, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk
of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It
also may result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of
vehicle control and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air
pressure and not appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer’s
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure
which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
228
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the
recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop
of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pressing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T-type/mini-spare tires (see the Dissimilar spare
tire/wheel information section for description): Store and maintain at
60 psi (4.15 bar). For Full Size and Dissimilar spare tires (see the
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information section for description): Store
and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as
shown on the Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
229
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
TIRE CARE
Inspecting your tires and wheel valve stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check the tire and valve stems for holes, cracks, or cuts
that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace
the valve stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises and
other signs of damage or excessive wear. If internal damage to the tire is
suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be
repaired or replaced. For your safety, tires that are damaged or show
signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely
to blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:
Tire wear
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or “wear bars”, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will appear
on the tire when the tread is worn
down to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down to
the same height as these “wear bars”, the tire is worn out and must be
replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as
bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected
have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also
recommended.
230
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
WARNING: Age
Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as
weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed,
inflation pressure, etc.) the tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread
wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it has not been used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size
code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After
2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for
traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
Tire replacement requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
231
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the
same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric
versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found
on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this
information is not found on these labels then you should contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your
vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally the use
of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering,
suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure. If you
have questions regarding tire replacement, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: When mounting replacement tires and wheels, you
should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the
sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions
listed below. If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure
indicated, re-lubricate and try again.
When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar)
greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire:
1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft. (3.66 m) away from the tire wheel
assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford Dealer or other tire service professional
should do the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person
inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft. (3.66 m) away from the tire
wheel assembly.
Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.
232
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed on
your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company
may affect the operation of your Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
If the TPMS indicator is flashing, your TPMS is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS, or some
component of the TPMS may be damaged.
Safety practices
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
• Avoid potholes and objects on the road
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking
WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do
not rapidly spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and
cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five
seconds.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Highway hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
233
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Tire and wheel alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be
out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles and those with an independent rear
suspension (if equipped) may require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
Tire rotation
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
scheduled maintenance information that comes with your vehicle) will
help your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and
longer tire life.
• Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)
vehicles/Four Wheel Drive
(4WD)/ All Wheel Drive (AWD)
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram)
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
234
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check
for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical
problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, check tire pressure and adjust to
the recommended inflation pressure.
Note: The TPMS reset tool is ONLY provided for vehicles with different
front and rear tire pressures. The TPMS reset procedure needs to be
performed after tire rotation only on these vehicles.
WARNING: If the tire label shows different tire pressures for
the front and rear tires and the vehicle is equipped with TPMS
(tire pressure monitoring system), then the settings for the TPMS
sensors need to be updated. Always perform the TPMS reset procedure
after tire rotation. If the system is not reset, it may not provide a low
tire pressure warning when necessary. See the TPMS reset procedure
in this chapter.
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
235
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Information on “P” type tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
1. P: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that may be used for
service on cars, SUVs, minivans and
light trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not
begin with a letter this may mean it
is designated by either ETRTO
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association).
2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
Owner’s Guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
236
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating
Speed rating - mph (km/h)
M
81 mph (130 km/h)
N
87 mph (140 km/h)
Q
99 mph (159 km/h)
R
106 mph (171 km/h)
S
112 mph (180 km/h)
T
118 mph (190 km/h)
U
124 mph (200 km/h)
H
130 mph (210 km/h)
V
149 mph (240 km/h)
W
168 mph (270 km/h)
Y
186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the
letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety Compliance
Certification Label, which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
237
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than
the recommended pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
238
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type
tires
“LT” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below.
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended for service
on light trucks.
2. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
3. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual; defined
as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
4. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
239
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Information on “T” type tires
“T” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades do
not apply to this type of tire.
1. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association (T&RA), that is
intended for temporary service on
cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
2. 145: Indicates the nominal width
of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general,
the larger the number, the wider the tire.
3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the tire label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in the
Vehicle loading — with and without a trailer section.
240
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (IF EQUIPPED)
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
241
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is NOT a
substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure
should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge,
see Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain
your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control,
vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Changing tires with TPMS
Each road tire is equipped with
a tire pressure sensor located
inside the tire/wheel cavity. The
pressure sensor is attached to
the valve stem. The pressure
sensor is covered by the tire and
is not visible unless the tire is
removed. Care must be taken
when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor. It is
recommended that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized
dealer.
The tire pressure should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using
an accurate tire gauge, refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter.
242
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System measures pressure in your four
road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The Low
Tire Warning Lamp will turn ON if the tire pressure is significantly low.
Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under inflated and need to be
inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire pressure. Even if the
light turns ON and a short time later turns OFF, your tire pressure still
needs to be checked. Visit www.checkmytires.org for additional
information.
When your temporary spare tire is installed
When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary
spare, the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you
that the damaged road wheel/tire needs to be repaired and put back on
your vehicle.
To restore the full functionality of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System,
have the damaged road wheel/tire repaired and remounted on your
vehicle. For additional information, refer to Changing tires with TPMS
in this section.
243
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
When you believe your system is not operating properly
The main function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is to warn you
when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is no
longer capable of functioning as intended. Please refer to the following
chart for information concerning your Tire Pressure Monitoring System:
Low Tire
Pressure
Warning Light
Solid Warning
Light
Possible
cause
Tire(s)
under-inflated
Customer Action Required
1. Check your tire pressure to
ensure tires are properly inflated;
refer to Inflating your tires in
this chapter.
2. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended
inflation pressure as shown on the
Tire Label (located on the edge of
driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the
vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph
(32 km/h) before the light will
turn OFF.
Spare tire in
Your temporary spare tire is in
use
use. Repair the damaged road
wheel/tire and reinstall it on the
vehicle to restore system
functionality. For a description on
how the system functions, refer to
When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
TPMS
If your tires are properly inflated
malfunction
and your spare tire is not in use
and the light remains ON, have the
system inspected by your
authorized dealer.
Tire rotation
On vehicles with different front
without sensor and rear tire pressures, the TPMS
training
system must be retrained following
every tire rotation. Refer to Tire
rotation in this chapter.
244
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Low Tire
Pressure
Warning Light
Flashing Warning
Light
Possible
cause
Customer Action Required
Spare tire in
use
Your temporary spare tire is in
use. Repair the damaged road
wheel and re-mount it on the
vehicle to restore system
functionality. For a description of
how the system functions under
these conditions, refer to When
your temporary spare tire is
installed in this section.
If your tires are properly inflated
and your spare tire is not in use
and the TPMS warning light still
flashes, have the system inspected
by your authorized dealer.
TPMS
malfunction
When inflating your tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your
garage), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the
light to turn OFF after you have filled your tires to the recommended
inflation pressure.
How temperature affects your tire pressure
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) monitors tire pressure in
each pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical
passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi
(14 to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary
over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi
(20.7 kPa) for a drop of 30° F (16.6°C) in ambient temperature. This
lower pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly
lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS
warning for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light is
ON, visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. (If one or more
tires are flat, repair as necessary.) Check air pressure in the road tires. If
any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest
location where air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
245
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
TPMS reset procedure
The TPMS reset procedure needs to be performed after each tire
rotation on vehicles that require different recommended tire
pressures in the front tires as compared to the rear tires.
WARNING: To determine the required pressure(s) for your
vehicle – refer to the Safety Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. See
Vehicle Loading in this chapter for more information.
Overview
To provide the vehicle’s load carrying capability, some vehicles require
different recommended tire pressures in the front tires as compared to
the rear tires. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) equipped on
these vehicles is designed to illuminate the Low Tire Pressure Warning
indicator at two different pressures; one for the front tires and one for
the rear tires.
Since tires need to be rotated to provide consistent performance and
maximum tire life, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System needs to know
when the tires are rotated to determine which set of tires are on the
front and which are on the rear. With this information, the system can
detect and properly warn of low tire pressures.
TPMS reset tips:
• To reduce the chances of interference from another vehicle, the TPMS
reset procedure should be performed at least 3 feet (1 meter) away
from another Ford Motor Company vehicle undergoing the TPMS reset
procedure at the same time.
• Do not wait more than two (2) minutes between resetting each tire
sensor or the system will timeout and the entire procedure will have
to be repeated on all four wheels.
• A double horn chirp indicates the need to repeat the procedure.
Performing the TPMS reset procedure
It is recommended that you read the entire procedure before attempting.
1. Drive the vehicle above 20 mph (32 km/h) for at least 2 minutes and
then park in a safe location where you can easily get to all four tires and
have access to an air pump.
2. Place the ignition in the off position and keep the key in the ignition.
246
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
3. Cycle the ignition to the on
position with the engine off.
4. Turn the hazard flashers on then
off 3 times. This must be
accomplished within ten seconds.
If the reset mode has been entered successfully, the horn will sound
will flash and the message center (if
once, the TPMS indicator
equipped) will display TRAIN LEFT FRONT TIRE. If this does not
occur, please try again starting at step 2.
If after repeated attempts to enter the reset mode, the horn does not
sound, the TPMS indicator
does not flash and the message center (if
equipped) does not display TRAIN LEFT FRONT TIRE, seek service
from your authorized dealer.
5. Train the TPMS sensors in the tires using the following TPMS reset
sequence starting with the left front tire in the following clockwise
order:
• Left front (Driver’s side front tire)
• Right front (Passenger’s side front tire)
• Right rear (Passenger’s side rear tire)
• Left rear (Driver’s side rear tire)
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the left front tire.
Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
Note: The single horn chirp confirms that the sensor identification code
has been learned by the module for this position. If a double horn is
heard, the reset procedure was unsuccessful, and must be repeated.
7. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the right front tire.
Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
247
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
8. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the right rear tire.
Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
9. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the left rear tire.
Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
Training is complete after the horn sounds for the last tire trained
(driver’s side rear tire), the TPMS tell tale stops flashing, and the
message center (if equipped) displays:
TRAINING COMPLETE.
10. Turn the ignition off. If two short horn beeps are heard, the reset
procedure was unsuccessful and must be repeated.
If after repeating the procedure and two short beeps are heard when the
ignition is turned to off, seek assistance from your authorized dealer.
11. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure as indicated on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. See Vehicle Loading in this
chapter for more information.
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS
WARNING: Snow tires must be the same size, load index, speed
rating as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or
wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
Additionally, the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could
cause steering, suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit
failure.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and chains. If you need to use chains, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and specifications) be used, as chains may chip
aluminum wheels.
Note: Do not place chains on the following tires sizes: P265/60R18,
P275/65R18, LT275/70R17, LT275/65R18, LT315/70R17, P275/55R20, and
P275/45R22.
248
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:
• Use only SAE Class S chains.
• Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your
vehicle, stop and re-tighten the chains. If this does not work, remove
the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.
• If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
• Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use
tire chains on dry roads.
• The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when
using snow tires and chains.
VEHICLE LOADING – WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s
Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket
equipment.
249
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door
(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for
maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket
or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the
vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the
payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.
WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should
carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle,
do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.
250
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Example only:
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
251
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The total
load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in
this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label located on the B-Pillar or the
edge of the driver’s door. The GVW must never exceed the GVWR.
252
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Example only:
WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label
vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle
handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural
damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal
injury.
253
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at
GVWR, not at GCWR.) Separate functional brakes should be used for
safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle.
The GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth wheel
trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult your authorized
dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer) for more detailed information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight – refers to the amount
of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5,000 lb. (2,268 kg) conventional trailer, multiply 5,000
by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 lb.
(227 to 340 kg). For an 11,500 lb. (5,216 kg) fifth wheel trailer, multiply
by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1,725 to
2,875 lb. (782 to 1,304 kg)
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load
carrying capacities than the original tires because they may
lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires
with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR
and GAWR limitations.
254
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could
result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lb.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lb. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (1400-750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lb.). In metric units (635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
• Another example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and
four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh
approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1400 (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and
your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (5 x
99 kg) - (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
• A final example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up
cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio
you have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for
12-100 lb. (45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity
255
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
to transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) - (12
x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240 lb. No, you do not have enough
cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the
calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 540 = -103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least
240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then
the load calculation would be:
1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (9 x
45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label found on the edge of the driver’s door.
Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and
utility-type vehicles
WARNING: For important information regarding safe operation
of this type of vehicle, see the Preparing to drive your vehicle
section in the Driving chapter of this Owner’s Guide.
WARNING: Loaded vehicles may handle differently than
unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance, should be taken when driving a heavily
loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars.
Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling cargo and
people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
Your vehicle may tow a class I, II, III or IV trailer provided the maximum
trailer weight is less than or equal to the maximum trailer weight listed
for your engine and rear axle ratio on the following charts.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a heavy-duty trailer towing package,
the maximum weight your vehicle can tow is limited to 5,000 lb.
(2,268 kg)
256
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Your vehicle’s load capacity is designated by weight, not by volume, so
you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle.
Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle’s engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these
components carefully periodically during, and after any towing operation.
Exceeding the maximum GCWR could result in extensive damage
to your vehicle and personal injury.
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the certification label.
WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could
result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Engine
4.6L 2V
Engine
4.6L 2V
4.6L 3V
5.4L
Regular Cab 4x2 (126” wheelbase)
Rear axle ratio
Maximum
Maximum
GCWR-lb. (kg)
trailer
weight-lb. (kg)
3.55
10400 (4717)
5400 (2449)
3.73
10900 (4944)
5900 (2676)
Regular Cab 4x4 (126” wheelbase)
Rear axle ratio
Maximum
Maximum
GCWR-lb. (kg)
trailer
weight-lb. (kg)
3.73
10900 (4944)
5700 (2585)
3.55
12900 (5851)
7700 (3493)
3.73
13300 (6033)
8000 (3629)
3.31
13000 (5897)
7700 (3493)
3.55
13900 (6305)
8600 (3901)
3.73
13900 (6305)
8600 (3901)
257
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Regular Cab 4x2 (145” wheelbase)
Rear axle ratio
Maximum
Maximum
GCWR-lb. (kg)
trailer
weight-lb. (kg)
3.55
10600 (4808)
5500 (2495)
4.6L 2V
3.73
11100 (5035)
6000 (2722)
3.31
13100 (5942)
8000 (3629)
4.6L 3V
3.55
13600 (6169)
8400 (3810)
3.15
13200 (5987)
8000 (3629)
5.4L
3.55
15000 (6804)
9800 (4445)
5.4L (Heavy
3.73
16700 (7575)
11300 (5126)
Duty)
Engine
Regular Cab 4x4 (145” wheelbase)
Rear axle ratio
Maximum
Maximum
GCWR-lb. (kg)
trailer
weight-lb. (kg)
4.6L 2V
3.73
11100 (5035)
5800 (2631)
3.55
13100 (5942)
7700 (3493)
4.6L 3V
3.73
13600 (6169)
8200 (3719)
3.31
13200 (5987)
7700 (3493)
5.4L
3.55
15000 (6804)
9500 (4309)
3.73
15000 (6804)
9500 (4309)
5.4L (Heavy
3.73
17000 (7711)
11300 (5126)
Duty)
Engine
Engine
4.6L 2V
4.6L 3V
SuperCab 4x2 (145” wheelbase)
Rear axle ratio
Maximum
GCWR-lb. (kg)
3.55
3.73
3.31
3.55
258
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
10600
11100
13500
14900
(4808)
(5035)
(6123)
(6759)
Maximum
trailer
weight-lb. (kg)
5300 (2404)
5800 (2631)
8100 (3674)
9500 (4309)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Engine
5.4L
Engine
4.6L 2V
4.6L 3V
5.4L
SuperCab 4x2 (145” wheelbase)
Rear axle ratio
Maximum
GCWR-lb. (kg)
3.15
3.55
3.73
14000 (6350)
15200 (6895)
16900 (7666)
SuperCab 4x4 (145” wheelbase)
Rear axle ratio
Maximum
GCWR-lb. (kg)
3.73
3.55
3.73
3.31
3.55
3.73
11100 (5035)
13500 (6123)
15100 (6849)
14000 (6350)
15400 (6985)
15400 (6985)
17100 (7756)*
Maximum
trailer
weight-lb. (kg)
8600 (3900)
9800 (4445)
11300 (5126)
Maximum
trailer
weight-lb. (kg)
5500 (2495)
7900 (3583)
9400 (4264)
8300 (3765)
9700 (4400)
9700 (4400)
11200 (5080)*
*Maximum GCWR and trailer weight when equipped with Max Trailer
Tow package.
Engine
5.4L (Heavy
Duty)
Engine
5.4L (Heavy
Duty)
SuperCab 4x2 (163” wheelbase)
Rear axle ratio
Maximum
GCWR-kg (lb.)
3.73
17100 (7756)
SuperCab 4x4 (163” wheelbase)
Rear axle ratio
Maximum
GCWR-lb. (kg)
3.73
17100 (7756)
Maximum
trailer
weight-kg (lb.)
11300 (5126)
Maximum
trailer
weight-lb. (kg)
11100 (5035)
259
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Engine
4.6L 2V
4.6L 3V
5.4L
SuperCrew 4x2 (145” wheelbase)
Rear axle ratio
Maximum
GCWR-lb. (kg)
3.55
3.73
3.15
3.31
3.55
3.15
3.55
3.73
10600
11100
13000
13500
14900
14000
15300
16900
(4808)
(5035)
(5897)
(6123)
(6759)
(6350)
(6940)
(7666)
Maximum
trailer
weight-lb. (kg)
5200 (2359)
5700 (2585)
7500 (3402)
8100 (3674)
9400 (4264)
8500 (3856)
9800 (4445)
11300 (5126)
SuperCrew 4x2 (145” wheelbase) Harley-Davidson Version
Engine
Rear axle ratio
Maximum
Maximum
GCWR-lb. (kg)
trailer
weight-lb. (kg)
5.4L
3.73
11200 (5080)
5300 (2404)
Engine
4.6L 3V
5.4L
SuperCrew 4x4 (145” wheelbase)
Rear axle ratio
Maximum
GCWR-lb. (kg)
3.55
3.73
3.31
3.55
3.73
13500 (6123)
15100 (6849)
14000 (6350)
15500 (7031)
15500 (7031)
17100 (7756)*
Maximum
trailer
weight-lb. (kg)
7700 (3493)
9300 (4218)
8100 (3674)
9600 (4355)
9600 (4355)
11200 (5080)*
*Maximum GCWR and trailer weight when equipped with Max Trailer
Tow package.
260
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
SuperCrew 4x4 (145” wheelbase) Harley-Davidson Version
Engine
Rear axle ratio
Maximum
Maximum
GCWR-lb. (kg)
trailer
weight-lb. (kg)
5.4L
3.73
11200 (5080)
5100 (2313)
Engine
4.6L 2V
4.6L 3V
5.4L
Engine
SuperCrew4x2 (157” wheelbase)
Rear axle ratio
Maximum
GCWR-lb. (kg)
3.55
3.73
3.31
3.55
3.15
3.55
3.73
10600
11100
13500
14900
14000
15300
17000
(4808)
(5035)
(6123)
(6759)
(6350)
(6940)
(7711)
SuperCrew 4x4 (157” wheelbase)
Rear axle ratio
Maximum
GCWR-lb. (kg)
Maximum
trailer
weight-lb. (kg)
5100 (2313)
5600 (2540)
8000 (3629)
9300 (4218)
8400 (3810)
9700 (4400)
11300 (5126)
Maximum
trailer
weight-lb. (kg)
3.55
13500 (6123)
7600 (3448)
4.6L 3V
3.73
15100 (6849)
9200 (4173)
3.31
14000 (6350)
8000 (3629)
3.55
15500 (7031)
9500 (4309)
5.4L
3.73
15500 (7031)
9500 (4309)
17100 (7756)*
11100 (5035)*
*Maximum GCWR and trailer weight when equipped with Max Trailer
Tow package.
Trailer frontal area considerations:
• Not to exceed towing vehicle frontal area 36 square feet (3.4 square
meters) without the Class IV trailer towing package.
• Not to exceed 60 square feet (5.52 square meters) with the Class IV
trailer towing package–excluding vehicles with 3.15 rear axle ratio.
• Not to exceed 45 square feet (4.18 square meters) with the Class IV
trailer towing package for vehicles with 3.15 rear axle ratio only.
261
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Note: Do not exceed trailer weight of 5,000 lb. (2,268 kg) when towing
with bumper only.
Preparing to tow
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is
properly attached to your vehicle. Contact your authorized dealer or a
reliable trailer dealer as soon as possible if you require assistance.
Hitches
Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle’s bumper or attach to the
axle. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10%–15% of the
total weight of the trailer is on the tongue.
Weight distributing hitch
When hooking up a trailer using a load equalizing hitch, always use the
following procedure:
1. Park the unloaded vehicle on a level surface. With the ignition on and
all doors closed, allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes so that it
can level.
2. Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers
at the center of the vehicle.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that
the front bumper height is within 1⁄2 inch (13 mm) of the reference
point. After proper adjustment, the rear bumper should be no higher
than in Step 2.
WARNING: Do not adjust a weight distributing hitch to any
position where the rear bumper of the vehicle is higher than it
was before attaching the trailer. Doing so will defeat the function of
the weight distributing hitch, which may cause unpredictable handling,
and could result in serious personal injury.
Safety chains
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers
of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency
gives to you.
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
262
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Trailer brakes
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are
safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s
specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal
regulations.
WARNING: Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system
directly to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not
have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision
greatly increase.
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the
GVWR not GCWR.
Integrated trailer brake controller (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a fully integrated electronic Trailer
Brake Controller (TBC). When used properly, the TBC helps ensure
smooth and effective trailer braking by powering the trailer’s electric
brakes with a proportional output based on the towing vehicle’s brake
pressure.
WARNING: The Ford TBC has only been verified to be
compatible with trailers having electric-actuated drum brakes
(one to four axles) and not hydraulic surge or electric-over-hydraulic
types. It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure that the trailer
brakes are adjusted appropriately, functioning normally and all electric
connections are properly made.
The TBC user interface consists of
the following:
1. +/- (GAIN adjustment
buttons): Pressing these buttons
will adjust the TBC’s power output
to the trailer brakes (in
0.5 increments). The GAIN setting
can be increased to a maximum of
10.0 or decreased to a minimum of
0 (no trailer braking). Pressing and holding a button will raise or lower
the setting continuously. The gain setting will display in the message
center as follows: TBC GAIN = XX.X.
263
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
The trailer brake controller (TBC) is designed to display three items of
information in the instrument cluster message center. These are: gain
setting, output bar graph, and trailer connectivity status. They will
appear as follows in the message center.
• TBC GAIN = XX.X NO TRAILER: The instrument cluster message
center will display the current gain setting during a given ignition
cycle and when adjusting the gain. This message is also displayed
during manual activation without a trailer connected or when gain
adjustments are made with no trailer connected.
• TBC GAIN = XX.X OUTPUT = //////: When the vehicle’s brake pedal
is pushed, or when the manual control is activated, bar indicators will
illuminate in the instrument cluster message center to indicate the
amount of power going to the trailer brakes relative to the brake pedal
or manual control input. One bar indicates the least amount of output
with six bars indicating maximum output.
• TRAILER CONNECTED: This message is displayed when a correct
trailer wiring connection (a trailer with electric trailer brakes) has
been sensed during a given ignition cycle.
• TRAILER DISCONNECTED: This message is displayed and
accompanied by a single chime, when a trailer connection was
determined and then a disconnection, either intentionally or
unintentionally, has been sensed during a given ignition cycle. It is also
displayed if a truck or trailer wiring fault occurs causing the trailer to
appear disconnected. This message is also displayed during manual
activation without a trailer connected.
2. Manual control lever: Slide the control lever to the left to activate
power to the trailer’s electric brakes independent of the tow vehicle’s
brakes (see the following Procedure for adjusting GAIN section for
instructions on proper use of this feature). If the manual control is
activated while the brake is also applied, the greater of the two inputs
determines the power sent to the trailer brakes.
• Stop Lamps: Activating the TBC manual control lever will illuminate
both the trailer brake lamps and the tow vehicle brake lamps except
the Center High-Mount Stop Lamp (presuming proper trailer electrical
connection). Pressing the vehicle brake pedal will also illuminate both
trailer and vehicle brake lamps.
Procedure for adjusting GAIN:
The GAIN setting is used to set the TBC for the specific towing
condition and should be changed as towing conditions change. Changes
to towing conditions include trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions
and weather.
264
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
The GAIN should be set to provide the maximum trailer braking
assistance while ensuring the trailer wheels do not lock when braking.
Locked trailer wheels may lead to trailer instability.
Note: This should only be performed in a traffic free environment at
speeds of approximately 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h).
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working condition,
functioning normally, and properly adjusted. See your trailer dealer if
necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connections according to
the trailer manufacturer’s instructions.
3. When a trailer with electric brakes is plugged in, the TRAILER
CONNECTED message will display in the instrument cluster message
center. 4. Use the GAIN adjustment (+/-) buttons to increase or decrease
the GAIN setting to the desired starting point. A GAIN setting of 6.0 is a
good starting point for heavier loads.
5. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry, level surface at
a speed of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and squeeze the manual control
lever completely.
6. If the trailer wheels lock-up (indicated by squealing tires), reduce the
GAIN setting; if the trailer wheels turn freely, increase the GAIN setting.
Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until the GAIN setting is at a point just below
trailer wheel lock-up. If towing a heavier trailer, trailer wheel lockup may
not be attainable even with the maximum GAIN setting of 10.
Explanation of instrument cluster warning messages:
The TBC interacts with the instrument cluster message center to display
the following messages:
TRAILER BRAKE MODULE FAULT: This message is displayed and
accompanied by a single chime, in response to faults sensed by the TBC.
In the event this message is seen, please contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible for diagnosis and repair. The TBC may still function,
but performance may be degraded.
WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER: This message is displayed when a
Short circuit on the electric brake output wire has occurred. If the
WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER message is displayed and accompanied
by a single chime, with no trailer connected, the problem is with the
vehicle wiring from the TBC to the 7–pin connector in the bumper. If the
message is only displayed with a trailer connected, the problem is related
to the trailer wiring; consult your trailer dealer for assistance. This can
be a short to ground (i.e., chaffed wire) or a short to voltage (i.e., pulled
pin on trailer emergency break-away battery) or trailer brakes drawing
too much current.
265
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Note: Your TBC can be diagnosed by your authorized dealer to
determine exactly which trailer fault has occurred; however, if the fault
is with the trailer this diagnosis is not covered under your Ford
warranty.
Points to Remember:
• Remember to adjust gain setting before using the TBC for the first
time.
• Readjust GAIN setting on the TBC (according to procedure above)
whenever road, weather and trailer or vehicle loading conditions
change from those that existed when the gain was initially set.
• The sliding lever on the TBC should be used only for manual
activation of trailer brakes to assist with proper adjustment of the
GAIN. Misuse, such as application during trailer sway, could cause
instability of trailer and/or tow vehicle.
• Avoid towing in adverse weather conditions. The TBC does not
provide anti-lock control of the trailer wheels. Trailer wheels can
lockup on slippery surfaces, resulting in reduced stability of trailer and
tow vehicle.
• The TBC interacts with the brake system of the vehicle, including
ABS, in order to reduce the likelihood of trailer wheel lockup.
Therefore, if these systems are not functioning properly the TBC may
not function at full performance.
• When the vehicle is turned off, the TBC Output is disabled and the
display is shut down. Reactivation of the ignition from off to on will
awaken the TBC module.
• The TBC is only a factory or dealer installed item. Ford is not
responsible for warranty or performance of the TBC due to misuse or
customer installation.
• Do not attempt removal of the TBC without consulting the
Workshop Manual. Damage to the unit may result.
266
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Trailer lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. Contact
your authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions
and equipment for hooking up trailer lamps.
Using a step bumper (if equipped)
The rear bumper is equipped with an integral hitch and only requires a
ball with a one inch (25.4 mm) shank diameter. The bumper has a
5,000 lb (2,270 kg) trailer weight and 500 lb (227 kg) tongue weight
capacity.
If it is necessary to relocate the trailer hitch ball position, a
frame-mounted trailer hitch must be installed.
Driving while you tow
When towing a trailer:
• To ensure proper “break-in” of powertrain components, do not trailer
tow during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of a new vehicle.
• To ensure proper “break-in” of powertrain components during the first
500 miles (800 km) of trailer towing, drive no faster than 70 mph
(113 km/h) with no full throttle starts.
• Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
• Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.
• Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
• Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur.
• For additional information, refer to Automatic transmission
operation in the Driving chapter.
Servicing after towing
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more
frequent service intervals. Refer to your scheduled maintenance
information for more information.
267
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Trailer towing tips
• Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to
get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached.
• If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear. Do
not apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become
less effective. Also, see the information on tow/haul mode operation
under Automatic transmission operation in the Driving chapter.
• The trailer tongue weight should be 10–15% of the loaded trailer
weight.
• If you will be towing a trailer frequently in hot weather, hilly
conditions, at GCWR, or any combination of these factors, consider
refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lube if not already so
equipped. Refer to the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for
the lubricant specification. Remember that regardless of the rear axle
lube used, do not tow a trailer for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of a
new vehicle, and that the first 500 miles (800 km) of towing be done
at no faster than 70 mph (113 km/h) with no full throttle starts.
• After you have traveled 50 miles (80 km), thoroughly check your
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.
• To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hot
weather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park).
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.
Launching or retrieving a boat
Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer
into the water. Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the
trailer is removed from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval:
• do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
• do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches (15 cm) above the
bottom edge of the rear bumper.
268
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components:
• causing internal damage to the components.
• affecting driveability, emissions and reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in
water. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed
unless a leak is suspected or repair required.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational (RV) towing.
An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind
a motorhome. These guidelines are designed to ensure that your
transmission is not damaged.
Note: Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to
prevent exhaust fumes from entering the vehicle. Refer to the Climate
controls chapter for more information.
2WD vehicles: Do not tow your vehicle with any wheels on the ground,
as vehicle or transmission damage may occur. It is recommended to tow
your vehicle with all four (4) wheels off the ground such as when using a
car-hauling trailer. Otherwise, no recreational towing is permitted.
4WD vehicles equipped with manual-shift transfer case:
• Release the parking brake.
• Turn the key in the ignition to the off position.
• Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
• Place the transfer case lever in N (Neutral).
• The maximum recommended distance is unlimited.
• The vehicle must be towed in the forward position to ensure no
damage is done to the internal transfer case components.
The transfer case N (Neutral) position overrides the transmission and
puts the vehicle in neutral regardless of transmission gearshift lever
position. The vehicle can move forward or backward. This position
should only be used when towing the vehicle.
WARNING: Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the
transfer case in the N (Neutral) position. Always set the parking
brake fully and turn off the ignition when leaving the vehicle.
After reaching the destination, you must place your vehicle’s 4x4
gearshift lever in gear (2H, 4H or 4L).
269
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle, see Wrecker
towing in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
4WD vehicles equipped with an electronic-shift transfer case: Do
not tow your vehicle with any wheels on the ground, as vehicle or
transmission damage may occur. It is recommended to tow your vehicle
with all four (4) wheels off the ground such as when using a car-hauling
trailer. Otherwise, no recreational towing is permitted.
In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle, see Wrecker
towing in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
270
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
STARTING
Positions of the ignition
1. Off — locks the automatic
transmission gearshift lever and
allows key removal.
Note: The ignition key cannot be
removed from the ignition unless
the gearshift lever is securely
latched in P (Park).
2. Accessory — allows the electrical
accessories such as the radio to
operate while the engine is not
running.
3. On — all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key
position when driving.
4. Start — cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine
starts.
Preparing to start your vehicle
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system.
This system meets all Canadian interference-causing equipment standard
requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio
noise.
When starting a fuel-injected engine, don’t press the accelerator before
or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty
starting the engine. For more information on starting the vehicle, refer to
Starting the engine in this chapter.
WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce
very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system,
creating the risk of fire or other damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
271
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
WARNING: Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in
other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open
the garage door before you start the engine. See Guarding against
exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions.
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
smell exhaust fumes.
Important safety precautions
A computer system controls the engine’s idle revolutions per minute
(RPM). When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs higher than normal in
order to warm the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down
automatically, have the vehicle checked. If the vehicle is operated in a
heavy snow storm or blowing snow conditions, the engine air induction
may become partially clogged with snow and/or ice. If this occurs the
engine may experience a significant reduction in power output. At the
earliest opportunity, clear all snow and/or ice away from the air induction
inlet. Do not allow the vehicle to idle for more than 10 minutes at the
higher engine RPM.
Before starting the vehicle:
1. Make sure all vehicle occupants have buckled their safety belts. For
more information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the
Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.
2. Make sure the headlamps and vehicle accessories are off.
3. Make sure the gearshift is in P (Park).
• 4–speed transmission
272
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
• 6–speed transmission
4. Make sure the parking brake is
set.
BRAKE
5. Turn the key to 3 (on) without
turning the key to 4 (start).
Some warning lights will briefly illuminate. See Warning lights and
chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information
regarding the warning lights.
273
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Starting the engine
1. Turn the key to 3 (on) without
turning the key to 4 (start).
2. Turn the key to 4 (start), then
release the key as soon as the
engine begins cranking. Your vehicle
has a computer assisted cranking
system that assists in starting the
engine. After releasing the key from
the 4 (start) position, the engine
may continue cranking for up to
10 seconds or until the vehicle
starts.
Note: Cranking may be stopped at any time by turning the key to the off
position.
3. After idling for a few seconds, release the parking brake, apply the
brake, shift into gear and drive.
Note: If the engine does not start on the first try, turn the key to the off
position, wait 10 seconds and try Step 2 again. If the engine still fails to
start, press the accelerator to the floor and try Step 2 again, keeping the
accelerator on the floor until the engine begins to accelerate above
cranking speeds; this will allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off
in case the engine is flooded with fuel.
Cold weather starting (flexible fuel vehicles only)
The starting characteristics of all grades of E85 ethanol make it
unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C).
Consult your fuel distributor for the availability of winter grade ethanol.
As the outside temperature approaches freezing, ethanol fuel distributors
should supply winter grade ethanol (same as with unleaded gasoline). If
summer grade ethanol is used in cold weather conditions, 0°F to 32°F
(-18°C to 0°C), you may experience increased cranking times, rough idle
or hesitation until the engine has warmed up.
You may experience a decrease in peak performance when the engine is
cold when operating on E85 ethanol.
Do not crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time as starter
damage may occur. If the engine fails to start, turn the key to off and
wait 30 seconds before trying again.
Do not use starting fluid such as ether in the air intake system. Such
fluid could cause immediate explosive damage to the engine and possible
personal injury.
274
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
If you should experience cold weather starting problems on E85 ethanol,
and neither an alternative brand of E85 ethanol nor an engine block
heater is available, the addition of unleaded gasoline to your tank will
improve cold starting performance. Your vehicle is designed to operate
on E85 ethanol alone, unleaded gasoline alone, or any mixture of the two.
See Choosing the right fuel in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter for more information on ethanol.
If the engine fails to start using the preceding instructions
(flexible fuel vehicles only)
1. Press and hold down the accelerator 1/3 to 1/2 way to floor, then
crank the engine.
2. When the engine starts, release the key, then gradually release the
accelerator pedal as the engine speeds up. If the engine still fails to start,
repeat Step 1.
Guarding against exhaust fumes
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid
its dangerous effects.
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
smell exhaust fumes.
Important ventilating information
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of
time, open the windows at least 1 inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating or
air conditioning to bring in fresh air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting
and allows the heater/defroster system to respond quickly. If your vehicle
is equipped with this system, your equipment includes a heater element
which is installed in your engine block and a wire harness which allows
the user to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt A/C electrical
source. The block heater system is most effective when outdoor
temperatures reach below 0°F (-18°C).
For flexible fuel vehicles, if operating with E85 ethanol, an engine block
heater must be used if ambient temperature is below 0°F (-18°C).
See Cold weather starting earlier in this chapter for more information
on starting with ethanol.
275
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
WARNING: Failure to follow engine block heater instructions
could result in property damage or physical injury.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use
your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged
(cheater) adapters.
Prior to using the engine block heater, follow these recommendations for
proper and safe operation:
• For your safety, use an outdoor extension cord that is product
certified by Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards
Association (CSA). Use only an extension cord that can be used
outdoors, in cold temperatures, and is clearly marked “Suitable for Use
with Outdoor Appliances.” Never use an indoor extension cord
outdoors; it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard.
• Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord, minimum.
• Use as short an extension cord as possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords. Instead, use one extension cord
which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord to
the outlet without stretching.
• Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition (not
patched or spliced). Store your extension cord indoors at
temperatures above 32°F (0°C). Outdoor conditions can deteriorate
extension cords over a period of time.
• To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged (cheater) adapters.
Also ensure that the block heater, especially the cord, is in good
condition before use.
• Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug /engine
block heater cord plug connection is free and clear of water in order
to prevent possible shock or fire.
• Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear of
all combustibles such as petroleum products, dust, rags, paper and
similar items.
• Be sure that the engine block heater, heater cord and extension cord
are solidly connected. A poor connection can cause the cord to
become very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire. Be sure
to check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system
has been operating for approximately a half hour.
276
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
• Finally, have the engine block heater system checked during your fall
tune-up to be sure it’s in good working order.
How to use the engine block heater
Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. To clean
them, use a dry cloth.
Depending on the type of factory installed equipment, your engine block
heater system may consume anywhere between 400 watts or 1000 watts
of power per hour. Your factory installed block heater system does not
have a thermostat; however, maximum temperature is attained after
approximately three hours of operation. Block heater operation longer
than three hours will not improve system performance and will
unnecessarily use additional electricity.
Make sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving the
vehicle. While not in use, make sure the protective cover seals the
prongs of the engine block heater cord plug.
BRAKES
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding
or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out
and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the vehicle has
continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the
vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.
Refer to Warning lights and
!
P
chimes in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for information on the brake
BRAKE
system warning light.
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Your vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock braking system (ABS). This
system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by
keeping the brakes from locking. Noise from the ABS pump motor and
brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking and the
brake pedal may suddenly travel a little farther as soon as ABS braking is
done and normal brake operation resumes. These are normal
characteristics of the ABS and should be no reason for concern.
277
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Using ABS
When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake
pedal; do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the
effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping
distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain
steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces. However,
the ABS does not decrease stopping distance.
ABS warning lamp
The ABS lamp in the instrument
cluster momentarily illuminates
ABS
when the ignition is turned on. If
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the
ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced.
Even when the ABS is disabled,
!
P
normal braking is still effective. If
your BRAKE warning lamp
BRAKE
illuminates with the parking brake
released, have your brake system
serviced immediately.
Parking brake
To set the parking brake (1), press
the parking brake pedal down until
the pedal stops.
The BRAKE warning lamp will
illuminate and will remain
illuminated until the parking brake
is released.
To release, pull the lever (2).
278
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
!
P
BRAKE
Driving
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic
transmission) or in 1 (First) (manual transmission).
ADVANCETRAC姞 WITH ROLL STABILITY CONTROL™ (RSC姞)
STABILITY ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM
WARNING: Vehicle modifications involving braking system,
aftermarket roof racks, suspension, steering system, tire
construction and/or wheel/tire size may change the handling
characteristics of the vehicle and may adversely affect the performance
of the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system. In addition, installing any
stereo loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the
AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system. Install any aftermarket stereo
loudspeaker as far as possible from the front center console, the
tunnel, and the front seats in order to minimize the risk of interfering
with the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 sensors. Reducing the effectiveness
of the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system could lead to an increased risk
of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
WARNING: Remember that even advanced technology cannot
defy the laws of physics. It’s always possible to lose control of a
vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your
vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage.
Activation of the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system is an indication that
at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road;
this could reduce the operator’s ability to control the vehicle,
potentially resulting in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death. If your AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system
activates, SLOW DOWN.
279
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
WARNING: If a failure has been detected within the
will
AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system, the “sliding car” icon
illuminate steadily. Verify that the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system is
not manually disabled (push the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 control
button located on the center of the instrument panel). If the “sliding
still illuminates steadily, have the system serviced by an
car” icon
authorized dealer immediately. Operating your vehicle with
AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 disabled could lead to an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
The AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system provides the following stability
enhancement features for certain driving situations:
• Traction control system (TCS), which functions to help avoid
drive-wheel spin and loss of traction.
• Electronic stability control (ESC), which functions to help avoid skids
or lateral slides.
• Roll Stability Control™ (RSC威), which functions to help avoid a
vehicle roll-over.
The AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system automatically enables each time
the engine is started. All features of the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system
(TCS, ESC, and RSC威) are active and monitor the vehicle from start-up.
However, the system will only intervene if the driving situation requires
it.
The AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威
system includes an AdvanceTrac威
with RSC威 control button on the
center of the instrument panel, and
in the
a “sliding car” icon
instrument cluster. The “sliding car”
in the instrument cluster will illuminate if a driving situation
icon
causes the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system to operate. If the “sliding
illuminates steadily, verify that the AdvanceTrac威 with
car” icon
RSC威 system is not manually disabled by pressing the AdvanceTrac威
with RSC威 button located on the center stack of the instrument panel. If
remains steadily illuminated, have the system
the “sliding car” icon
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Note: If the system cannot be turned off, refer to MyKey™ in the Locks
and Security chapter for more information.
280
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
When AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 performs a normal system self-check,
some drivers may notice a slight movement of the brake, and/or a
rumble, grunting, or grinding noise after startup and when driving off.
When an event occurs that activates AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 you may
experience the following:
• A slight deceleration of the vehicle
• The “sliding car”
indicator light will flash.
• A vibration in the pedal when your foot is on the brake pedal
• If the driving condition is severe and your foot is not on the brake, the
brake pedal may move as the systems applies higher brake forces. You
may also hear a whoosh of air from under the instrument panel during
this severe condition.
• The brake pedal may feel stiffer than usual.
Traction control system (TCS)
Traction control is a driver aid feature that helps your vehicle maintain
traction of the wheels, typically when driving on slippery and/or hilly
road surfaces, by detecting and controlling wheel spin.
Excessive wheel spin is controlled in two ways, which may work
separately or in tandem: engine traction control and brake traction
control. Engine traction control works to limit drive-wheel spin by
momentarily reducing engine power. Brake traction control works to limit
wheel spin by momentarily applying the brakes to the wheel that is
slipping. Traction control is most active at low speeds.
in the instrument cluster
During TCS events the “sliding car” icon
will flash.
If the TCS is activated excessively in a short period of time, the braking
portion of the system may become temporarily disabled to allow the
brakes to cool down. In this situation, TCS will use only engine power
reduction or transfer to help control the wheels from over-spinning.
When the brakes have cooled down, the system will regain all features.
Anti-lock braking, RSC威, and ESC are not affected by this condition and
will continue to function during the cool-down period.
The engine traction control and brake traction control system may be
deactivated in certain situations. See the Switching off AdvanceTrac威
with RSC威 section following.
281
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Electronic stability control (ESC)
Electronic stability control (ESC) may enhance your vehicle’s directional
stability during adverse maneuvers, for example when cornering severely
or avoiding objects in the roadway. ESC operates by applying brakes to
one or more of the wheels individually and, if necessary, reducing engine
power if the system detects that the vehicle is about to skid or slide
laterally.
During ESC events the “sliding car” icon
in the instrument cluster
will flash.
Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the ESC system, which
include but are not limited to:
• Taking a turn too fast
• Maneuvering quickly to avoid an accident, pedestrian or obstacle
• Driving over a patch of ice or other slippery surfaces
• Changing lanes on a snow-rutted road
• Entering a snow-free road from a snow-covered side street, or vice
versa
• Entering a paved road from a gravel road, or vice versa
• Cornering while towing a heavily loaded trailer (refer to Trailer
towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter).
The Electronic Stability Control system may be deactivated in certain
situations. See the Switching Off AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 section
following.
Roll Stability Control™ (RSC威)
Roll Stability Control™ (RSC威) may help to maintain roll stability of the
vehicle during adverse maneuvers. RSC威 operates by detecting the
vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which it changes and by applying the
brakes to one or more wheels individually.
During an event that activates the Roll Stability Control™ (RSC威) the
in the instrument cluster will flash.
“sliding car” icon
Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the Roll Stability
Control™ system, which include:
• Emergency lane-change
• Taking a turn too fast
• Quick maneuvering to avoid an accident, pedestrian or obstacle
282
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
The Roll Stability Control™ system may be deactivated in certain
situations. See the Switching off AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 section
following.
Switching off AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威
If the vehicle is stuck in snow, mud or sand, and seems to lose engine
power, switching off certain features of the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威
system may be beneficial because the wheels are allowed to spin. This
will restore full engine power and will enhance momentum through the
obstacle. To switch off the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system press the
AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 button. Full features of the AdvanceTrac威 with
RSC威 system can be restored by pressing the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威
button again or by turning off and restarting the engine.
If you switch off the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system, the “sliding car”
will illuminate steadily. Pressing the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威
icon
button again will turn off the “sliding car” icon
.
In R (Reverse), ABS and the engine traction control and brake traction
control features will continue to function; however, ESC and RSC威 are
disabled.
Button
functions
Default at
start-up
Button pressed
momentarily
Button pressed
and held for
more than five
seconds at
vehicle speed
under 35 mph
(56 km/h)
AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 Features
“Sliding car”
RSC威
ESC
icon
Illuminated
during bulb
check
Illuminated
solid
Flashes then
illuminated
solid
TCS
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
283
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Button
functions
AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 Features
“Sliding car”
RSC威
ESC
icon
TCS
Vehicle speed
exceeds 35 mph
(56 km/h) after
button is
Illuminated
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
pressed and
solid
held for more
than five
seconds
Button pressed
again after
Not illuminated Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
deactivation
Trailer sway control
Your vehicle may be equipped with trailer sway control. When properly
equipped, trailer sway control will use the vehicle’s AdvanceTrac威 with
RSC威 system to detect and help reduce trailer sway by applying brake
force at individual wheels and, if necessary, by reducing engine power.
WARNING: Trailer sway control does not prevent a trailer from
swaying, it mitigates the sway from increasing once it has
occurred. If you are experiencing trailer sway it is likely that the trailer
is improperly loaded for the correct tongue weight or the speed of the
vehicle and trailer is too high. Pull the vehicle-trailer over to a safe
location to check the trailer weight distribution and tongue load and
reduce speed to a safe level while towing. If trailer sway is
experienced, SLOW DOWN.
icon in the
During trailer sway control events the “sliding car”
instrument cluster will flash momentarily. The message center will also
display TRAILER SWAY REDUCE SPEED. In some cases when trailer
sway is detected, the vehicle speed is too high and may be above a
speed at which trailer sway will not grow continuously. This may cause
the system to activate multiple times, causing a gradual reduction in
speed.
Note: The trailer sway control will only activate at speeds greater than
40 mph (64 km/h).
284
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Disabling trailer sway control
Trailer sway control can be disabled during any key cycle. See trailer
sway control under the Message center in the Instrument Cluster
chapter. Note that regardless of chosen enable state, trailer sway control
will be re-enabled at each new key cycle.
WARNING: Turning off trailer sway control increases the risk of
loss of vehicle control, serious injury, or death. Ford does not
recommend disabling this feature except in situations where speed
reduction may be detrimental (e.g., hill climbing), the driver has
significant trailer towing experience, and can control trailer sway and
maintain safe operation.
STEERING
To help prevent damage to the power steering system:
• Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it
stops) for more than a few seconds when the engine is running.
• Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering fluid level
(below the MIN mark on the reservoir).
• Some noise is normal during operation. If the noise is excessive, check
for a low power steering fluid level before seeking service by your
authorized dealer.
• Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by a low power
steering fluid level. Check for a low power steering fluid level before
seeking service by your authorized dealer.
• Do not fill the power steering fluid reservoir above the MAX mark on
the reservoir.
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• an improperly inflated tire
• uneven tire wear
• loose or worn suspension components
• loose or worn steering components
• improper steering alignment
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander/pull.
285
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
LIMITED-SLIP AXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when
one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the
Limited-slip axle functions like a standard rear axle. The axle may
exhibit a slight noise or vibration in tight turns with low vehicle speed.
This is normal behavior and indicates the axle is working.
Electronic locking differential (ELD) axle (if equipped)
This axle provides added traction on slippery and/or off road surfaces,
particularly when one wheel is on a poor traction surface. In normal
driving conditions the rear axle function as a standard axle. The ELD
may be locked or unlocked by the vehicle operator. Refer to Four-wheel
drive (4WD) operation section in this chapter for further detail on ELD
function and usage. When the axle is unlocked it will function like a
standard rear axle. When the axle is locked it will not allow the rear
wheels to rotate at different speeds when turning. The ELD axle is not
recommended for use on good traction surfaces such as dry pavement.
Doing so may result in abnormal driving behavior while cornering and
excessive tire wear.
PREPARING TO DRIVE
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
Utility vehicles and trucks have larger tires and increased ground
clearance, giving the vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger
car.
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as
utility vehicles and trucks handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility vehicles and trucks are not designed for
cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road
conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed or abrupt maneuvers in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death.
286
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
WARNING: Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity,
may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Do not overload
your vehicle and use extra precautions, such as driving at slower
speeds, avoiding abrupt steering changes and allowing for increased
stopping distance, when driving a heavily loaded vehicle. Over-loading
or loading the vehicle improperly can deteriorate handling capability
and contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover.
BRAKE-SHIFT INTERLOCK - COLUMN-SHIFT TRANSMISSION
This vehicle is equipped with a park/brake-shift interlock feature that
prevents the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the
ignition is in the on position unless the brake pedal is pressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the on position and the brake pedal pressed, it is possible that a fuse has
blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not operating properly. Refer to
Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
If the fuse is not blown, perform the following procedure:
Note: The following procedure is easier to perform when the steering
column is adjusted to the full up position. Refer to Tilt steering wheel in
the Driver Controls chapter.
1. Apply the parking brake, turn the ignition to the off position, then
remove the key.
2. Move the shift lever boot by
pressing on the edges and moving it
up the gearshift lever.
287
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
3. Turn the steering wheel one-half
turn to access the slots on each side
of the steering wheel.
4. Insert a flat head screwdriver into
each slot to unsnap and remove the
steering column cover. Rotate the
column up on its hinges and pull
rearward to remove the cover from
the hinges.
5. With the ignition in the on
position, pull back on the BSI
solenoid found on top of the
uncovered steering column and at
the same time, apply the brake
pedal and shift the transmission into
N (Neutral).
288
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
6. Reinstall the steering column cover, start the vehicle and release the
parking brake.
Note: After the transmission is shifted to N (Neutral), it is easier to
reinstall the cover when the column is in the middle or lower tilt
position.
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the
brakelamps are working.
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer.
Brake-shift interlock – floor-shift transmission
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the on position unless the brake pedal is pressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the on position and the brake pedal pressed, it is possible that a fuse has
blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not operating properly. Refer to
Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
289
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
If the fuse is not blown and the brakelamps are working properly, the
following procedure will allow you to move the gearshift lever from P
(Park):
1. Apply the parking brake, turn the
ignition key to the off position, and
remove the key.
2. Starting at the rear of the trim
panel, using a screwdriver (or
similar tool) carefully pry up the
trim panel from rear attachments
and disconnect it from the console
to expose the inside of the gearshift.
3. Locate the brake shift interlock
lever on the passenger side of the
shifter assembly.
4. Apply the brake pedal. Using a
screwdriver (or similar tool), press
and hold the brake shift interlock
lever while pulling the gearshift
lever out of the P (Park) position
and into the N (Neutral) position.
5. Install the trim panel.
6. Apply brake pedal, start the vehicle, and release the parking brake.
See your authorized dealer as soon as possible if this procedure
is used.
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the
brakelamps are working.
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer.
290
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION
Understanding the gearshift positions of the 4–speed automatic
transmission
Your vehicle has been designed to improve fuel economy by reducing
fuel usage during coasting or deceleration. When you take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and the vehicle begins to slow down the torque
converter clutch locks up and aggressively shuts off fuel flow to the
engine while decelerating. This fuel economy benefit may be perceived
as a light to medium braking sensation when removing your foot from
the accelerator pedal.
Your vehicle’s automatic transmission is equipped with a special shift
strategy that ensures maximum heater performance during cold weather
operation.
When ambient temperature is 23°F (–5°C) or below and the engine
coolant temperature is below 100°F (38°C), light throttle upshifts may be
slightly delayed. Once the engine coolant temperature reaches 160°F
(71°C) the normal shift strategy will resume. This is normal operation
and will not affect the function or the durability of the transmission.
If the normal shift strategy does not resume once the engine
coolant temperature reaches the normal operating temperature,
or if the downshifts and other throttle conditions do not function
normally, see your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission
and prevents the rear wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Start the engine
• Press the brake pedal
• Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
• Release the parking brake.
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
291
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Overdrive)
The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Transmission
operates in gears one through four.
Overdrive can be deactivated by
pressing the transmission control
switch on the end of the gearshift
lever.
The transmission control indicator
(TCIL) will illuminate on the
instrument cluster.
O/D
OFF
Drive (not shown)
Drive is activated when the transmission control switch is pressed.
• This position allows for all forward gears except overdrive.
• O/D OFF lamp is illuminated.
• Provides engine braking.
• Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O/D to
other gears. Examples: heavy city traffic where continuous shifting in
and out of overdrive occurs, hilly terrain, heavy loads, trailer towing
and when engine braking is required.
• To return to O/D (Overdrive), press the transmission control switch.
The O/D OFF lamp will not be illuminated.
292
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
• O/D (Overdrive) is automatically returned each time the key is turned
off.
2 (Second)
This position allows for second gear only.
• Provides engine braking.
• Use to start-up on slippery roads.
• To return to D (Overdrive), move the gearshift lever into the D
(Overdrive) position.
• Selecting 2 (Second) at higher speeds will cause the transmission to
downshift to second gear at the appropriate vehicle speed.
1 (First)
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
• Will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; allows for 1 (First)
when vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Forced downshifts
• Allowed in D (Overdrive) or Drive.
• Press the accelerator to the floor.
• Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.
Driving with a 6–speed automatic transmission
Your vehicle has been designed to improve fuel economy by reducing
fuel usage while coasting or decelerating. When you take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and the vehicle begins to slow down the torque
converter clutch locks up and aggressively shuts off fuel flow to the
engine while decelerating. This fuel economy benefit may be perceived
as a light to medium braking sensation when removing your foot from
the accelerator pedal.
This vehicle is equipped with an Adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy.
The Adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy offers the optimal transmission
operation and shift quality. When the engine is turned off, the shift data
which includes the adaptive information will be stored automatically in
the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and Transmission Control Module
(TCM). If the battery is disconnected for any reason, the stored
information from the last time the key was turned to off will be read.
This way, no information will be lost with any battery removal or battery
disconnect.
293
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission
and prevents the rear wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Press the brake pedal
• Start the engine
• Move the gearshift lever into the
desired gear. If your vehicle is
equipped with a floor-shift
transmission, press the gearshift
lever release button (on the front
of the lever) while shifting into
the desired gear.
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Overdrive) with Tow/Haul Off
The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Transmission
operates in gears one through six.
D (Overdrive) with Tow/Haul On
The Tow/Haul feature improves transmission operation when towing a
trailer or a heavy load. All transmission gear ranges are available when
using Tow/Haul.
Tow/Haul can be activated by pressing the transmission control switch on
the end of the gearshift lever (column-shift transmission) or on the side
of the gearshift lever (floor-shift transmission).
294
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
• Column-shift transmission
• Floor-shift transmission
The TOW HAUL indicator light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster.
Tow/Haul delays upshifts to reduce frequency of transmission shifting.
Tow/Haul also provides engine braking in all forward gears when the
transmission is in the D (Overdrive) position; this engine braking will
slow the vehicle and assist the driver in controlling the vehicle when
descending a grade. Depending on driving conditions and load
conditions, the transmission may downshift, slow the vehicle and control
the vehicle speed when descending a hill, without the accelerator pedal
being pressed. The amount of downshift braking provided will vary based
upon the amount the brake pedal is depressed.
To deactivate the Tow/Haul feature and return to normal driving mode,
press the button on the end of the gearshift lever. The TOW HAUL light
will no longer be illuminated.
When you shut-off and restart the engine, the transmission will
automatically return to normal D (Overdrive) mode (Tow/Haul OFF).
295
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
WARNING: Do not use the Tow/Haul feature when driving in icy
or slippery conditions as the increased engine braking can cause
the rear wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing around with the
possible loss of vehicle control.
3 (Third)
Transmission operates in third gear only.
Used for improved traction on slippery roads. Selecting 3 (Third)
provides engine braking.
2 (Second)
Transmission operates in 2nd gear only.
Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads or to provide additional
engine braking on downgrades.
1 (First)
• Transmission operates in 1st gear only.
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
• Will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; allows for 1 (First)
when vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Forced downshifts
• Allowed in D (Drive) only.
• Press the accelerator to the floor.
• Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
296
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The Reverse Sensing System (RSS) sounds a tone to warn the driver of
obstacles near the rear bumper when R (Reverse) is selected and the
vehicle is moving at speeds less than 3 mph (5 km/h). The system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain
angular or moving objects.
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, please read and
understand the limitations of the reverse sensing system as
contained in this section. Reverse sensing is only an aid for some
(generally large and fixed) objects when moving in reverse on a flat
surface at “parking speeds”. Inclement weather may also affect the
function of the RSS; this may include reduced performance or a false
activation.
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, always use caution
when in reverse and when using the RSS.
WARNING: This system is not designed to prevent contact with
small or moving objects. The system is designed to provide a
warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to
avoid damaging the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller
objects, particularly those close to the ground.
WARNING: Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches,
bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the
normal detection zone of the RSS system may create false beeps.
297
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
The RSS detects obstacles up to
6 feet (2 meters) from the rear
bumper with a decreased coverage
area at the outer corners of the
bumper, (refer to the figures for
approximate zone coverage areas).
As you move closer to the obstacle,
the rate of the tone increases. When
the obstacle is less than 10 inches
(25.0 cm) away, the tone will sound
continuously. If the RSS detects a
stationary or receding object further
than 10 inches (25.0 cm) from the
side of the vehicle, the tone will
sound for only three seconds. Once
the system detects an object
approaching, the tone will sound
again.
While receiving a warning the radio
volume may be reduced to a
predetermined level. After the
warning goes away, the radio will return to the previous volume.
The RSS may have reduced performance or an increased chance of false
detection if the tailgate is not locked and in the upright position. If the
tailgate is down, the RSS tone may be heard intermittently or
continuously. The tone may also be heard if items in the truck bed
protrude rearward outside the bed.
The RSS automatically turns on when the gearshift lever is placed in R
(Reverse) and the ignition is on. A control in the message center allows
the driver to disable the system, refer to Message center in the
Instrument Cluster chapter for more information.
Note: If the system cannot be turned off, refer to MyKey™ in the Locks
and Security chapter for more information.
Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear bumper/fascia) free
from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt (do not clean the
sensors with sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, it will
affect the accuracy of the RSS.
If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper/fascia, leaving
it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
298
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
REARVIEW CAMERA SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The rearview camera system,
located on the tailgate, provides a
video image, which appears in the
rearview mirror or the navigation
system (if equipped), of the area
behind the vehicle. It adds
assistance to the driver while
reversing or reverse parking the
vehicle.
To use the camera system, place the transmission in R (Reverse); an
image will display on the left portion of the rearview mirror or on the
navigation screen (if equipped). The area displayed on the screen may
vary according to the vehicle orientation and/or road condition.
• (1) Rear bumper
• (2) Red zone
• (3) Yellow zone
• (4) Green zone
• (5) Centerline of vehicle
Always use caution while backing.
Objects in the red zone are closest
to your vehicle and objects in the
green zone are further away. Objects
are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to
the yellow or red zones.
Use the side mirrors and rearview mirror to get better coverage on both
sides and rear of the vehicle.
Image delay if displayed through the rearview mirror:
When shifting out of R (Reverse) and into any other gear, the image in
the rearview mirror will remain on for a few seconds before it shuts off
to assist in parking or trailer hookup.
Image delay if displayed through the Navigation screen:
After shifting out of R (Reverse) and into any gear other than P (Park),
the image in the navigation screen will remain until the vehicle speed
reaches five mph (8 km/h), only if the rear camera delay feature is on, or
until any navigation radio button is pressed.
299
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Note: The default setting for the rear camera delay is off. Press the
“Settings” button found on the navigation screen (if equipped) to set the
rear camera delay feature to on or off.
When towing, the camera system will only see what is being towed
behind the vehicle; this might not provide adequate coverage as it
usually provides in normal operation and some objects might not be
seen.
The camera lens for the camera is located on the tailgate. Keep the lens
clean so the video image remains clear and undistorted. Clean the lens
with a soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner.
Note: If the camera system image is not clear or seems distorted, it may
be covered with water droplets, snow, mud or any other substance. If
this occurs, clean the camera lens before using the camera system.
WARNING: The camera system is a reverse aid supplement
device that still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with
the rearview mirror and the side mirrors for maximum coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close to either corner of the
bumper or under the bumper, might not be seen on the screen
due to the limited coverage of the camera system.
WARNING: Backup as slow as possible since higher speeds
might limit your reaction time to stop the vehicle.
WARNING: Do not use the camera system with the tailgate
open.
If the back end of the vehicle is hit or damaged, then check with your
authorized dealer to have your rear video system checked for proper
coverage and operation.
Night time and dark area use
At night time or in dark areas, the camera system relies on the reverse
lamp lighting to produce an image. Therefore it is necessary that both
reverse lamps are operating in order to get a clear image in the dark. If
either of the lamps are not operating, stop using the camera system, at
least in the dark, until the lamp(s) are replaced and functioning.
300
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Servicing
• If the image comes on while the vehicle is not in R (Reverse), have
the system inspected by your authorized dealer.
• If the image is not clear, then check if there is anything covering the
lens such as dirt, mud, ice, snow, etc. If the image is still not clear
after cleaning, have your system inspected by your authorized dealer.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: For important information regarding safe operation
of this type of vehicle, see Preparing to drive your vehicle in
this chapter.
Four–wheel drive (4WD) supplies power to all four wheels. 4WD should
not be operated on dry pavement; driveline damage may occur.
If equipped with the Electronic Shift 4WD System, and 4X4 Low
is selected while the vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h), the
4WD system will not perform a shift. This is normal and should be
no reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to/from 4L (4X4 Low) for
proper operation.
4WD indicator lights
The indicator lights illuminate in the message center in the
reconfigurable telltale (RTT) location under the following conditions.
Refer to Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
• 4X2 - Momentarily illuminates
when 2H is selected on electronic
4x2
shift 4WD systems only.
• AWD - Illuminates when AWD is
selected (All Wheel Drive
equipped vehicles only).
• 4X4 HIGH - Illuminates when 4H
is selected.
AWD
4x4
HIGH
301
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
• 4X4 LOW - Illuminates when 4L
is selected.
•
4x4
LOW
- Illuminates when the
electronic locking differential
(ELD) is selected (if equipped).
• CHECK 4X4 - Displays when a
4X4 fault is present.
Note: When a 4X4 system fault is present, the system will typically
remain in whichever 4X4 mode was selected prior to the fault condition
occurring. It will not default to 4X2 in all circumstances. When this
warning is displayed, have your vehicle serviced by an authorized dealer.
Using a manual 4WD system (if equipped)
2H (4X2) – Power to the rear
wheels only; used for street and
highway driving. Provides optimal
smoothness and fuel economy at
high speeds.
4H (4X4 High) – Used for extra
traction such as in snow or icy roads
or in off-road situations. Not
intended for use on dry pavement.
N (Neutral) – No power to either
front or rear wheels.
4L (4X4 Low) – Uses extra gearing to provide maximum power to all
four wheels at reduced speeds. Intended only for off-road applications
such as deep sand, steep grades or pulling heavy objects. The shift lever
will not engage 4L (4X4 LOW) until the transmission is in N (neutral)
and the vehicle is moving below 3 mph (5 km/h); this is normal and
should be no reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to/from 4L (4X4
Low) for proper operation.
Shifting between 2H (4X2) and 4H (4X4 high)
• Move the transfer case lever between 2H (4X2) and 4H (4X4 High) at
a stop or any forward speed.
302
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Note: Momentarily releasing the accelerator pedal while preforming a
shift will improve engagement/disengagement times.
Note: Do not perform this operation if the rear wheels are slipping.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages; this is
normal.
Note: 4X4 High mode is not intended for use on dry pavement.
Shifting to/from 4L (4X4 Low)
1. Bring the vehicle to a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
2. Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
3. Move the transfer case lever through N (Neutral) directly to the
desired position.
• If the transfer case will not engage into 4L (4X4 Low) do not force
the lever. Allow the vehicle to coast at a speed below 3 mph
(5 km/h), then repeat Steps 2 and 3.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages; this is
normal.
Note: 4X4 Low mode is not intended for use on dry pavement.
Note: For proper operation in 4X4 Low, ensure the transfer case shift
lever is moved entirely rearward in to the 4L (4X4 Low) position and
that the 4x4 Low light is displayed in the message center.
Note: Ideal 4L (4X4 Low) shift conditions occur when the vehicle is
rolling at a speed below 3 mph (5 km/h) and the transmission is in N
(Neutral).
Using the N (Neutral) position
The transfer case N (Neutral) position overrides the transmission
and puts the vehicle in neutral regardless of transmission
gearshift lever position. The vehicle can move forward or
backward.
This position should only be used when towing the vehicle.
WARNING: Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the
transfer case in the N (Neutral) position. Always set the parking
brake fully and turn off the ignition when leaving the vehicle.
303
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Using the electronic shift 4WD system (if equipped)
2H (4X2) - Power to the rear
wheels only; used for street and
highway driving. Provides optimal
smoothness and fuel economy at
high speeds.
4H (4X4 High) - Used for extra
traction such as in snow or icy roads
or in off-road situations. Not
intended for use on dry pavement.
4L (4X4 Low) - Uses extra gearing
to provide maximum power to all
four wheels at reduced speeds. Intended only for off-road applications
such as deep sand, steep grades or pulling heavy objects. 4L (4X4 Low)
will not engage while the vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h); this is
normal and should be no reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to/from
4L (4X4 Low) for proper operation.
Shifting between 2H (4X2) and 4H (4X4 High)
Move the 4WD control between 2H (4X2) and 4H (4X4 High) at any
forward speed. The message center will display 4X4 SHIFT IN
PROGRESS during the system shift. “4X4 HIGH” will display in the
message center if 4H is selected and “4X2” will momentarily display in
the message center if 2H is selected. .
Note: Momentarily releasing the accelerator pedal while preforming a
shift will improve engagement/disengagement times.
Note: Do not perform this operation if the rear wheels are slipping.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages; this is
normal.
Note: 4X4 High mode is not intended for use on dry pavement.
Shifting to/from 4L (4X4 Low)
1. Bring the vehicle to a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
2. Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
3. Move the 4WD control to the desired position.
The message center will display 4X4 SHIFT IN PROGRESS during the
shift. The message center will then display the system mode selected. If
any of the above shift conditions are not met, the shift will not occur and
the message center will display information guiding the driver through
the proper shifting procedures.
304
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
If SHIFT DELAYED PULL FORWARD is displayed in the message
center, transfer case gear tooth blockage is present. To alleviate this
condition, place the transmission in a forward gear, move the vehicle
forward approximately 5 feet (2 meters), and shift the transmission back
to neutral to allow the transfer case to complete the range shift.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages; this is
normal.
Note: 4x4 Low mode is not intended for use on dry pavement.
Using the All Wheel Drive (AWD) system
(if equipped, Harley-Davidson only)
This system includes an electronically controlled transfer case. The
system is interactive with the road, continually monitoring and adjusting
torque delivery to the front and rear wheels to optimize traction.
2H (4X2) - Power to the rear
wheels only; used for street and
highway driving. Provides optimal
smoothness and fuel economy at
high speeds. The message center
will momentarily display “4X2” when
this mode is selected.
AWD (Auto) - Power delivered to
all four wheels, as required, for
increased traction. This is
appropriate for all on-road driving
conditions, such as dry road surfaces, wet pavement, snow, gravel and
shallow sand.
4H (4X4 High) - Used for extra traction on snow covered or icy roads
and in off road situations. This position is not recommended for use on
dry pavement. This position is only intended for severe winter or off-road
conditions, such as deep snow, ice or deep sand. The message center will
display “4X4 High” when this mode is selected.
Shifting between 2H (4X2) and AWD (Auto) or 4H (High)
Move the control from the 2H position to the AWD or 4H position at a
stop or while driving at any forward speed. The message center may
display ⬙4X4 SHIFT IN PROGRESS⬙ during the system shift. The message
center will then display “AWD” if AWD has been selected or “4X4 High” if
4H is selected. The message center will momentarily display “4X2” if 2H
has been selected.
Note: 4X4 High mode is not intended for use on dry pavement
305
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Shifting between AWD (Auto) and 4H (High)
Move the control from AWD to 4H at a stop or while driving at any
speed. The message center will display “AWD” if AWD has been selected
and “4X4 High” if 4H has been selected
Note: 4X4 High mode is not intended for use on dry pavement
Electronic locking differential (ELD) (if equipped)
The electronic locking differential (ELD) is a device housed in the rear
axle which allows both rear wheels to turn at the same speed. The ELD
can provide additional traction should the vehicle become stuck. The
ELD is electronically activated by the driver and can be shifted on the
fly. It is intended for use in mud, rocks, sand, or any off-road condition
where maximum traction is needed. It is not intended for use on dry
pavement.
The ELD is affected by the following conditions:
• The 4WD control must be in either 4H (4X4 High) or 4L (4X4 Low)
mode.
• The ELD will not engage if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph
(30 km/h) in 4X4 High or 56 mph (90 km/h) in 4X4 Low.
• In 4H (4X4 High), the ELD will disengage at speeds above 25 mph
(40 km/h) and will automatically reengage at speeds below 20 mph
(30 km/h).
• In 4L (4X4 Low), the ELD will disengage at speeds above 62 mph
(100 km/h) and will automatically reengage at speeds below 56 mph
(90 km/h).
The ELD is designed for off-road use only and is not intended for use on
dry pavement.
306
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Activating the electronic locking differential (ELD)
The ELD can be turned on by
pulling the knob on the 4WD control
toward you while the control is in
either 4H (4X4 High) or 4L (4X4
Low) mode.
Once the knob is pulled, the
light located on the control will
blink for approximately two seconds
and then it will remain solid.
indicator light will also
The
display in the message center.
light on the control
Once the
remains solid and the
indicator
light is displayed in the message
center, both rear wheel axle shafts
will be locked together providing
added traction.
If the
light blinks for 10 seconds, then turns off, and the
indicator
light in the message center turns off, one of the following has occurred:
• The vehicle speed is too high.
• The left and right rear wheel speed difference is too high during an
engagement attempt.
• The system has malfunctioned and will be accompanied by a CHECK
4X4 message in the message center.
Note: If the ELD has difficulty disengaging, release the accelerator pedal
and turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction while rolling.
Driving off-road with truck and utility vehicles
4WD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and
rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your
vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without
getting hung up or damaging underbody components.
The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle
differently than an ordinary passenger car.
307
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain.
Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel
motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not
grip the spokes.
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as
rocks and stumps.
You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before
driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain
steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four
wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning.
Basic operating principles
• Do not use 4WD on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so will produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and may damage drive components.
4WD modes are only intended for consistently slippery or loose
surfaces.
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your safety and the
safety of others should be your primary concern.
308
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as
utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive
vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger
cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive
speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive
cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
If your vehicle gets stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Emergency maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle, i.e.,
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid
the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
309
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as
utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive
vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger
cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive
speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive
cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
Parking
On some 4WD vehicles, when the transfer case is in the N (Neutral)
position, the engine and transmission are disconnected from the rest of
the driveline. Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic
transmission is in P (Park) or the manual transmission is in gear. Do not
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N (Neutral)
position. Always set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition
when leaving the vehicle.
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer.
4WD Systems
4WD (when you select a 4WD mode) uses all four wheels to power the
vehicle. This increases traction, enabling you to drive over terrain and
road conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case. On 4WD
vehicles, the transfer case allows you to select 4WD when necessary.
Information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures can be
found in this chapter. Information on transfer case maintenance can be
310
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
found in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter. You should
become thoroughly familiar with this information before you operate
your vehicle.
Normal characteristics
On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4x4 while
the vehicle is moving can cause some momentary clunk and ratcheting
sounds. This is the front drivetrain coming up to speed and the
automatic locking hubs engaging and is not cause for concern.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid
area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you
and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may
be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with caution.
Mud and water
If you must drive through high
water, drive slowly. Traction or
brake capability may be limited.
When driving through water,
determine the depth; avoid water
higher than the bottom of the hubs
(if possible) and proceed slowly. If
the ignition system gets wet, the
vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you
are driving in mud. Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As
when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of
the slide until you regain control of the vehicle.
If the transmission, transfer case or front axle are submerged in water,
their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary.
311
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Driving through deep water may damage the transmission.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant should
be replaced.
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts
and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an
imbalance that could damage drive components.
“Tread Lightly” is an educational
program designed to increase public
awareness of land-use regulations
and responsibilities in our nations
wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and the Bureau of Land
Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and
other public and private lands by “treading lightly.”
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up
or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up
or straight down. Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep
slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and
possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand
the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse
over a hill without the aid of an observer.
When climbing a steep slope or hill,
start in a lower gear rather than
downshifting to a lower gear from a
higher gear once the ascent has
started. This reduces strain on the
engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to
turn around because you might roll
over. It is better to back down to a safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much
power will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
312
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Descend a hill in the same gear you
would use to climb up the hill to
avoid excessive brake application
and brake overheating. Do not
descend in neutral; instead,
disengage overdrive or manually
shift to a lower gear. When
descending a steep hill, avoid
sudden hard braking as you could
lose control. When you brake hard,
the front wheels can’t turn and if
they aren’t turning, you won’t be
able to steer. The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the
vehicle. Rapid pumping of the brake pedal will help you slow the vehicle
and still maintain steering control.
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply the brakes steadily. Do not
“pump” the brakes.
Driving on snow and ice
4WD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but
can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting
from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although a 4WD vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any
faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do
not become overconfident as to road conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles
for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower
gears. In emergency stopping situations, apply the brake steadily. Do not
“pump” the brakes. Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter for
additional information on the operation of the Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS).
313
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
WARNING: If you are driving in slippery conditions that require
tire chains or cables, then it is critical that you drive cautiously.
Keep speeds down, allow for longer stopping distances and avoid
aggressive steering to reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle control
which can lead to serious injury or death. If the rear end of the vehicle
slides while cornering, steer in the direction of the slide until you
regain control of the vehicle.
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed
and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty
and durable load carrying capability. For this reason, Ford Motor
Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such
as adding or removing parts (such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by
using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make
it more likely the vehicle will roll over as a result of a loss of control.
Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle
equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder racks or pickup box
cover).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase
your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities
and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to
heavy off-road usage.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
If driving through deep or standing
water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly especially when the depth is
not known. Never drive through
water that is higher than the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the
bottom of the hubs (for trucks).
When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited.
Also, water may enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage your
engine or your vehicle may stall. Driving through deep water where
the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the
transmission and cause internal transmission damage.
314
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.
SNOWPLOWING
For F-150 snowplow applications, Ford recommends the F-150 4x4
Regular Cab and SuperCab equipped with the 5.4L engine, Heavy Duty
Payload Package and Snow Plow Prep Package. The Heavy Duty Payload
Package for 4x4 includes unique powertrain control strategy, required for
engine cooling when the raised snowplow blade blocks radiator airflow in
highway driving. Factory installed snow plow prep package vehicles
already have been programmed with the unique power train control
strategy to provide proper cooling. If the vehicle is being upgraded to the
equivalent hardware set as the snow plow prep package, then the vehicle
can obtain the unique power train control strategy to provide proper
cooling by getting service at an authorized dealer. The powertrain control
strategy required for snowplowing to provide proper cooling may
increase fan noise that may also be noticed under conditions other than
snow plowing. F-150 SuperCrew, Limited and Harley-Davidson F-150 are
not recommended for snowplowing and the Snow Plow Prep Package is
not available.
Installing the snowplow
Weight limits and guidelines for selecting and installing the snowplow can
be found in the Ford Truck Body Builders Layout Book, Snowplow
section, found at www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas. A typical installation
affects the following:
• Certification to government safety laws such as occupant protection
and airbag deployment, braking and lighting. Look for an ⬙Alterer’s
Label⬙ on the vehicle from the snowplow installer certifying that the
installation meets all applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS).
• The Total Accessory Reserve Capacity (TARC) is shown on the lower
right side of the vehicle’s Safety Certification Label. This is the weight
of permanently-attached auxiliary equipment, such as snowplow
frame-mounting hardware, that can be added to the vehicle and satisfy
Ford compliance certification to FMVSS. Exceeding this weight may
require the auxiliary equipment installer additional safety certification
responsibility. The Front Accessory Reserve Capacity (FARC) is added
for customer convenience
• Rear ballast weight behind the rear axle may be required to prevent
exceeding the FGAWR, and provide front-to-rear weight balance for
proper braking and steering.
315
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
• Front wheel toe may require re-adjustment to prevent premature
uneven tire wear. Specifications are found in the Ford Workshop
Manual.
• Headlight aim may require re-adjustment.
• The tire air pressures recommended for general driving are found on
the vehicle’s Safety Certification Label. The maximum cold inflation
pressure for the tire and associated load rating is imprinted on the tire
sidewall. Tire air pressure may require re-adjustment within these
pressure limits to accommodate the additional weight of the snowplow
installation
Operating the vehicle with the snowplow attached
Ford recommends that the F–150 be limited to low speed, personal-use
snow removal. Do not use your vehicle for snow removal until it has
been driven at least 500 miles (800 km).
The attached snowplow blade restricts airflow to the radiator, and may
cause the engine to run at a higher temperature. Attention to engine
temperature is especially important when outside temperatures are
above freezing. Angle the blade to maximize airflow to the radiator and
monitor engine temperature to determine whether a left or right angle
provides the best performance.
Snowplowing with your airbag equipped vehicle
Your vehicle is equipped with a driver and passenger air bag
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) The SRS is designed to activate in
certain frontal and offset frontal collisions when the vehicle sustains
sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
Careless or high speed driving while plowing snow which results in
sufficient vehicle decelerations can deploy the airbag. Such driving also
increases the risk of accidents.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
Never remove or defeat the “tripping mechanisms” designed into the
snow removal equipment by its manufacturer. Doing so may cause
damage to the vehicle and the snow removal equipment as well as
possible air bag deployment.
316
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) or its fuses. See your
Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer.
Transmission operation while plowing
• Shift transfer case to 4L (4WD Low) when plowing in small areas at
speeds below 5 mph (8 km/h).
• Shift transfer case to 4H (4WD High) when plowing larger areas or
light snow at higher speeds. Do not exceed 15 mph (24 km/h).
• Do not shift the transmission from a forward gear to R (Reverse) until
the engine is at idle and the wheels are stopped.
• If the vehicle is stuck, shift the transmission in a steady motion
between forward and reverse gears. Do not rock the vehicle for more
than a few minutes. The transmission and tires may be damaged or
the engine can overheat.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at operating
temperature. Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute. The
transmission and tires may be damaged or the engine may
overheat.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (55 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Engine temperature while plowing
When driving with a plow, your engine may run at a higher temperature
than normal because the attached snowplow blade will restrict airflow to
the radiator.
If you are driving more than 15 miles (24 km) at temperatures above
freezing, angle the plow blade either full left or full right to provide
maximum airflow to the radiator.
If you are driving less than 15 miles (24 km) at speeds up to 40 mph
(64 km/h) in cold weather, you will not need to worry about blade
position to provide maximum airflow.
317
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving
Factory installed snow plow prep package vehicles already have been
programmed with the unique power train control strategy to provide
proper cooling. If the vehicle is being upgraded to the equivalent
hardware set as the snow plow prep package, then the vehicle can obtain
the unique power train control strategy to provide proper cooling by
getting service at an authorized dealer. The powertrain control strategy
required for snowplowing to provide proper cooling may increase fan
noise that may also be noticed under conditions other than snow
plowing.
318
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Getting roadside assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service
is available:
• 24–hours, seven days a week
• for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card
included in your Owner Guide portfolio.
Roadside assistance will cover:
• a flat tire change with a good spare (except vehicles that have been
supplied with a tire inflation kit)
• battery jump start
• lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s
responsibility)
• fuel delivery – Independent Service Contractors, if not prohibited by
state, local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2.0 gallons (7.5L) of
gasoline or 5.0 gallons (18.9L) of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. Fuel
delivery service is limited to two no-charge occurrences within a
12-month period.
• winch out – available within 100 feet (30.5 meters) of a paved or
county maintained road, no recoveries.
• towing – Ford/Mercury/Lincoln eligible vehicle towed to an authorized
dealer within 35 miles (56 km) of the disablement location or to the
nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests to be towed to an
authorized dealer more than 35 miles (56 km) from the disablement
location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 35 miles (56 km).
Trailers shall be covered up to $200 if the disabled eligible vehicle
requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the trailer is disabled,
but the towing vehicle is operational, the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.
319
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Canadian customers refer to your Customer Information Guide
for information on:
• coverage period
• exact fuel amounts
• towing of your disabled vehicle
• emergency travel expense reimbursement
• travel planning benefits
In Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you may
purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside
Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact
1–877–294–2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
Using roadside assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the
Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment. In Canada, the card is
found in the Customer Information Guide in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford, Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers who require Roadside
Assistance, call 1-800-241-3673.
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call
1-800-665-2006.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest
dealership within 35 miles (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, U.S. Ford, Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers call
1-800-241-3673. Customers will be asked to submit their original
receipts.
Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call
1–800–665–2006.
HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL
The hazard flasher control is located
on the instrument panel by the
radio. The hazard flashers will
operate when the ignition is in any
position or if the key is not in the
ignition.
Press in the flasher control and all front and rear direction signals will
flash. Press the flasher control again to turn them off. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
320
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF
In the event of a moderate to severe collision, this vehicle is equipped
with a fuel pump shut-off feature that stops the flow of fuel to the
engine. Not every impact will cause a shut-off.
Should your vehicle shut off after a collision due to this feature, you may
restart your vehicle by doing the following:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the off position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the on position.
In some instances the vehicle may not restart the first time you try to
restart and may take one additional attempt.
WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary repair fuel leaks
after a collision may increase the risk of fire and serious injury.
Ford Motor Company recommends that the fuel system be inspected
by an authorized dealer after any collision.
FUSES AND RELAYS
Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate
fuses before replacing any electrical
components.
15
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
321
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Standard fuse amperage rating and color
COLOR
Fuse
rating
Mini
fuses
Standard
fuses
Maxi
fuses
2A
3A
4A
5A
7.5A
10A
15A
20A
25A
30A
40A
50A
60A
70A
80A
Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
Brown
Red
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
—
—
—
—
Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
Brown
Red
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Yellow
—
Green
Orange
Red
Blue
Tan
Natural
Cartridge
Fuse link
maxi
cartridge
fuses
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Blue
Blue
—
—
Pink
Pink
Green
Green
Red
Red
Yellow
Yellow
—
Brown
Black
Black
Passenger compartment fuse panel
The fuse panel is located under the right-hand side of the instrument
panel.
To remove the trim panel for access
to the fuse box, pull the panel
toward you and swing it out away
from the side and remove it. To
reinstall it, line up the tabs with the
grooves on the panel, then push it
shut.
To remove the fuse box cover, press in the tabs on both sides of the
cover, then pull the cover off.
322
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
To reinstall the fuse box cover, place the top part of the cover on the
fuse panel, then push the bottom part of the cover until you hear it click
shut. Gently pull on the cover to make sure it is seated properly.
The fuses are coded as follows.
Fuse/Relay
Location
1
2
3
4
5
Fuse Amp
Rating
30A
15A
15A
30A
10A
6
7
8
20A
10A
10A
Protected Circuits
Moon roof
Not used (spare)
Not used (spare)
Not used (spare)
Keypad illumination, Brake Shift
Interlock (BSI), SJB
microprocessor power
Turn signals, Stop lamps
Low beam headlamps (left)
Low beam headlamps (right)
323
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
9
Fuse Amp
Rating
15A
10
11
12
15A
10A
7.5A
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
5A
10A
10A
15A
20A
20A
25A
15A
15A
15A
15A
20A
10A
26
10A
27
28
29
30
31
32
20A
5A
5A
5A
10A
10A
324
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Protected Circuits
Interior courtesy lights, Cargo
lamps
Backlighting, Puddle lamps
GPS module
Power mirror switch, Memory seat
module microprocessor power,
Steering column switch
SYNC威
Ambient lighting module
Climate control
Ignition switch feed
All lock motor feeds
Driver memory seat switch
Not used (spare)
Adjustable pedals, Datalink
Fog lamps, Fog lamp indicator
Park lamps, Side marker lamps
High beam headlamps
Horn
Interior demand lamps, Mid box
power feed
Instrument panel cluster, Key out
inhibit solenoid, Radio info display
(CID), Radio buttons, Key-in
chime
Not used
Radio muting
Instrument panel cluster
Passenger airbag disable indicator
Restraints control module
Non-integrated compass module,
Heated-only seat module
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
33
34
Fuse Amp
Rating
10A
5A
35
36
10A
5A
37
38
39
40
41
10A
20A
20A
20A
15A
42
43
10A
10A
44
45
10A
5A
46
7.5A
47
30A Circuit
Breaker
15A
48
Protected Circuits
Trailer brake controller
Electronic locking differential
indicator
Rear park assist
Passive anti-theft system
transceiver
Upfitter relay coils
Subwoofer
Radio, Navigation display
Rear heated seats module
Auto dimming rear view mirror,
Door lock switch illumination,
Radio accessory delay
Not used (spare)
Heated mirror/backlight relay,
Rain sensor, Reverse camera
Not used (spare)
Front wiper logic, Blower motor
relay
Occupant classification sensor
(OCS)
Power windows, Moon roof,
Power sliding backlight
Delayed accessory relay (Feeds
fuse 41 and circuit breaker 47)
Power distribution box
The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. The
power distribution box contains high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing high
current fuses.
325
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace
the cover to the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting the
battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the
Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
The high-current fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse/Relay
Location
1
Fuse Amp
Rating
—
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
326
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Protected Circuits
Powertrain control module (PCM)
power relay
Starter relay
Blower motor relay
Heated backlite relay
Electric fan relay (high speed)
Trailer tow park lamp relay
Upfitter 1 relay
Fuel pump
Trailer tow battery charger
Upfitter 2 relay
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Fuse Amp
Rating
30A**
40A**
30A**
30A**
40A**
—
30A**
30A**
30A**
20A**
30A**
20A**
—
—
—
10A*
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
20A*
10A*
10A*
10A*
20A*
40A**
—
40A**
—
30A**
—
38
—
Protected Circuits
Power running board motors
Electric fan
Starter relay
Passenger power seats
Electric fan
Not used
Trailer brake
Upfitter 1
Upfitter 2
4x4 module (ESOF)
Trailer tow battery charge
Cigar lighter
A/C clutch relay
Upfitter 4 relay
Heated mirror relay
PCM – keep alive power, Canister
vent solenoid, Transmission, PCM
relay
Fuel pump relay
Upfitter 4
4x4
A/C clutch
Trailer tow park lamp relay
Heated backlite
Not used
PCM relay
Not used
Roll stability control module (RSC)
Trailer tow left hand stop/turn
relay
Trailer tow right hand stop/turn
relay
327
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
Fuse Amp
Rating
—
—
15A*
—
20A*
15A*
20A*
15A*
60A**
—
30A**
—
40A**
—
5A*
5A*
55
5A*
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
—
—
15A*
—
—
—
—
25A**
30A**
20A**
66
20A**
328
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Protected Circuits
Back up lamps relay
Electric fan relay
Heated mirror
Not used
Backup lamp relay
Upfitter 3
Trailer tow stop turn relay feed
Brake on/off (BOO) switch
RSC module
Not used
Wiper motor, washer pump
Not used
Blower motor relay
Not used
PCM, 6R80 transmission
4x4 module, Back up lamp, RSC,
Trailer tow battery charge relay
Electronic compass mirror (6R
transmission only)
Not used
Not used
Trailer tow backup lamps
Not used
One-touch Start diode
Fuel pump diode
Upfitter 3 relay
Electric fan
Amplifier
Auxiliary power point (instrument
panel)
Auxiliary power point (inside
center console)
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
Fuse Amp
Rating
—
20A**
30A**
—
—
20A**
—
30A**
15A*
20A*
77
10A*
78
79
15A*
10A*
80
81
82
5A*
—
10A*
83
—
84
—
85
—
* Mini Fuses ** Cartridge Fuses
Protected Circuits
Not used
4x4 module
Passenger heated/cooled seats
Not used
Not used
Auxiliary power point (Rear)
Not used
Driver power seat
PCM – voltage power 1
Voltage power 2, Voltage - battery
voltage, Mass air flow/Intake air
temp, CMS 12 and 22 with 6R80
transmission, Brake on/off switch
(BOO)
Voltage power 3, Electric fan
clutch, A/C clutch relay coil, Floor
shifter (4–speed transmission)
Ignition coils, Voltage power 4
CMS 4–speed transmission, 12 and
22 with 4–speed transmission
Steering wheel illumination
Not used
Trailer brake control module
(TBCM), After market center high
mounted stop lamp (CHMSL)
Not used
Not used
Electric fan relay (low speed)
329
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
CHANGING THE TIRES
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily.
Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly
and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator light will
illuminate when the spare tire is in use. To restore the full functionality
of the monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with tire pressure
monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage
to the TPMS sensors, refer to Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. Replace the spare
tire with a road tire as soon as possible. During repairing or replacing of
the flat tire, have the authorized dealer inspect the TPMS sensor for
damage.
WARNING: The use of tire sealants may damage your Tire
Pressure Monitoring System and should not be used.
WARNING: Refer to Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for important
information. If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged, it
will no longer function.
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information
WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for
temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should
replace it as soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size
and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by
Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be
replaced rather than repaired.
A dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that
is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter “T” for tire
size and may have “Temporary Use Only” molded in the sidewall
330
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire has
a label on the wheel that states: “THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR
TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label
• Tow a trailer
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel
location can lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire/wheel
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
331
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-Wheel driving capability (if applicable)
• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel and
seek service as soon as possible.
Stopping and securing the vehicle
1. Park on a level surface, activate
the hazard flashers and set the
parking brake.
2. Place the gearshift in P (Park)
and turn the engine off.
Location of the spare tire and tools
The spare tire is located under the vehicle, just forward of the rear
bumper. The jack, jack handle and lug wrench are located in the
following locations:
Body Style
Regular Cab
SuperCab
SuperCrew
Location
Attached to a floor bracket behind
the driver’s seat
Attached to a floor bracket under
the rear seat on the driver’s side
In a plastic box in the floor under
the rear seat
To remove the jack on Regular Cab and SuperCab models:
Remove the wing nut and turn the jack screw counterclockwise to
release pressure before removing the jack from the bracket.
332
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
To remove the jack on SuperCrew models:
1. Lift both rear seat cushions.
2. Remove the insert containing the Easy Fuel ™ funnel from the driver’s
side.
3. Remove the two small wing nuts on the passenger side.
4. Slide the plastic box toward the driver’s side and remove.
Removing the spare tire
1. Use the ignition key to remove
the lock cylinder from the access
hole of the bumper to allow access
to the guide tube. Assemble the jack
handle as shown in the illustration.
2. Fully insert the jack handle
through the bumper hole and into
the guide tube through the access
hole in the rear bumper.
3. Turn the handle counterclockwise until tire is lowered to the ground,
the tire can be slid rearward and the cable is slightly slack.
4. Slide the retainer through the center of the wheel.
Tire change procedure
WARNING: To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you
change a tire, be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in
both directions) the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and
end of the vehicle) to the tire being changed.
WARNING: If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else
could be seriously injured.
333
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
WARNING: Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to
avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the
wheel.
Note: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is
being jacked.
Refer to the instruction sheet (located with the jack) for detailed tire
change instructions.
1. Block the diagonally opposite
wheel.
2. Obtain the spare tire and jack
from their storage locations. Note:
F-150 SVT Raptor also includes a
chock, saddle extension and wing
bolt.
3. Use the tip of the lug wrench to remove any wheel trim that is
blocking the lug nuts.
4. Loosen each wheel lug nut
one-half turn counterclockwise but
do not remove them until the wheel
is raised off the ground.
Note: For F-150 SVT Raptor, install the saddle extension on the jack as
shown in the jack usage and storage instructions.
5. Position the jack according to the following guides and turn the jack
handle clockwise until the wheel is completely off the ground.
WARNING: When one of the rear wheels is off the ground, the
transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or
slipping off the jack, even if the transmission is in P (Park). To prevent
the vehicle from moving when you change the tire, be sure that the
parking brake is set and the diagonally opposite wheel is blocked. If
the vehicle slips off the jack, someone could be seriously injured.
334
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
• Front
Note: Use the frame rail as the jacking location point, NOT the control
arm.
Note: For F-150 SVT Raptor, you must always use the jack saddle
extension.
• Rear
Note: Never use the front or rear
differential as a jacking point.
WARNING: To lessen the risk of personal injury, do not put any
part of your body under the vehicle while changing a tire. Do not
start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack. The jack is only
meant for changing the tire.
335
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
6. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.
7. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is
facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the
hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered.
8. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
9. Remove the jack and fully tighten
the lug nuts in the order shown
(Refer to Wheel lug nut torque
specifications later in this chapter
for the proper lug nut torque
specification):
• Six lug nut wheel
• Seven lug nut wheel
10. Stow the flat tire. Refer to Stowing the flat/spare tire.
11. Stow the jack and lug wrench. Make sure the jack is fastened so it
does not rattle when you drive.
12. Unblock the wheels.
Stowing the flat/spare tire
Note: Failure to follow spare tire stowage instructions may result in
failure of cable or loss of spare tire.
1. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing in the direction
specified on the Tire Changing Instructions located with the jack
hardware.
2. Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the retainer
through the wheel center. Pull on the cable to align the components at
the end of the cable.
336
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
3. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its stowed
position underneath the vehicle. The effort to turn the jack handle
increases significantly and the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips when
the tire is raised to the maximum tightness. Tighten to the best of your
ability, to the point where the ratchet/slip occurs, if possible. The spare
tire carrier will not allow you to overtighten. If the spare tire carrier
ratchets or slips with little effort, take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer for assistance at your earliest convenience.
4. Check that the tire lies flat against the frame and is properly
tightened. Try to push or pull, then turn the tire to be sure it will not
move. Loosen and retighten, if necessary. Failure to properly stow the
spare tire may result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the tire.
5. Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire
pressure (every six months, as per your scheduled maintenance
information), or at any time that the spare tire is disturbed through
service of other components.
6. If removed, install the spare tire lock (if equipped) into the bumper
drive tube with the spare tire lock key (if equipped) and jack handle.
WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 km)
after any wheel disturbance (rotation, flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).
Bolt size
Wheel lug nut torque*
lb.ft.
N•m
M14 x 2.0
150
200
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any
corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting
surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or
brake disc that contacts the wheel. Ensure that any fasteners that
attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with
the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct
metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the
wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in
motion, resulting in loss of control.
337
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Note: Inspect the wheel pilot hole
prior to installation. If there is
visible corrosion in wheel pilot hole,
remove loose particles by wiping
with clean rag and apply grease.
Apply grease only to the wheel pilot
hole surface by smearing a “dime”
(1 square cm) sized glob of grease
around the wheel pilot surface (1)
with end of finger. DO NOT apply
grease to lugnut/stud holes or
wheel-to-brake surfaces.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
If you have run out of fuel and need to refill the vehicle with a portable
fuel container, see Running out of fuel in the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter for proper fuel filling method using a portable
fuel container and the included fuel filler funnel. Do not insert the
nozzle of portable fuel containers or any type of aftermarket funnels into
the Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel system as it can be damaged. You must
use the included funnel in such circumstances.
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers
or aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel™ system. This could
damage the fuel system and its seal, and may cause fuel to run onto
the ground instead of filling the tank, all of which could result in
serious personal injury.
JUMP STARTING
WARNING: The gases around the battery can explode if
exposed to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could
result in injury or vehicle damage.
WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin,
eyes and clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission
vehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-start
capability. Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic
transmission may cause transmission damage.
338
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Preparing your vehicle
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the
transmission may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is
considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update
transmission operation.
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
parts.
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
Connecting the jumper cables
+
+
–
–
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
339
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
+
+
–
–
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the assisting battery.
+
+
–
–
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
340
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
+
+
–
–
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the
carburetor/fuel injection system.
Note: Do not attach the negative (-) cable to fuel lines, engine rocker
covers, the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding
points.
WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may
cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
Jump starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
341
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Removing the jumper cables
+
+
–
–
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
+
+
–
–
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
342
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
–
+
+
–
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.
+
+
–
–
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
343
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
WRECKER TOWING
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
Ford recommends your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed. Do
not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not approved a
slingbelt towing procedure.
On 4x2 vehicles, it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the front wheels
on the ground (without dollies) and the rear wheels off the ground.
On 4x4 vehicles, it is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a
wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the
ground.
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle
damage may occur.
344
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Emergency towing
In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle (without access
to wheel dollies, car hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle) your
vehicle (regardless of transmission powertrain configuration) can be flat
towed (all wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• Vehicle is facing forward so that it is being towed in a forward
direction.
• Place the transmission in N (Neutral). If you cannot move the gear
shift lever, refer to Brake shift interlock in the Driving chapter for
instructions.
• Maximum speed is not to exceed 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km).
345
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized
Ford, Lincoln, or Mercury dealer. While any authorized dealer handling
your vehicle line will provide warranty service, we recommend you
return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your
continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and/or
equipment, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all
warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your
vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or
Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by
Ford.
Away from home
If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service, contact the
Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed
below to find the nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
Online
Additional information and resources are available online at
www.genuineservice.com.
• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name, City/State, or Zip Code
• Owner Guides
• Maintenance Schedules
• Recalls
• Ford Extended Service Plans
• Ford Genuine Accessories
• Service specials and promotions.
346
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
In Canada:
Mailing address (Ford vehicles)
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Online
www.ford.ca
Mailing address (Lincoln vehicles)
Lincoln Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
Telephone
1-800-387-9333
Online
www.lincolncanada.com
Additional assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center
In order to help you serve you better, please have the following
information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Your telephone number (home and business)
• The name of the authorized dealer and city where located
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading
In some states, you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing
remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also allowed a final
repair attempt in some states.
347
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB
AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement
or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute
handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights
or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
348
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM
(U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer.
If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three-step
procedure outlined on the first page of the Customer Assistance section,
you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and
arbitration. During mediation, a representative of the BBB will contact
both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of
the claim. If an agreement is not reached during mediation and your
claim is eligible, you may participate in the arbitration process. An
arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case
in an informal setting before an impartial person. The arbitrator will
consider the testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing.
You are not bound by the decision, but should you choose to accept the
BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford must abide by the accepted decision as
well. Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually
decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the information provided below,
please call or write to request a program application. You will be asked
for your name and address, general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will be
mailed that will need to be completed, signed and returned to the BBB
along with proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will review the
claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
4200 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 800
Arlington, Virginia 22203–1833
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford
Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time
without notice and without obligation.
349
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases
where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the
authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial
third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s
award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a regional
office or owner relations/customer relationship office.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle
back into the U.S.
350
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Central America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the nearest
authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: expcac@ford.com
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized
dealer. If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you, they can
direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of
the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations.
Customers in the U.S. should call 1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
P.O. Box 07150
Detroit, Michigan 48207
Or to order a free publication catalog, call toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s Guide
French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or
by writing to:
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
Service Publications CHQ202
The Canadian Road
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, ON, Canada
L6J 5E4
351
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport
Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510.
352
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Cleaning
WASHING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft威 Detail Wash (ZC-3-A), which is
available from your authorized dealer.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time. Use Motorcraft威 Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42), which is available from your authorized dealer.
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash off as soon as possible.
• If your vehicle is equipped with running boards, do not use
rubber, plastic and vinyl protectant products on the running
board surface, as the area may become slippery.
Exterior chrome
• Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, such as Motorcraft威 Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).
• Use Motorcraft威 Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15), available from
your authorized dealer. Apply the product as you would a wax to
clean bumpers and other chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a
few minutes, then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag.
• Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads
as they can scratch the chrome surface.
353
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Cleaning
• After polishing chrome bumpers, apply a coating of Motorcraft威
Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A), available from your authorized dealer,
or an equivalent quality product to help protect from environmental
effects.
WAXING
• Wash the vehicle first.
• Do not use waxes that contain abrasives; use Motorcraft威 Premium
Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A), which is available from your authorized dealer,
or an equivalent quality product.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
PAINT CHIPS
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color.
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jamb) to
your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint
finish. In order to maintain their shine:
• Clean weekly with Motorcraft威 Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A),
which is available from your authorized dealer. Heavy dirt and brake
dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse
thoroughly with a strong stream of water.
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft威 Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42), available from your authorized dealer.
354
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Cleaning
ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all parts
that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In Canada use
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (CXC-66-A).
• Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning
the engine.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark plug wire or spark plug
well, or the area in and around these locations.
4.6L ENGINE
355
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Cleaning
5.4L ENGINE
W
ER FLUID
SH
A
ONLY
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are
available from your authorized dealer.
• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft威 Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft威 Bug and Tar
Remover (ZC-42).
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the
vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include
hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellent
coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants
may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and
smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow these tips:
• The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with
a non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft威 Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23), available from your authorized dealer.
356
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Cleaning
• The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
Motorcraft威 Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (ZC-32-A),
available from your authorized dealer. This washer fluid contains
special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot
wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car
wash facilities. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear
worn or do not function properly.
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner
or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer
surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft
cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield
with water.
Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to clean the
inside of the rear window or to remove decals, as it may cause
damage to the rear window defroster’s heated grid lines (if
equipped).
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONSOLE
(HARLEY-DAVIDSON EDITION ONLY)
Your vehicle’s instrument panel and console are uniquely painted with
both high and low gloss paints that require special care. The high gloss
area is similar to that of the vehicle’s exterior; the low gloss area is
designed to help protect the driver from undesirable windshield
reflection.
High gloss paint area
In order to maintain the finish of the instrument panel and console, the
high gloss areas should be treated similar to the that of exterior paint or
glossy plastic surfaces. When cleaning the high gloss areas:
• Do not use paper towels or newspaper.
• Do not use silicone or Teflon威 (PTFE)-based products.
Dust the high gloss areas with a clean, dry cloth, or use Motorcraft
Dusting Cloth (ZC-24).
For general cleaning, use mild, soapy water and a soft, damp cloth, then
dry with a clean, dry cloth; or use Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23).
357
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Cleaning
For removal of fine scuffs and scratches, use Scotch-Brite威 Microfiber
Cloth or cheese cloth along with Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax
(ZC-53-A), Motorcraft Paint Sealant (ZC-45), or Motorcraft Custom Clear
Coat Polish (ZC-8-A). Note: Removal of deep scuffs and scratches
should be performed by an authorized dealer or an experienced repair
facility.
Low gloss paint area
The low gloss area of the instrument panel’s upper dash should be
cleaned with mild, soapy water and a soft, damp cloth, then dried with a
clean, dry cloth. When cleaning the low gloss areas:
• Do not use paper towels or newspaper.
• Do not use silicone or Teflon威 (PTFE)-based products.
• Do not use exterior paint waxes or sealants.
Dust the low gloss areas with a clean, dry cloth, or use Motorcraft
Dusting Cloth (ZC-24).
INSTRUMENT PANEL/INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS
Clean the instrument panel, interior trim areas and cluster lens with a
clean, damp, white cotton cloth, then use a clean and dry white cotton
cloth to dry these areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion
of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted
surfaces.
• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents
when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid
contamination of the airbag system.
If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has been spilled on the instrument
panel or on interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, white, cotton cloth.
2. Wipe the surface with a damp, clean, white cotton cloth. For more
thorough cleaning, use a mild soap and water solution. If the spot cannot
358
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Cleaning
be completely cleaned by this method, the area may be cleaned using a
commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive
interiors.
3. If necessary, apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product
to a clean, white, cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled
area–allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes.
4. Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to
clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds.
5. Following this, wipe area dry with a clean, white, cotton cloth.
INTERIOR
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and safety belts:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft威 Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54).
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft威 Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14). In Canada, use
Motorcraft威 Multi-Purpose Cleaner (CXC-101).
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
WARNING: Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the
vehicle’s seatbelts, as these actions may weaken the belt
webbing.
LEATHER SEATS
(IF EQUIPPED, EXCEPT FOR THE KING RANCH SUPERCREW)
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the
leather.
For King Ranch SuperCrew leather seats, refer to separate
section in this chapter.
• For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For
more thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap and water
solution. In Canada, use Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (CXC-93). Dry the
area with a soft cloth.
359
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Cleaning
• If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and
water solution, the leather may be cleaned using a commercially
available cleaning product designed for automotive interiors.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of
the clear, protective coating.
Note: In some instances, color or dye transfer can occur when wet
clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery. If this occurs, the
leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining.
Leather seats for the King Ranch SuperCrew only (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with seating covered in premium, top-grain
leather which is extremely durable, but still requires special care and
maintenance in order to ensure longevity and comfort.
Regular cleaning and conditioning will maintain the appearance of the
leather. Failure to care for the leather can result in drying out and fading
of the material.
Note: In some instances, color or dye transfer can occur when wet
clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery. If this occurs, the
leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining.
Cleaning
For dirt, use a vacuum cleaner then use a clean, damp cloth or soft
brush.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For more
thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap. If the leather
cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and water solution, the
leather may be cleaned using a commercially available cleaning product
“Tanners Preserve Leather Cleaner” and a 3M “Type T” scrubbing pad.
• Clean spills as quickly as possible.
• Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous part of the
leather as cleaners may darken the leather. For more specific cleaning
information, contact the King Ranch Saddle Shop at 1–800–282–KING
(5464).
• Do not spill coffee, ketchup, mustard, orange juice or oil-based
products on the leather as they may permanently stain the leather.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl or plastics.
360
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Cleaning
Scratches
Natural Markings - Because the leather in the seat comes from genuine
steer hides, there will be evidence of naturally occurring markings, such
as small scars. These markings give character to the seating covers and
should be considered as proof of a genuine leather product.
In order to lessen the appearance of certain scratches and other wear
marks, apply conditioner on the affected area following the same
instructions as in the Conditioning section.
Conditioning
Bottles of King Ranch Leather Conditioner are available at the King
Ranch Saddle Shop. Visit the Web site at www.krsaddleshop.com, or
telephone (in the United States) 1–800–282–KING (5464). If you are
unable to obtain King Ranch Leather Conditioner, use another premium
leather conditioner.
• Apply your first conditioning treatment within six months of taking
delivery of your vehicle. Condition twice yearly in order to replenish
lost oils and revitalize the aroma, suppleness and resilience of the
leather.
• Clean the surfaces using the steps outlined in the Cleaning section.
• Ensure the leather is dry then apply a nickel-sized amount of
conditioner to a clean, dry cloth
• Rub the conditioner into leather until it disappears. Allow the
conditioner to dry and repeat the process for the entire interior. If a
film appears, wipe off film with a dry, clean cloth.
UNDERBODY
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
361
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Cleaning
FORD AND LINCOLN MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS
Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury authorized dealer has many quality
products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These
quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your
automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style
and appearance of your vehicle. Each product is made from high quality
materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use
the following products or products of equivalent quality:
Motorcraft威 Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft威 Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft威 Custom Clear Coat Polish (ZC-8-A)
Motorcraft威 Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
Motorcraft威 Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
Motorcraft威 Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
Motorcraft威 Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A)
Motorcraft威 Multi-Purpose Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-101)
Motorcraft威 Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft威 Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A)
Motorcraft威 Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (U.S. only)
(ZC-32-A)
Motorcraft威 Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Motorcraft威 Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14)
Motorcraft威 Tire Clean and Shine (ZC-28)
Motorcraft威 Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)
Motorcraft威 Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Motorcraft威 Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A)
362
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenance
information which makes tracking routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can
provide the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty
Guide/Customer Information Guide to find out which parts and
services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft威 parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other lit material away from the battery and
all fuel related parts.
WARNING: Turn off the power running boards, if equipped,
before working under the vehicle, jacking or placing any object
under the vehicle. Never place your hand between the extended
running board and the vehicle. A moving running board may cause
injury.
Working with the engine off
1. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly.
Working with the engine on
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Block the wheels.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or
personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
363
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
OPENING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under the
bottom of the instrument panel.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and release the auxiliary latch that is
located on the front bumper under the grill.
3. Lift the hood until the lift cylinders hold it open.
364
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
4.6L V8
1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
2. Transmission fluid dipstick (4.6L 2V only)
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Engine coolant reservoir
5. Air filter assembly
6. Power steering fluid reservoir
7. Power distribution box
8. Engine oil filler cap
9. Battery
365
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
5.4L V8
1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
2. Engine oil dipstick
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Engine coolant reservoir
5. Air filter assembly
6. Power steering fluid reservoir
7. Power distribution box
8. Engine oil filler cap
9. Battery
366
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the
level is low. In very cold weather, do
not fill the reservoir completely.
Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specification WSB-M8B16-A2.
Do not use any special washer fluid
such as windshield water repellent
type fluid or bug wash. They may
cause squeaking, chatter noise,
streaking and smearing. Refer to the
Maintenance product
specifications and capacities section in this chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below
40°F (5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure
to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could
result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or
accident.
Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system
components.
367
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
1. Pull the wiper arm away from the
vehicle. Turn the blade at an angle
from the wiper arm. Press the lock
tab to release the blade and pull the
wiper blade down toward the
windshield to remove it from the
arm.
2. Attach the new wiper to the
wiper arm and press it into place
until a click is heard.
Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.
Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield. Refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning
chapter.
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
wiper rubber element.
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil
Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
368
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
5. Locate and carefully remove the
engine oil level dipstick.
6. Wipe the dipstick clean. Insert
the dipstick fully, then remove it
again.
• If the oil level is between the
lower and upper holes or
between the MIN and MAX
marks (depending on
application), the oil level is
acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL.
• If the oil level is below the lower hole or the MIN mark, add enough
oil to raise the level within the lower and upper holes or within the
MIN-MAX range.
• Oil levels above the upper hole or the MAX mark may cause engine
damage. Some oil must be removed from the engine by an authorized
dealer.
7. Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated.
Adding engine oil
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine
oil in this chapter.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only certified
engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oil filler cap
and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening.
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
normal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick.
4. Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
1/4 of a turn until three clicks are heard or until the cap is fully seated.
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the
engine oil level dipstick and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
369
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Engine oil and filter recommendations
Look for this certification
trademark.
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers.
To protect your engine and engine’s warranty, use Motorcraft威 SAE
5W-20 or an equivalent SAE 5W-20 oil meeting Ford specification
WSS-M2C930-A. SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and
durability performance meeting all requirements for your
vehicle’s engine. Refer to Maintenance product specifications and
capacities later in this chapter for more information.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that
is not covered by Ford warranty.
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule
listed in the scheduled maintenance information.
Ford production and Motorcraft威 replacement oil filters are designed for
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up
engine noises or knock may be experienced.
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft威 oil filter or
another with equivalent performance for your engine application.
370
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Motorcraft威 maintenance-free
battery which normally does not
require additional water during its
life of service.
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be
disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an
extended period of time. This will minimize the discharge of your battery
during storage.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to
the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which
can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks
or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the
battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide
proper ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive
pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or
battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
371
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries
contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against
possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or
eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and
get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician
immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Battery relearn
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. Flexible fuel vehicles (FFV) must also relearn the ethanol
content of the fuel for optimum driveability and performance. To begin
this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Release the parking brake. With your foot on the brake pedal and with
the A/C on, put the vehicle in D (Drive) and allow the engine to idle for
at least one minute.
7. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
• The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy along with the ethanol content
for flexible fuel vehicles.
• If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle quality
of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle trim is
eventually relearned.
• For flexible fuel vehicles, if you are operating on E85, you may
experience poor starts or an inability to start the engine and
driveability problems until the fuel trim and ethanol content have been
relearned.
372
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
R
TU
LE
AD
RE
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
• Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner.
Follow your local authorized
standards for disposal. Call your
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
N
RECYCLE
ENGINE COOLANT
Checking engine coolant
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information. The coolant
concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and distilled water,
which equates to a freeze point of -34°F (-36°C). Coolant concentration
testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester. The level of
coolant should be maintained at the FULL COLD level or within the
COLD FILL RANGE in the coolant reservoir. If the level falls below, add
coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section.
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A
50/50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:
• Freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C).
• Boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.
• Proper function of calibrated gauges.
373
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
When the engine is cold, check the
level of the engine coolant in the
reservoir.
• The engine coolant should be at the FULL COLD level or within the
COLD FILL RANGE as listed on the engine coolant reservoir
(depending upon application).
• Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval
schedules.
• Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your
vehicle in this chapter.
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding
engine coolant in this chapter.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding engine coolant
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.
WARNING: Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot.
Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system
can burn you badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts.
WARNING: Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer
fluid container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant
could make it difficult to see through the windshield.
374
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• Do not mix coolants. Add the coolant type originally equipped
in your vehicle. Refer to Maintenance product specifications and
capacities in this chapter.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets or cooling system sealants/additives
as they can cause damage to the engine cooling and/or heating systems.
This damage would not be covered under your vehicle’s warranty.
• A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants
mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol
and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or
freezing.
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These
can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine
coolant.
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and
water to the FULL COLD level. For all other vehicles which have a
coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to
remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with
an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the
engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap.
The cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the cooling system by
following these steps:
1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (a translucent plastic bottle).
Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
375
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture, to
within the COLD FILL RANGE or the FULL COLD level on the reservoir.
If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill the radiator
until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full.
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. Cap must be tightly
installed to prevent coolant loss.
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration (refer
to Checking engine coolant). If the concentration is not 50/50
(protection to –34°F/–36°C), drain some coolant and adjust the
concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50
coolant concentration.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.
If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per
month, have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system.
Your cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low
level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine
damage.
Recycled engine coolant
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
Coolant refill capacity
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer
to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant
in this section.
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –34°F [–36°C]):
• It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration
above 50%.
376
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
• Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the
winter months.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration
above 40%.
• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system
and engine protection.
What you should know about fail-safe cooling (if equipped)
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load
and terrain.
How fail-safe cooling works
If the engine begins to overheat:
• The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red (hot)
area.
• The mini message center (if equipped) will indicate “Check Gauges”,
refer to Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster
chapter.
377
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• The
light will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature:
• The engine will completely shut down.
• Steering and braking effort will increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
When fail-safe mode is activated
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
5. Restart the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem
increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with
the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed.
378
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS
Important safety precautions
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an
overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear
a hissing sound near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel™ “no cap”
fuel system), do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious personal injury.
WARNING: Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death
if misused or mishandled.
WARNING: Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain benzene,
which is a cancer-causing agent.
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials
and any open flames before
fueling your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
fueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful
or fatal if swallowed. Fuels such as gasoline and ethanol are highly
toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is
swallowed, call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are
immediately apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for
hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
379
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline and/or
ethanol vapors, or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In
sensitive individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If
fuel is splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap
and water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an
adverse reaction.
• FFV fuel tanks may contain zero to 85 percent ethanol. Any fuel
blends containing gasoline and ethanol should be treated the same as
“Fuel Ethanol.” Flex fuel vehicles have a yellow bezel placed over the
fuel fill inlet.
Pure ethanol is the alcohol which is the intoxicating agent in liquor, beer
and wine. It is distilled from the fermentation of plants such as field corn
and sugar cane. When ethanol is produced for use in motor fuels, a small
amount of gasoline is added to make it unfit for beverage use. The
resulting ethanol blend is called denatured fuel ethanol meaning that it is
denatured with 2% to 5% gasoline and is suitable for automotive use.
During the summer season, fuel ethanol may contain a maximum of 85%
denatured ethanol (Ed85) and 15% unleaded gasoline. The fuel ethanol
has a higher octane rating than unleaded regular or premium gasoline
and this allows the design of engines with greater efficiency and power.
Winter blends may contain up to 75% denatured ethanol (Ed75) and up
to 25% unleaded gasoline to enhance cold engine starts. Severely cold
weather may require additional measures for reliable starting.
Ethanol is more chemically active than gasoline. It corrodes some metals
and causes some plastic and rubber components to swell, break down or
become brittle and crack, especially when mixed with gasoline. Special
materials and procedures have been developed for flexible fuel vehicles
and the dispensers used by ethanol fuel providers.
WARNING: Flexible fuel components and standard unleaded
gasoline fuel components are not interchangeable. If your vehicle
is not serviced in accordance with flexible fuel vehicles procedures,
damage may occur and your warranty may be invalidated.
380
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and
never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never
smoke while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
WARNING: The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can
produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is
pumped into an ungrounded fuel container.
Refueling
•
•
•
•
•
•
WARNING: Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause
severe injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:
Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island;
Turn off your engine when you are refueling;
Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle;
Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel;
Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle — this is against the law in some places;
Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump
fuel.
Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when
filling an ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the ground.
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel system
Your fuel tank is equipped with an Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel filler
system. This allows you to simply open the fuel filler door and insert the
fuel filler nozzle into the fuel system. The Easy Fuel™ system is
self-sealing and protected against dust, dirt, water and snow/ice.
381
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the fuel filler door.
3. Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully into the fuel system. Pump fuel
as normal.
4. After you are done pumping fuel, slowly remove the fuel filler
nozzle—allow about five seconds after pumping fuel before removing the
fuel filler nozzle. This allows residual fuel to drain back into the fuel tank
and not spill onto the vehicle.
Note: A fuel spillage concern may occur if overfilling the fuel tank. Do
not overfill the tank to the point that the fuel is able to bypass the fuel
filler nozzle. The overfilled fuel may run down the drain located below
and in front of the fuel filler door.
If the check fuel fill inlet lamp or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message
comes on, the fuel fill inlet may not have properly closed. The inlet may
have stuck open or debris may be preventing the inlet from fully closing.
At the next opportunity, safely pull off the road, turn off the engine,
open the fuel filler door and remove any visible debris from the fuel fill
opening. Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the fuel fill funnel (see
Refilling with a portable fuel container for funnel location) provided
with the vehicle several times to dislodge any debris and/or allow the
inlet to close properly. If this action corrects the problem, the check fuel
fill inlet lamp or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message may not reset
immediately. It may take several driving cycles for the check fuel fill inlet
lamp or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message to turn off. A driving cycle
consists of an engine start-up (after four or more hours with the engine
off) followed by city/highway driving. Continuing to drive with the check
fuel fill inlet lamp or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message on may cause
the service engine soon lamp to turn on as well.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear
a hissing sound near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel™ “no cap”
fuel system), do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious personal injury.
382
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Flex Fuel Vehicle (FFV) fuel fill inlet
If your vehicle is flex fuel capable, it will have a yellow bezel placed over
the fuel fill inlet.
Choosing the right fuel
If your vehicle is a flexible fuel vehicle (FFV), use only UNLEADED
FUEL and FUEL ETHANOL (Ed75–Ed85).
If your vehicle is not a flexible fuel vehicle (FFV), then only use
UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum of 10%
ethanol. Do not use fuel ethanol (E85), diesel, methanol, leaded fuel or
any other fuel.
The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and could damage your
vehicle.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives.
Note: Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause
powertrain damage, a loss of vehicle performance, and repairs may not
be covered under warranty.
Octane recommendations
Your vehicle is designed to use “Regular” unleaded gasoline with a pump
(R+M)/2 octane rating of 87. Some stations offer fuels posted as
“Regular” with an octane rating below 87, particularly in high altitude
areas. Fuels with octane levels below 87 are not recommended.
383
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Do not be concerned if your engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However,
if it knocks heavily under most
driving conditions while you are
(R+M)/2 METHOD
using fuel with the recommended
octane rating, see your authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage.
87
FFV engine (if equipped)
If your vehicle is flex fuel capable, it is designed to use Fuel Ethanol
(Ed75–Ed85), “Regular” unleaded gasoline or any mixture of the two
fuels.
Use of other fuels such as Fuel Methanol may cause powertrain
damage, a loss of vehicle performance, and your warranty may be
invalidated.
It is best not to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85. If you do
switch fuels, it is recommended that you add as much fuel as
possible—at least half a tank. Do not add less than five gallons (18.9L)
when refueling. You should drive the vehicle immediately after refueling
for at least 5 miles (8 km) to allow the vehicle to adapt to the change in
ethanol concentration.
If you operate your vehicle 50% or more of the time on ethanol, you
should follow a different maintenance schedule. In addition to this, if you
exclusively use E85 fuel, it is also recommended to fill the fuel tank with
regular unleaded gasoline once every 3,000 miles (4,800 km). See
scheduled maintenance information for more information.
Fuel quality
Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank. It
should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane
rating. These products have not been approved for your engine and
could cause damage to the fuel system. Repairs to correct the effects of
using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your
warranty.
Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-Wide Fuel Charter
that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved
performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.
Gasolines that meet the World-Wide Fuel Charter should be used when
available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the
World-Wide Fuel Charter.
384
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Cleaner air
Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to
improve air quality, per the recommendations in the Choosing the right
fuel section.
Running out of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
effect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine. On restarting, cranking time will take a few seconds longer
than normal.
• Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8L) of fuel is enough to restart the
engine. If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than
1 gallon (3.8L) may be required.
indicator may come on. For more
• The service engine soon
information on the service engine soon indicator, refer to Warning
lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Refilling with a portable fuel container
With the Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel system, use the following directions
when filling from a portable fuel container:
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers
or aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel™ system. This could
damage the fuel system and its seal, and may cause fuel to run onto
the ground instead of filling the tank, which could result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not try to pry open or push open the Easy
Fuel™ system with foreign objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you or others.
When filling the vehicle’s fuel tank from a portable fuel container, use the
funnel included with the vehicle.
385
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
1. Locate the white plastic funnel. It
is located under the second row
driver side seat near the spare tire
tool box.
2. Slowly insert the funnel into the Easy Fuel™ system.
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel from the portable fuel container.
4. When done, clean the funnel or properly dispose of it. Extra funnels
can be purchased from your authorized dealer if you choose to dispose
of the funnel. Do not use aftermarket funnels; they will not work with
the Easy Fuel™ system and can damage it. The included funnel has
been specially designed to work safely with your vehicle.
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY
Measuring techniques
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend
taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles
(1,600 km) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more
accurate measurement after 2,000 miles–3,000 miles (3,000 km–5,000
km).
Filling the tank
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance
product specifications and capacities section of this chapter.
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your
386
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
• Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,
an error in the reading may result if the engine is left running.
• Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time
the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than three automatic click-offs when filling.
• Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.
• Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.
• Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the
same direction each time you fill up.
• Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.
Calculating fuel economy
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading
(in miles or kilometers).
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in
gallons or liters).
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer
reading.
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel
economy:
Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.
Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total
kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.
387
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Habits
• Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.
• Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel
economy.
• Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste
fuel.
• Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
• Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.
• Slow down gradually.
• Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
• Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.
• Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.
• You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if
unnecessary shifting between the top gears occurs. Unnecessary
shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy.
• Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may
reduce fuel economy.
• Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel
economy.
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
Maintenance
• Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.
• Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel
economy.
• Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Maintenance product
specifications and capacities in this chapter.
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks
found in scheduled maintenance information.
Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy
at any speed.
• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).
388
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may
reduce fuel economy.
• To maximize the fuel economy, drive with the tonneau cover installed
(if equipped).
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first
8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to
driving on hilly terrain.
• Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.
• Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped) is less fuel efficient than
two-wheel-drive operation.
• Close windows for high speed driving.
EPA fuel economy estimates
Every new vehicle should have a sticker on the window called the
Monroney Label which contains EPA fuel economy estimates. Contact
your authorized dealer if the Monroney Label is not supplied with your
vehicle. The EPA fuel economy estimates should be your guide for the
fuel economy comparisons with other vehicles. Your fuel economy may
vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
• Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance
information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle
and to its emissions system.
389
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
If other than Ford, Motorcraft威 or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system
warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors,
smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control
system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust
to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust
system inspected and repaired immediately.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and
potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your Warranty Guide/Customer Information Guide for
complete emission warranty information.
On board diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your
authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle. When the service
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected
engine soon
a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause the service engine
indicator to illuminate. Examples are:
soon
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly.
390
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have been properly closed. See Easy Fuel™
“no cap” fuel system in this chapter.
4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the
electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the service engine soon
indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started. A driving
cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city/highway
driving. No additional vehicle service is required.
indicator remains on, have your vehicle
If the service engine soon
serviced at the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions
detected by the OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent,
indicator on can
continued driving with the service engine soon
result in increased emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness, and lead to more costly repairs.
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing
Some state/provincial and local governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent
you from getting a vehicle registration. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M
indicator is on or not working
test if the service engine soon
properly (bulb is burned out), or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems have not been properly
checked. In this case, the vehicle is considered not ready for I/M testing.
indicator is on or the bulb does not
If the service engine soon
work, the vehicle may need to be serviced. Refer to the On board
diagnostics (OBD-II) description in this chapter.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the
battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may
indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the
vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the on position
for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the service engine
indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not
soon
ready for I/M testing; if the service engine soon
indicator stays on
solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for I/M testing.
391
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system
during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting
of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:
15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway/highway followed by
20 minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle
periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. If
the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above driving cycle will
have to be repeated.
POWER STEERING FLUID
Check the power steering fluid. Refer to scheduled maintenance
information.
1. Start the engine and let it run
until it reaches normal operating
temperature (the engine coolant
temperature gauge indicator will be
near the center of the normal area
between H and C).
2. While the engine idles, turn the
steering wheel left and right several
times.
3. Turn the engine off.
4. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. It should be between the MIN
and MAX lines. Do not add fluid if the level is in this range.
5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking
the level until it reaches the range between the MIN and MAX lines. Be
sure to put the cap back on the reservoir. Refer to Maintenance
product specifications and capacities in this chapter for the proper
fluid type.
392
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
BRAKE FLUID
The fluid level will drop slowly as
the brakes wear, and will rise when
the brake components are replaced.
Fluid levels between the MIN and
MAX lines are within the normal
operating range; there is no need to
add fluid. If the fluid levels are
outside of the normal operating
range, the performance of the
system could be compromised; seek
service from your authorized dealer
immediately.
TRANSMISSION FLUID
Checking 4-speed automatic transmission fluid
Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled
intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not
consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the
transmission is not working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or
shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is at normal operating
temperature (approximately 20 miles [30 km]). If your vehicle has been
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic during hot
weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be turned off for about
30 minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking.
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 km) or until it reaches normal operating
temperature.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal,
start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear
ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage.
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If
necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment
in this chapter for the location of the dipstick.
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube.
393
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in
the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient
temperature.
Low fluid level
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid
level is at the bottom of the dipstick
and the ambient temperature is
above 50°F (10°C).
Correct fluid level
The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating
temperature 150°F-170°F (66°C-77°C) on a level surface. The normal
operating temperature can be reached after approximately 20 miles
(30 km) of driving.
You can check the fluid without driving if the ambient temperature is
above 50°F (10°C). However, if fluid is added at this time, an overfill
condition could result when the vehicle reaches normal operating
temperature.
The transmission fluid should be in
this range if at normal operating
temperature (150°F-170°F
[66°C-77°C]).
The transmission fluid should be in
this range if at ambient temperature
(50°F-95°F [10°C-35°C]).
High fluid level
Fluid levels above the safe range
may result in transmission failure.
An overfill condition of transmission
fluid may cause shift and/or
engagement concerns and/or
possible damage.
High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition.
394
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick. Refer to Maintenance
product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause
internal transmission component damage.
If necessary, add fluid in 1/2 pint (250 ml) increments through the filler
tube until the level is correct.
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid
should be removed by an authorized
dealer.
An overfill condition of
transmission fluid may cause
shift and/or engagement concerns and/or possible damage.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
Checking 6-speed automatic transmission fluid
The automatic transmission does not have a transmission fluid dipstick.
Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled
intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not
consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the
transmission is not working properly, (i.e., if the transmission slips or
shifts slowly) or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Transmission fluid should be checked by an authorized dealer. If
required, fluid should be added by an authorized dealer.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
395
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
TRANSFER CASE FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Clean the filler plug.
2. Remove the filler plug and
inspect the fluid level.
LL
FI
D
I
RA
N
3. Add only enough fluid through
the filler opening so that the fluid
level is at the bottom of the
opening.
Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to the Maintenance
product specifications and capacities section in this chapter.
AIR FILTER
Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for changing the air filter element.
When changing the air filter element, use only the air filter element
listed. Refer to Motorcraft威 part numbers in this chapter.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or
personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
396
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Changing the air filter element
1. Locate the mass air flow sensor
electrical connector on the air outlet
tube. This connector will need to be
unplugged.
2. Reposition the locking clip on the
connector (connector shown from
below for clarity), squeeze the
connector and pull it off of the air
outlet tube.
3. Clean the area around the air
tube to air cover connection to
prevent debris from entering the
system and then loosen the bolt on
the air tube clamp so the clamp is
no longer snug to the air tube. It is
not necessary to completely remove
the clamp.
4. Pull the air tube off from the air
cleaner housing.
397
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
5. Release the three clamps that
secure the cover to the air filter
housing. Push the air filter cover
toward the center of the vehicle and
up slightly to release it.
6. Remove the air filter element
from the air filter housing.
7. Install a new air filter element.
8. Replace the air filter housing
cover and secure the clamps. Be
careful not to crimp the filter
element edges between the air filter
housing and cover and ensure that
the tabs on the edge are properly
aligned into the slots.
9. Slip the air tube onto the air filter
housing and tighten the air-tube
clamp bolt snugly, but do not
overtighten it.
398
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
10. Reconnect the mass air flow
sensor electrical connector to the
outlet tube. Make sure the locking
tab on the connector is in the
“locked” position (connector shown
from below for clarity).
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS
Component
4.6L 2V V8
engine
Air filter element FA-1883
Battery
BTX-59 or
BTX-65-6502
Oil Filter
FL-820-S
1
Spark plugs
4.6L 3V V8
engine
FA-1883
BTX-59 or
BTX-65-6502
FL-820-S
5.4L V8
engine
FA-1883
BTX-59 or
BTX-65-6502
FL-820-S
1
For spark plug replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the spark plugs.
Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft威 or
equivalent replacement parts. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not
used.
2
Heavy-duty battery, if equipped.
399
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
400
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
5.4L engine coolant
4.6L 3V engine coolant
4.6L 2V engine coolant
5.4L engine oil
4.6L engine oil
Brake fluid
Item
Capacity
Ford part name or
equivalent
Between
Motorcraft威 High
Performance DOT 3
MIN/MAX on
brake fluid
Motor Vehicle Brake
reservoir
Fluid
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-20
Premium Synthetic
Blend Motor Oil (US)
6.0 quarts (5.7L)
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-20
Full Synthetic Motor Oil
(US)
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-20
Super Premium Motor
Oil (Canada)
7.0 quarts (6.6L)
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-20
Synthetic Motor Oil
(Canada)1
16.4 quarts
(15.5L)
Motorcraft威 Premium
15.8 quarts
Gold Engine Coolant
(15.0L)
with bittering agent
(yellow-colored)2
16.9 quarts
(16.0L)
MAINTENANCE PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES
VC-7–B /
WSS-M97B51–A1
•XO-5W20–QSP (US)
•XO-5W-20 QFS (US)
•CXO-5W20–LSP12
(Canada)
•CXO-5W-20-LFS12
(Canada) /
WSS-M2C930–A and API
Certification Mark
PM-1-C /
WSS-M6C62-A or
WSS-M6C65-A1
Ford part number /
Ford specification
Maintenance and Specifications
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fill to between
MIN and MAX
lines on reservoir
1.6 quarts (1.5L)5
13.9 quarts
(13.2L)6
(4.6L 2V engine)
Power steering fluid
Transfer case fluid
(4X4 / AWD)
Automatic transmission
fluid (4R75E)
Motorcraft威
MERCON威 V
ATF
Motorcraft威 Transfer
Case Fluid
Motorcraft威
MERCON威 LV
ATF7
XT-10-QLV /
MERCON威 LV
XL-12 /
—
XT-5-QM /
MERCON威 V
XG-4 or XL-5 /
ESB-M1C93-B
Motorcraft威
Multi-Purpose Grease
—
XY-75W140-QL /
WSL-M2C192-A
XG-1-C /
ESA-M1C75-B
5.5 pints (2.6L)3
Rear 8.8/9.75 inch axle
fluid
XY-80W-90-QL /
WSP-M2C197-A
Ford part number /
Ford specification
VC-6 /
WSS-M99B37-B6
Premium Long-Life
Grease
3.5 pints (1.8L)
Front axle (4X4)
Ford part name or
equivalent
Motorcraft威 Cooling
System Stop Leak Pellets
Motorcraft威 SAE 80W-90
Premium Rear Axle
Lubricant
Motorcraft威 SAE
75W-140 Rear Synthetic
Axle Lubricant4
—
—
Cooling system stop
leak pellets
Transmission
/steering/parking brake
linkages and pivots,
brake pedal shaft
Hinges, latches, striker
plates, seat tracks, fuel
filler door hinge and
door check arm
Capacity
Item
Maintenance and Specifications
401
402
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuel tank SuperCrew
6.5’ box
Fuel tank SuperCrew
5.5’ box
Fuel tank
Reg. Cab 6.5’ box /
SuperCab 5.5’ box
26.0 gallons
(98.4L) Standard
36.0 gallons
(136.2L) Optional
26.0 gallons
(98.4L) Standard
36.0 gallons
(136.2L) Optional
26.0 gallons
(98.4L)
—
—
—
—
—
—
ZC-32-A /
WSB-M8B16-A2
Motorcraft威 Premium
Windshield Washer
Concentrate
Automatic transmission
fluid (6R80)
Windshield washer fluid 4.25 quarts (4.0L)
XT-10-QLV /
MERCON威 LV
Motorcraft威
MERCON威 LV
ATF7
12.1 quarts
(11.4L)6
(4.6L 3V engine)
13.1 quarts
(12.4L)
(5.4L engine)
Ford part number /
Ford specification
Ford part name or
equivalent
Capacity
Item
Maintenance and Specifications
26.0 gallons
(98.4L) Standard
36.0 gallons
(136.2L) Optional
Fuel tank
Reg. Cab 8’ box /
SuperCab 6.5’ box /
SuperCab 8’ box
—
Ford part name or
equivalent
—
Ford part number /
Ford specification
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Your vehicle’s rear axle is filled with a synthetic rear axle lubricant and is considered lubricated
for life. These lubricants do not need to be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected, service
is required or the axle assembly has been submerged in water. The axle lubricant should be
changed any time the rear axle has been submerged in water.
5
Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transfer case to the bottom of the filler hole
with the vehicle on a level surface.
6
Approximate dry fill capacity including transmission fluid cooling system, actual refill capacities
will vary based on vehicle application and transmission fluid cooling system (i.e. coolers size,
cooling lines, auxiliary cooler capacities). The amount of transmission fluid and fluid level should
be set by the indication on the dipstick’s normal operating range.
7
Automatic transmissions that require MERCON威 LV should only use MERCON威 LV fluid. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information to determine the correct service interval. Use of any fluid
other than the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.
4
Add 4 oz. (118 ml) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent meeting Ford specification
EST-M2C118-A, for complete fill of 8.8 inch and 9.75 inch Traction-Lok axles.
Service refill capacity is determined by filling the axle to 1/4-9/16 inch (6-14 mm) below the
bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface.
3
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
2
Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the
requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark.
1
Capacity
Item
Maintenance and Specifications
403
Maintenance and Specifications
ENGINE DATA
Engine
Cubic inches
Fuel
Firing order
Ignition system
Spark plug gap
Compression
ratio
4.6L 2V V8
engine
281
87 octane
4.6L 3V V8
engine
281
87 octane
5.4L V8 engine
330
87 octane or
Ethanol (E85)
1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8
1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8
1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8
Coil on plug
Coil on plug
Coil on plug
0.052–0.056 inch 0.039–0.043 inch 0.039–0.043 inch
(1.32–1.42mm) (1.0–1.1mm)
(1.0–1.1mm)
9.4:1
9.8:1
9.8:1
404
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Engine drivebelt routing
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Compliance Certification Label
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Safety Compliance
Certification Label be affixed to a
vehicle and prescribe where the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label may be located. The Safety
Compliance Certification Label is
located on the structure (B-Pillar)
by the trailing edge of the driver’s
door or the edge of the driver’s
door.
405
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number is
located on the driver side
instrument panel.
Please note that in the graphic,
XXXX is representative of your
vehicle identification number.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following
information:
1. World manufacturer identifier
2. Brake system / Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) / Restraint
Devices and their location
3. Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
4. Engine type
5. Check digit
6. Model year
7. Assembly plant
8. Production sequence number
406
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATIONS
You can find a transmission code on
the Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The following table tells you
which transmission each code
represents.
Description
Four-speed automatic (4R75E)
Six-speed automatic (6R80)
Code
Q
6
407
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Accessories
GENUINE FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE
A wide selection of Genuine Ford Accessories are available for your
vehicle through your local Ford or Ford of Canada dealer. These quality
accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive
needs; they are custom designed to complement the style and
aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each accessory is
made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford’s rigorous
engineering and safety specifications. Ford Motor Company will repair or
replace any properly dealer-installed Genuine Ford Accessories found to
be defective in factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the
warranty period, as well as any component damaged by the defective
accessories. The accessories will be warranted for whichever provides
you the greatest benefit:
• 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) (whichever occurs first), or
• the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty.
The following is a list of several Genuine Ford Accessories. Not all
accessories are available for all models. For a complete listing of the
accessories that are available for your vehicle, please contact your dealer
or visit our online store at: www.fordaccessories.com.
Exterior style
Bug shields
Chrome exhaust tips
Deflectors
Running boards
Step bars
Wheels
Interior style
Ambient lighting
Electrochromatic compass/temperature interior mirrors
Power sliding rear window
Floor mats
Lifestyle
Ash cup / smoker’s package
Bedliners and bedmats
408
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Accessories
Bed side step
Interior cargo organization and management
Truck bed cargo organization and management
Towing mirrors
Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and accessories
Peace of mind
Keyless entry keypad
Locking gas plug for capless fuel system
Remote start
Vehicle security systems
Wheel locks
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification label). Consult your authorized dealer for
specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service
technician.
• Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive
use.
• To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock
braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas
onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in
the area of the driver’s side hood.
• Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to
the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
409
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Ford Extended Service Plan
FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS
More than 30 million Ford, Lincoln, and Mercury owners have discovered
the powerful protection of Ford ESP. It is the only extended service plan
backed by Ford Motor Company, and provides “peace of mind”
protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage.
Up to 500+ Covered Vehicle Components
There are four, new-vehicle Extended Service Plans with different levels
of coverage. Ask you dealer for details.
PremiumCare – Our most comprehensive coverage. With over 500
covered components, this plan is so complete that we generally only
discuss what’s not covered!
ExtraCare – Covers 113 components, and includes many high-tech
items.
BaseCare – Covers 84 components.
PowertrainCare – Covers 29 critical components.
Ford ESP is honored by all Ford, Lincoln and Mercury Dealers in
the U.S. and Canada It’s the only extended service plan authorized and
backed by Ford Motor Company. That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service anywhere you go.
• Factory-trained technicians.
• Genuine Ford and Motorcraft威 Parts.
Rental car reimbursement
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs, you are
eligible for rental car coverage, including Bumper-to-Bumper warranty
repairs, or manufacturer’s recalls.
Transferable coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford ESP coverage expires, you can
transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner. Whenever you’re
ready to sell your car, prospective buyers may feel better about taking a
risk on your used vehicle. Ford ESP may add resale value!
Plus, exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump starts.
• Out-of-fuel and lock-out assistance.
• Travel expense reimbursement for lodging, meals and rental car.
• Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car coverage and
emergency transportation.
410
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Ford Extended Service Plan
Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One service bill – the cost of parts and labor – can easily exceed the
price of your Ford ESP Service Contract. With Ford ESP, you minimize
your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs.
Avoid the rising cost of properly maintaining your vehicle!
Ford ESP also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers items that
routinely wear out.
The coverage is prepaid, so you never have to worry about affording
your vehicle maintenance. It covers regular checkups, routine
inspections, preventive care and replacement of items that require
periodic attention for normal “wear”:
• Wiper blades
• Brake pads and linings
• Spark plugs (except
• Shock absorbers
California)
• Clutch disc
• Belts and hoses
Contact your selling Ford, Lincoln, or Mercury dealership today so they
can customize a Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your driving
lifestyle and budget.
Interest free finance options available
Take advantage of our installment payment plan, just a 10% down
payment will provide you with an affordable no interest, no-fee payment
opportunity.
411
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Ford Extended Service Plan
412
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Index
A
Accessory delay ..........................93
AdvanceTrac ..............................279
Air cleaner filter .......396–397, 399
Air conditioning ........59, 62, 64, 67
manual heating and air
conditioning system .................59
Airbag supplemental restraint
system ................185–186, 193, 196
and child safety seats ............187
description ..............186, 193, 196
disposal ....................................199
driver airbag ....186, 188, 194, 197
indicator light .........192, 195, 198
operation .........186, 188, 194, 197
passenger
airbag ...............186, 188, 194, 197
side airbag ...............................193
Ambient mood/lighting ...............78
Ambulance packages ....................6
AM/FM .........................................42
Antifreeze
(see Engine coolant) ................373
Anti-lock brake system
(see Brakes) ......................277–278
Anti-theft system ......................138
arming the system ..................139
Armrests ....................................151
Audio system (see Radio) ...40, 42
Automatic transmission
driving an automatic
overdrive .........................291, 293
fluid, adding ....................393, 395
fluid, checking ................393, 395
fluid, refill capacities ..............400
fluid, specification ..................400
Auxiliary input jack (Line in) ....50
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Axle
lubricant specifications ..........400
refill capacities ........................400
B
Battery .......................................371
acid, treating emergencies .....371
jumping a disabled battery ....338
maintenance-free ....................371
replacement, specifications ...399
servicing ..................................371
Bed extender ............................117
Belt-Minder威 .............................180
deactivating/activating the
Belt-Minder威 ...........................183
Booster seats .............................219
Brakes ........................................277
anti-lock ...........................277–278
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light ...........................278
fluid, checking and adding ....393
fluid, refill capacities ..............400
fluid, specifications .................400
lubricant specifications ..........400
parking ....................................278
shift interlock ..................287, 289
trailer .......................................263
Bulbs ............................................78
C
Capacities for refilling fluids ....400
Car2U威 Home Automation
System .......................................108
Cargo management system ......120
CD ................................................42
Cell phone use ..............................8
Changing a tire .........................330
413
Index
Child safety seats ......................204
attaching with tether straps ..214
in front seat ....................205, 211
in rear seat ......................205, 211
LATCH .....................................212
recommendations ...................202
Child safety seats - booster
seats ...........................................219
Cleaning your vehicle
engine compartment ..............355
instrument panel ............357–358
interior .....................................359
plastic parts ............................356
safety belts ..............................359
washing ....................................353
waxing .....................................354
wheels ......................................354
wiper blades ............................356
Climate control
(see Air conditioning or
Heating) .....................59, 62, 64, 67
Clock adjust
AM/FM .......................................43
AM/FM Stereo ...........................42
Compass, electronic ....................88
calibration .................................89
set zone adjustment .................89
Console ........................................88
Controls
power seat ...............................153
steering column ......................101
Coolant
checking and adding ..............373
refill capacities ................376, 400
specifications ..........................400
Cruise control
(see Speed control) ....................98
Customer Assistance ................319
414
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Ford Extended Service
Plan ..........................................410
Getting assistance outside the
U.S. and Canada .....................350
Getting roadside assistance ...319
Getting the service you
need .........................................346
Ordering additional owner’s
literature .................................351
Utilizing the
Mediation/Arbitration
Program ...................................350
D
Daytime running lamps
(see Lamps) ................................74
Defrost
rear window and rearview
mirrors ...........................62, 64, 67
windshield .....................62, 64, 67
Dipstick
automatic transmission
fluid ..................................393, 395
engine oil .................................368
Driving under special
conditions ..................296, 309, 312
sand .........................................311
snow and ice ...........................313
through water .................311, 314
E
Electronic message center ...22, 30
Emergencies, roadside
jump-starting ..........................338
running out of fuel .........338, 385
Emission control system ..........389
Engine ................................404–405
cleaning ...................................355
Index
coolant .....................................373
fail-safe cooling .......................377
idle speed control ...................371
lubrication specifications .......400
refill capacities ........................400
service points ..................365–366
Engine block heater .................275
Engine oil ..................................368
checking and adding ..............368
dipstick ....................................368
filter, specifications ........370, 399
recommendations ...................370
refill capacities ........................400
specifications ..........................400
Event data recording ....................7
Exhaust fumes ..........................275
detergent in fuel .....................385
filler funnel .............................385
filling your vehicle with
fuel ...........................379, 381, 386
filter, specifications ........378, 399
fuel pump shut-off ..................321
improving fuel economy ........386
octane rating ...383–384, 404–405
quality ......................................384
running out of fuel .........338, 385
safety information relating to
automotive fuels .....................379
Fuel - flex fuel vehicle
(FFV) .........................379, 383–384
Fuses ..................................321–322
F
G
Fail safe cooling ........................377
Fleet MyKey programming ......141
Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) ....379
Fluid capacities .........................400
Fog lamps ....................................73
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles .......301
driving off road .......................307
electronic shift ........................304
indicator light .........................301
lever operated shift ................302
preparing to drive your
vehicle .....................................286
Fuel ............................................379
calculating fuel
economy ......................26, 32, 386
cap ...........................................381
capacity ...................................400
choosing the right fuel ...........383
comparisons with EPA fuel
economy estimates .................389
Garage door opener ..................104
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............381
Gas mileage
(see Fuel economy) .................386
Gauges .........................................18
transmission fluid
temperature gauge ...................22
H
Hazard flashers .........................320
Headlamps ...................................72
aiming ..................................74–75
autolamp system .......................72
bulb specifications ....................79
daytime running lights .............74
flash to pass ..............................73
high beam .................................73
replacing bulbs .........................79
turning on and off ....................72
415
Index
Heating
heating and air conditioning
system .....................59, 62, 64, 67
Homelink wireless control
system ........................................104
Hood ..........................................364
I
Ignition .......................271, 404–405
Illuminated visor mirror .............87
Infant seats
(see Safety seats) .....................204
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
testing ........................................391
Instrument panel
cleaning ...........................357–358
cluster ........................................12
J
Jack ............................................330
positioning ...............................330
storage .....................................330
Jump-starting your vehicle ......338
K
Keyless entry system
autolock ...................................127
keypad .....................................136
locking and unlocking doors ..137
programming entry code .......137
Keys ...........................126, 139–140
positions of the ignition .........271
L
Lamps
autolamp system .......................72
416
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
bulb replacement
specifications chart ..................79
daytime running light ...............74
fog lamps ...................................73
headlamps .................................72
headlamps, flash to pass ..........73
interior lamps .....................76–77
replacing bulbs ...................79, 83
LATCH anchors .........................212
Lights, warning and indicator ....12
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........278
Limited-slip axle .......................286
Load limits .................................249
Loading instructions .................256
Locks
autolock ...................................127
childproof ................................130
doors ........................................126
Lubricant specifications ...........400
Lug nuts ....................................337
Lumbar support, seats .....152–153
M
Message center .....................22, 30
english/metric button .........26, 35
system check button ................35
warning messages ...............26, 35
Mirrors ...................................93–94
automatic dimming rearview
mirror ........................................93
fold away ...................................95
heated ......................62, 64, 67, 95
programmable memory ..........132
side view mirrors (power) .......94
signal .........................................96
Moon roof ..................................103
Motorcraft威 parts ..............362, 399
Index
MyKey ........................................141
N
6-CD in dash .............................42
Rear heated seats .....................165
Rear-view camera system .........299
Navigation system .......................58
O
Recommendations for
attaching safety restraints for
children ......................................202
Octane rating ....................383–384
Oil (see Engine oil) ..................368
Relays ........................................321
P
Parental MyKey
programming .............................141
Parking brake ............................278
Parts
(see Motorcraft威 parts) ...........399
Passenger Occupant
Classification Sensor .................167
Power deployable running
boards ..........................................97
Power distribution box
(see Fuses) .......................322, 325
Power door locks ......................126
Power mirrors .............................94
Power point .................................90
Power steering ..........................285
fluid, checking and adding ....392
fluid, refill capacity ................400
fluid, specifications .................400
Power Windows ...........................91
Preparing to drive your
vehicle ........................................286
R
Radio ......................................40, 42
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Remote entry system ...............130
illuminated entry ....................135
locking/unlocking doors .131–132
panic alarm .............................132
replacement/additional
transmitters .............................134
replacing the batteries ...........133
Reverse sensing system ...........297
Roadside assistance ..................319
S
Safety belts
(see Safety restraints) ............166,
170–172, 176–177, 179
Safety Canopy ...........193–194, 196
Safety defects, reporting ..........352
Safety
restraints ...166, 170–172, 176–179
Belt-Minder威 ...........................180
Belt-Minder威,
deactivating/activating ...........183
extension assembly ................184
for adults .........171–172, 176–177
for children .............................199
lap belt ....................................174
Occupant Classification
Sensor ......................................167
warning light and
chime ...............................179–180
417
Index
Safety restraints - LATCH
anchors ......................................212
Safety seats for children ..........204
Safety Compliance
Certification Label ....................405
Satellite Radio (if equipped) .....42
Satellite Radio Information ........55
Seats ..........................................147
child safety seats ....................204
cleaning ...................................360
climate control ............64, 67, 159
easy access/easyout feature ..155
heated ........................62, 157, 165
memory seat ...................132, 155
SecuriCode keyless entry
system ........................................136
SecuriLock passive anti-theft
system ................................138, 140
Servicing your vehicle ..............363
Setting the clock .........................43
AM/FM stereo ...........................42
Snowplowing .................6, 315–316
SOS Post Crash Alert ...............199
Spark plugs,
specifications .............399, 404–405
Special notice
ambulance conversions ..............6
four-wheel drive vehicles .......317
utility-type vehicles ....................6
Specification chart,
lubricants ...................................400
Speed control ..............................98
Starting a flex fuel vehicle .......274
Starting your
vehicle ........................271–272, 274
jump starting ..........................338
418
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Steering wheel
controls ....................................101
tilting ...................................85–86
Stereo
6-CD in dash .............................42
CD-MP3 .....................................42
SYNC威 ..........................................58
T
Tailgate ..............................113–114
Tilt steering wheel ......................85
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)
Tires, Wheels and Loading ....241
Tires ...........................225–227, 330
alignment ................................234
care ..........................................230
changing ..........................330, 333
checking the pressure ............230
inflating ...................................228
label .........................................240
replacing ..................................231
rotating ....................................234
safety practices .......................233
sidewall information ...............235
snow tires and chains ............248
spare tire .................................330
terminology .............................227
tire grades ...............................226
treadwear ........................226, 230
Towing .......................................256
recreational towing .................269
Trailer Brake
Controller-Integrated ..............263
trailer towing ..........................256
Trailer Brake
Controller-Integrated ................263
Transfer case
fluid checking .........................396
Index
Transmission .............................291
brake-shift interlock
(BSI) ................................287, 289
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) .....................393, 395
fluid, refill capacities ..............400
lubricant specifications ..........400
Turn signal ..................................76
Vehicle loading ..........................249
U
Water, Driving through .............314
Universal garage door
opener ........................................104
USB port ......................................52
Windows
power .........................................91
V
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ..........................................406
Ventilating your vehicle ...........275
W
Warning lights (see Lights) .......12
Washer fluid ..............................367
Windshield washer fluid and
wipers ..........................................84
checking and adding fluid .....367
replacing wiper blades ...........368
419
2010 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download PDF

advertising